WinCC Graphics Designer

WinCC
Graphics Designer
Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Edition August 1997
WinCC, SIMATIC, SINEC, STEP are Siemens registered trademarks.

All other product and system names in this manual are (registered) trademarks of their respective owners
and must be treated accordingly.
(The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its

contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or
design, are reserved.)
(We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement

with the hardware and software described. Since deviations
cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full
agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed
regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent
editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.)
Siemens AG 1994 - 1997 All rights reserved
Technical data subject to change
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
08.97
Graphics Designer
Table of Contents
1
Functionality ..............................................................................
1-1
Structure ....................................................................................
2-1
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.4
2.4.1
2.5
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.6.6
2.6.7
2.6.8
2.7
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.9
2.10
Color Palette ...............................................................................

Assigning a Standard Color.........................................................
Assigning a User-Defined Color...................................................
Object Palette .............................................................................
Drawing an Object.......................................................................
Selecting an Object .....................................................................
Changing Object Properties.........................................................
Moving an Object with the Mouse................................................
Sizing an Object with the Mouse..................................................
Changing the Start Angle/End Angle with the Mouse...................
Style Palette................................................................................
Changing the Line Style ..............................................................
Changing the Line Weight ...........................................................
Changing the Line End Styles......................................................
Changing the Fill Pattern.............................................................
Alignment Palette........................................................................
Aligning Objects ..........................................................................
Zoom Palette...............................................................................
Menu Bar ....................................................................................
File Menu ....................................................................................
Edit Menu....................................................................................
View Menu ..................................................................................
Insert...........................................................................................
Align............................................................................................
Options Menu..............................................................................
Window Menu .............................................................................
Help Menu...................................................................................
Standard Toolbar ........................................................................
Font Palette ................................................................................
Changing the Font.......................................................................
Changing the Font Size...............................................................
Changing the Font Color .............................................................
Changing the Line Color..............................................................
Status Bar ...................................................................................
Layer Bar ....................................................................................
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-17
2-18
2-21
2-26
2-30
2-30
2-32
2-33
2-34
2-35
2-37
2-37
2-37
2-37
2-37
2-38
2-38
Graphics Designer
2.11
2.11.1
2.11.2
2.11.3
2.11.4
2.11.5
2.11.6
2.11.7
2.11.7.1
2.11.7.2
2.11.7.3
Object Properties ........................................................................

Display Object Properties............................................................
Pin ..............................................................................................
Pipettes for Transferring Object Properties..................................
Object List...................................................................................
"Properties" Tab..........................................................................
"Event" Tab.................................................................................
Setting Dynamics with a Direct Connection..................................
Constants as Source of a Direct Connection................................
Object Properties as Source of Direct Connections .....................
Tags as Source of Direct Connections.........................................
2-39
2-39
2-39
2-40
2-40
2-40
2-50
2-52
2-55
2-56
2-57
Configuring Actions ..................................................................
3-1
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.1.1
3.2.1.2
3.2.1.2.1
3.2.1.2.2
3.2.1.2.3
3.2.1.2.4
3.2.1.2.5
3.2.1.2.6
3.2.1.2.7
3.2.1.3
3.2.1.4
3.2.2
Introduction .................................................................................
Linking Actions with Graphic Objects...........................................
Making Object Properties Dynamic..............................................
Setting Dynamics Using the Dynamics Dialog..............................
Adding Dynamics with the Dynamic-Wizard.................................
System Functions........................................................................
Miscellaneous Functions .............................................................
Standard Dynamics.....................................................................
Import Functions .........................................................................
Picture Functions ........................................................................
User Archive Functions ...............................................................
Example of a configured Dynamic ...............................................
Setting Dynamics with a C Action................................................
Setting Dynamics with a Tag Value .............................................
Reacting to Events ......................................................................
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-15
3-16
3-16
3-16
3-17
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-21
3-32
3-35
Appendix ....................................................................................
4-1
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.1.9
4.1.10
4.1.11
4.1.12
4.1.13
4.1.14
ii
08.97
Object types and their properties.................................................

Line Properties............................................................................
Polygon Properties......................................................................
Polyline Properties ......................................................................
Ellipse Properties ........................................................................
Circle Properties..........................................................................
Ellipse Segment Properties .........................................................
Pie Segment Properties...............................................................
Ellipse Arc Properties..................................................................
Circular Arc Properties ................................................................
Rectangle Properties...................................................................
Rounded Rectangle Properties....................................................
Static Text Properties..................................................................
Application Window Properties....................................................
Picture Window Properties ..........................................................
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-14
4-15
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.15
4.1.16
4.1.17
4.1.18
4.1.19
4.1.20
4.1.21
4.1.22
4.1.23
4.1.24
4.1.25
4.1.26
4.1.27
4.1.28
4.2
4.3
4.4
OLE Control Properties ...............................................................

OLE Object Properties ................................................................
I/O Field Properties .....................................................................
Bar Properties .............................................................................
Graphic Object (External Format) Properties...............................
Status Display Properties ............................................................
Text List Properties .....................................................................
Button Properties ........................................................................
Check Box Properties..................................................................
Option Group Properties..............................................................
Round Button Properties .............................................................
Slider Properties..........................................................................
Group Properties.........................................................................
Picture Properties........................................................................
Attributes in Alphabetical Order...................................................
Output formats for I/O-Fields .......................................................
Assignments for Text Lists ..........................................................
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-20
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-27
4-29
4-31
4-33
4-35
4-37
4-38
4-39
4-72
4-76
iii
Graphics Designer
iv
08.97
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Preface
Purpose of the
Manual
This manual introduces you to the functions of each software component and
their operation in a reference manual format. You can find the information
you need quickly by using the table of contents or the index. Naturally, the
information is also available to you in the on-line help in either a
context-sensitive fashion or in the on-line help contents.
Total Overview and

Configuration
Example
The "Getting Started" manual, which is part of the WinCC package, contains
a total overview of WinCC and a configuration example in which the most
significant functions of the individual components are followed through in a
practical application.
Additional Support
If you have technical questions, please address them to your Siemens contact
partner, located in the businesses responsible for your location. You can find
the addresses in the attachment entitled Siemens Worldwide, in "S7-300
Automation System Structure in an S7-300," in catalogs, and on CompuServe
(go.autforum). In addition, you may call our Hotline at 011-49-911-895-7000
(Fax 7001).
You can find additional information on the Internet under the address
www.aut.siemens.de/coros/html_00/coros.htm.
Information about
SIMATIC products
Up to date information about SIMATIC products can be obtained:

* from the Internet under http://www.aut.siemens.de/
* via fax# 08765-93 02 77 95 00
In addition, the SIMATIC Customer Support provides current information
and downloads that can be beneficial for the utilization of SIMATIC products:
* from the Internet under
http://www.aut.siemens.de/support/html_00/index.shtml
* via the SIMATIC Customer Support Mailbox under phone# +49 (911)
895-7100
* To address the mailbox, use a modem with up to V.34 (28.8 kBaud),
which parameters must be set as follows: 8, N, 1, ANSI, or dial up through
ISDN (x.75, 64 kBit).
The SIMATIC Customer Support can be reached by phone under the number
+49 (911) 895-7000 and by fax under the number +49 (911) 895-7002.
Inquiries can also be made via Internet mail or mail addressed to the above
mailbox.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Graphics Designer
vi
08.97
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
1 Functionality
Graphics Designer is used to create process pictures. It offers the following
features:
Easy to use, simple interface with tool and graphic palettes

Streamlined configuration with integrated object and icon libraries
Open interfaces for importing graphics and supporting the OLE 2.0
interface
Configurable dynamic behavior of picture objects with support from an

assistant (Dynamic Wizard)
Links to additional functions by means of powerful script configuration

Links to graphic objects that you can create yourself
32-bit application, capable of running under Windows 95 and
Windows NT
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
1-1
Graphics Designer
1-2
08.97
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
2 Structure
Graphics Designer contains the following items:
Palettes for creating and editing graphic objects:

-
Color Palette
Object Palette
Style Palette
Alignment Palette
Zoom Palette
Font Palette
Palettes and bars for operating the Graphics Designer:

-
Menu Bar
Standard Palette
Status Bar
Layer Bar
A dialog window for setting and changing object properties:

-
Tips & Tricks
Object Properties
When you start Graphics Designer, the "Tips & Tricks" window appears.
Click on the "Help" button to see notes about configuration.

Note: If you deselect the "Show tips at startup" check box, the system will not
display the window any longer. You cannot undo this selection.
Context Sensitive
Help
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
By switching the context sensitive help on, you receive help text about
palettes, menu commands, and buttons. It also assists you in finding
additional information in on-line help .
2-1
Graphics Designer
08.97
How to Get Information About the Palettes, Menu Commands, and

Buttons:
1. In the Graphics Designer toolbar, click on the "Help"
button.
A question mark appears on the mouse pointer.

2. Click on the palette, menu command, or button about which you want
information.
Changing the Palette In order to have a better overview of the entries in the palettes, especially
those in the object and style palettes, you can change the size of the palettes.
Size
How to Change the Size of the Palettes:

1. Click on the palette border, hold down the left mouse button, and drag the
palette into the workspace.
2. Drag the palette to the desired size as you do with other Windows objects.
3. While holding down the left mouse button, move the palette to wherever
you want it on the screen.
2.1 Color Palette

Through the color palette, you can assign one of the 16 standard colors, a
basic color, or a color you define yourself to the selected objects by using the
mouse.
For example, a mouse click within the color palette changes any of the
following colors:
The fill color for area objects (for example, rectangles)

The line color for line objects (for example, polylines)
The background color for text objects
Note:
The color palette can be turned on or off via the
ToolbarsToolbars>procedure entry from the View menu.
2.1.1 Assigning a Standard Color

How to Assign a Standard Color to an Object:
1. Click on the object.
2. Click on one of the 16 standard colors in the color palette.
2-2
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
2.1.2 Assigning a User-Defined Color

How to Assign a User-Defined Color to an Object:
2. Click on the
icon in the color palette.
3. Click on the color you want in the "Basic Colors" or the user-defined
colors.
or
Click on the "Define Color >>" button to create another color
combination.
2.2 Object Palette

Using the object palette, select an object which will be created in the first
visible layer of the graphics workspace. Layer 0 is assigned to this purpose in
Graphics Designer. The objects available are arranged by the following
subject areas:
Standard Objects which include polygon, ellipse, and rectangle

Smart Objects which include OLE control, OLE object, bar, and I/O field
Windows Objects which include Button and Check Box
Notes:
You can also access the object palette using only the keyboard by pressing
"Alt + O" and then using the arrow keys.
You can place the object palette anywhere in the workspace or anchor it to a
border.
The object palette can be turned on or off via the
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-3
Graphics Designer
08.97
Standard Objects
Line
Polygon
Polyline
Ellipse
Circle
Ellipse Segment
Pie Segment
Ellipse Arc
Circular Arc
Rectangle
Rounded Rectangle
Graphic Objects are used primarily to draw system pictures. The look of the
objects can by changed at run time by making them dynamic (for example, by
linking them to the process).
Static Text
Static Text is implemented to represent text. Static means that the text is
within a text object (no dynamic reference). You can change the look,
location, and contents of the text box during run time.
If a static text is to extend for multiple lines, a line return can be inserted via
the key combinations <Shift Return> or <Ctrl m>.
Smart Objects
Application Window
Application Windows are objects managed by the message system (Alarm
Logging), the archive system (Tag Logging), the report system (Print Jobs),
and also by applications (Global Scripts). In Graphics Designer, the outside
properties (position, size, and other attributes) are configured and transferred
to the application at run time. The application opens the application window
and manages it for display and operation.
2-4
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Picture Window
Picture Windows are objects that accept pictures created with the Graphics
Designer. They are configured according to position, size, and their other
dynamic properties. For example, one important property is a reference to the
picture (picture name) to be displayed in the picture window. By changing the
"Picture Name" attribute dynamically at run time, the contents of the window
can be changed dynamically.
OLE Control
Use an OLE Control to implement Windows elements (like a button or a
selection box). An OLE control has attributes which are displayed in the
"Object Properties" window "Event" tab and can be edited there.
OLE Object
Graphics Designer offers the opportunity to insert OLE Objects in a graphic.
In the CONFIGURATION mode, you can edit a few objects with the
appropriate OLE application by double clicking; others are activated by
double clicking.
After you have made changes to a linked OLE object in an attached object
box, you must update the link manually in order to display the changes.
You cannot edit in the RUNTIME mode.
I/O Field
You can use the I/O Field as an input field, an output field, or a combined
I/O field. The binary, hexadecimal, decimal, or string data formats are
possible. You can also specify limit values, hidden input, or acceptance on
full.
Bar
The Bar is assigned to the Smart Objects group. Its properties (attributes)
influence its appearance and functionality. It displays values graphically
relative to a high and a low limit, either as a purely graphic overview or as a
combined representation of the values with a scale that you can define.
Graphic Object (External Format)
Use the Graphic Object (External Format) to accept a picture that was
created in an external graphic format into a Graphics Designer picture.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-5
Graphics Designer
08.97
Status Display
Use the Status Display to display any number of different states of an object.
You can make the display dynamic by connecting it to a tag whose value
corresponds to the status. You can assign any number from 0 to 2 32 -1 (bit
combination).
The states can accommodate gaps (1, 2, 5, 6, etc.). It is possible to have states
without assigned pictures, which can, if necessary, be removed with the
Clear List command.
Text List
Use the text list to assign text to values. It can be used as an input list (text
input --> value output), output list (value input --> text output), or combined
text list. The decimal, binary, or bit data formats are possible.
The "decimal" list type displays the text assigned to the output value. When
you enter a text, the assigned value is transferred as an input value to the data
manager. If a value range is assigned to the text, the bottom range limit is
transferred. This also applies to "top open" value ranges (for example,
>=100). With "bottom open" value ranges (for example, <=0), the top range
limit is transferred.
The "binary" list type displays a text that is assigned to a bit of the output
value if that bit is set. In this case, only one bit may be set in the output value
(one text is displayed). The text assigned to that bit number is output. If more
than one bit is set in the output value, the text "***" is output. When you
enter a text, the data manager receives the input value of the value in which
exactly that bit is set whose number corresponds to the text entered.
The "bit" list type displays a text that relates to the status of a defined bit in
the output value. Exactly two texts can be configured. One text is configured
if the bit is set, and another text if the bit is not set. When you enter a text, the
appropriate bit is set or deleted in the available output value and the new
value is used as the input value. The relevant bit is determined by a unique
property (bit number).
When you use a text list object, the configured list of text assignments is
opened. In the case of the "decimal" and "binary" list types, the text that
corresponds to the current output value is selected. In the case of the "bit" list
type, the opposing text to the current status is selected because use of this list
type normally serves to "turn" a bit and therefore make further operation
unnecessary.
The text list object can be connected to the text library via the Language
Switch attribute. During the configuration, entered text is automatically
written to the text library. In the text library, the texts to be displayed can be
translated. If you switch data languages, the system will read the
corresponding translations from the text library.
2-6
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
3D Bar
The 3D Bar is assigned to the smart objects group. Its properties (attributes)
influence its appearance and functionality.
It displays values graphically relative to a high and low limit. You can
configure the type of the 3D display in any way you wish.
The 3D Bar is part of the Basic Process Control option package.
Group Display
The Group Display object provides a hierarchically concentrated display of
the current states of certain message types. Although, there is no connection
to the message system within WinCC.
Use the group display in RUNTIME mode to execute a picture change to the
picture in which the error source is displayed. This opportunity for rapid
navigation to an error source is a very significant function for the user.
Note: The group display cannot be configured "on line" (in RUNTIME mode)
because this can lead to an incorrect display in RUNTIME mode.
The Group Display is part of the Basic Process Control option package.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-7
Graphics Designer
08.97
Windows Objects
Button
The Button is used to control process events (like acknowledging messages or
warnings). It recognizes two states ("pressed" and "not pressed"). The link to
the process is achieved by making the corresponding attributes dynamic.
Check-Box
The Check Box is used when you need a multiple selection. You can select
one or multiple boxes in the check box by clicking on it. A very flexible link
to the process can also be achieved here by making the corresponding
attributes dynamic.
Option Group
The Option Group is similar to the check box but only allows a single
selection. The process link from the option group can be created at run time
by making the attribute dynamic.
Round Button
The Round Button is implemented like the button for operating process
events. However, in contrast to that button, the round button also has a latch
down setting for both the "pressed" and "not pressed" states. The process link
is achieved by making the appropriate attributes dynamic.
Slider
The Slider is implemented as a movement regulator for controlling a process
(for example, temperature control). The control range lies between the
minimum and maximum values. You can establish a link to the process by
making the appropriate attributes dynamic.
2-8
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
2.2.1 Drawing an Object

Before you begin
All objects are drawn with the default object properties in the first visible
layer of the graphic workspace. Layer 0 is assigned for this purpose in
Graphics Designer. You can change all of these default settings (see
"Changing Object Properties").
How to Draw an Object:

1. Select the desired object by using the mouse in the object palette.
2. In the workspace, click the mouse where you want to place the object.
Then drag the cursor while pressing the mouse button until the object
reaches the desired size.
or
Click on the workspace. The object is then displayed in a system default
size.
or
1. Activate the object palette with the keystroke combination "Alt + O".
2. Select the object type using the arrow keys.
3. Create the selected object with defaults by hitting the "Enter" key.
How to Draw a Polygon or a Polyline:

1. Select the "Polygon" or "Polyline" icon from the object palette.
2. Click the left mouse button on the starting point.
3. Click the left mouse button on each of the other corner points.
4. By clicking the right mouse button, you can correct the part of the object
you entered last.
5. End the polygon or the polyline by double clicking the left mouse button.
The polygon is closed while the polyline is not.
6. If you double click on a location on the line, you can enter an additional
corner point. In order to delete a corner, you must double click on the
corner while pressing the "Ctrl" key.
Note: If you turn on the "Grid"
and the "Snap to Grid"
you can align the drawn objects with each other much better.
After Drawing
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
functions,
After an object is drawn, the object palette automatically changes to the

"Select Object" mode. Now you can create another object or select an object
which is already in the workspace and change its properties. You can change
the defaults using the menu "Options" - "Settings ..." in the "Options" tab.
2-9
Graphics Designer
08.97
2.2.2 Selecting an Object

How to Select an Object:
Click on the object with the mouse.
How to Select Multiple Objects (Multiple Selection):

Hold down the "Shift" key and click on each object with the mouse.
or
Hold down the mouse button and drag a frame ("lasso") around the objects
you want to select.
Note: If you used the "Options" - "Settings ..." menu to select the
"Touching" option under "Object Selection" in the "Options" tab, you can
mark the objects you want by simply touching them with the lasso. With the
"Surrounding" option, all of the objects to be marked must be completely
enclosed by the lasso.
2.2.3 Changing Object Properties

How to Change the Object Properties:
1. Click on an object with the mouse.
2. Click the right mouse button to open the pop-up menu.
3. Click on "Properties" to display the object properties.
4. In the "Properties" tab, select the corresponding attribute to change the
object property.
Note: With multiple selection, all of the attributes of the selected objects are
listed in the "Properties" tab. However, only attribute values that are identical
in all of the objects are displayed.
Setting Object
Properties
You can set default object properties for each object type. These defaults are
used each time a new object is created.
How to Set the Defaults for Object Properties:

1. Open the dialog window with the object properties by means of the
button on the standard palette or the "View" - "Properties" menu and
.
attach it to the screen with the Pin
2. Select an object type from the object palette. The properties for the
corresponding default object are displayed.
3. Change the desired object properties in the "Properties" tab in the "Static"
column.
2-10
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4. When you exit Graphics Designer, you can save the presettings by means
of the "Options" - "Settings" menu in the "Default Objects" tab.
Note: You can change some properties directly, like line and border style, or
background color, by using the style or color palettes.
2.2.4 Moving an Object with the Mouse

How to Move an Object with the Mouse:
1. Click on an object and hold down the left mouse button.
2. Drag the object to the desired position.
function is enabled, the object can only be
Note: If the "Snap to Grid"
shifted according to the grid setting.
2.2.5 Sizing an Object with the Mouse

How to Change the Size of an Object with the Mouse:
1. Click the mouse on the object. The object is then surrounded by a
rectangle with 8 handles.
Example:
2. Click on one of these handles and hold down the left mouse button.
3. Drag the object to the desired size.
You can change the size of the object diagonally with one of the four corner
handles. Change the size horizontally or vertically with one of the handles in
the middle of the border.
2.2.6 Changing the Start Angle/End Angle with the Mouse

The "Change the Start and End Angle" function relates to the objects "Ellipse
Segment," "Ellipse Arc," "Pie Segment," and "Circular Arc."
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-11
Graphics Designer
08.97
How to Change the Start/End Angle of an Object with the Mouse:

1. Click on the object with the mouse. The object is then surrounded by a
rectangle with 8 handles. The end points of the curved object are identified
by somewhat larger handles.
Example:
2. Click on one of the larger handles and hold down the mouse button. The
pointer changes to a crosshair with an S (Start Angle) or an E (End
Angle) attached.
3. Drag the object to the desired size.
Example:
You can change the size of the object diagonally with one of the four corner
handles. Change the size horizontally or vertically with one of the handles in
the middle of the border.
2.3 Style Palette

Change the look of the selected object using the style palette. Depending on
the object type, there are different types of styles available. For example:
Line/Border Styles
Line/Border Weights
Line End Styles for line objects
Fill Patterns
Note:
The settings that are currently selected are displayed in a bold typeface.
You can also operate the style palette with the keystroke combination "Alt +
S" and the arrow keys.
You can place the style palette anywhere in the workspace or anchor it to a
border.
The style palette can be turned on or off via the
2-12
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
2.3.1 Changing the Line Style

The look of lines and borders can be altered by changing the line properties.
There are different line styles available, like dot, dash, solid, etc. You can
select the type of line or border from the style palette.
How to Change the Line/Border Style Using the Style Palette:

2. Click on
in the Style Palette.
or
Click on the
in front of your selection to open it.
3. Click on the line you want to use from the selection available.
or
1. Activate the style palette using the keystroke combination "Alt + S."
2. Select the line style you want using the arrow keys.
3. Accept the setting by hitting the "Enter" key.
Note: If you select the line/border styles "dash," "dot," "dash dot," and "dash
dot dot," a weight of 1 pixel is always displayed regardless of the selected line
weight.
2.3.2 Changing the Line Weight

The look of lines and borders can be altered by changing the weight. There
are different weights available. You can select the thickness of the lines or
borders from the style palette. The values provided correspond to a line/border
weight measured in pixels.
How to Change the Line/Border Weight Using the Style Palette:

2. Double click on the
icon in the style palette.
or
Click on the
3. Click on the weight you want to use from the selection available.
or
2. Select the line weight you want using the arrow keys.
Note: The weight can only be enlarged for the "solid" line/border style. A line
weight of 1 pixel is always displayed for all other line/border styles even if
you select a larger line weight.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-13
Graphics Designer
08.97
2.3.3 Changing the Line End Styles

The look of line ends can be altered by changing the line properties. There are
different line end styles available, like none, one-sided, two-sided, and thin or
thick arrows. You can select the type of line end style from the style palette.
How to Change the Line End Styles Using the Style Palette:
1. Click on a line object with the mouse.
2. Double click on the
or
Click on the
3. Click on the line end style you want to use from the selection available.
or
2. Select the line end style you want using the arrow keys.
Note: The "Line End Style" property is not available for borders around
surface objects.
2.3.4 Changing the Fill Pattern

The look of the background surfaces of objects can be altered by changing the
object properties. There are different fill patterns available, like solid, striped,
transparent, etc. You can select the fill pattern from the style palette.
How to Change the Fill Pattern Using the Style Palette:

1. Click on the surface object.
2. Click on the
or
Click on the
3. Click on the fill pattern you want to use from the selection available.
or
2. Select the fill pattern you want using the arrow keys.
2-14
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
2.4 Alignment Palette

With the alignment palette , you can perform any of the following actions:
Change the absolute location of one or more objects.

Change the location of the selected objects relative to each other.
Unify the height and width of multiple objects.
The following alignment functions are available for the selected objects:
Align Objects Left
(Menu Arrange - Align - Left)
Align Objects Right
(Menu Arrange - Align - Right)
Align Objects Top
(Menu Arrange - Align - Top)
Align Objects Bottom
(Menu Arrange - Align - Bottom)
Center Objects Horizontally
(Menu Arrange - Align - Center Horizontally)
Center Objects Vertically
(Menu Arrange - Align - Center Vertically)
Space Objects Horizontally
(Menu Arrange - Align - Space Horizontally)
Space Objects Vertically
(Menu Arrange - Align - Space Vertically)
Unify the Width of the Objects
(Menu Arrange - Align - Same Width)
Unify the Height of the Objects
(Menu Arrange - Align - Same Height)
Unify the Width and Height of the Objects
(Menu Arrange - Align - Same Width and Height).
Note:
You can place the alignment palette anywhere in the workspace or anchor it
to a border.
The alignment palette can be turned on or off via the
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-15
Graphics Designer
08.97
2.4.1 Aligning Objects

How to Align Objects:
1. Select the objects that you want to realign.
2. Click on the corresponding icon in the alignment palette.
The objects are realigned.
Note: For the functions Left, Right, Top, and Bottom, the type of
selection determines, which object will be used as reference for the alignment.
If the objects have been selected via a selection frame (lasso), the object
located the furthest out will be used as reference.
If the objects have been selected via the mouse and the Shift key, the object
selected first will be used as reference for the alignment.
How to Unify the Width/Height of Objects:

1. While holding down the "Shift" key, click on the objects you want to unify
in your workspace.
2. Click on the appropriate icon in the alignment palette.
The objects are all set to the width and/or height of the object that was
selected first. The line weight, however, is not changed.
Note: If you select the objects with the mouse (border), they assume the width
and/or height of the object which was implemented first in this group.
Note: The type of selection determines, which object will be used as reference
for the alignment.
for the alignment.
for the alignment.
for the alignment.
2-16
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
2.5 Zoom Palette

The zoom palette lets you use the mouse on the slider or the buttons to set the
zoom factor of the active window. The current zoom factor is displayed below
the slider.
You can also set Zoom step-by-step using the standard toolbar functions.
Notes:
You can also control the zoom palette using the keystroke combination
"Alt + Z" and the arrow keys.
You can place the zoom palette anywhere in the workspace or anchor it to a
border.
The zoom palette can be turned on or off via the
How to Set the Zoom Factor:

1. Holding down the mouse button, drag the slider to the desired zoom
factor.
or
Click above or below the control. The zoom factor is set to the appropriate
zoom level according to the position of the mouse.
or
Use one of the buttons to set the zoom factor to the standard sizes 8, 4, 1,
or .
2. After you release the mouse button, the picture is displayed at the zoom
factor (percentage) shown in the zoom palette.
2.6 Menu Bar

The menu bar contains all of the menu commands available in Graphics
Designer. Commands which cannot be activated are shown in gray.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-17
Graphics Designer
08.97
2.6.1 File Menu

New...
Create an empty window with the "New" command. You can draw a new
picture in this window.
Graphics Designer provides an empty workspace with a default name
NewPdlx. The x is incremented every time a new picture is created. When you
save, you can change the name.
Open ...
Load an existing file to the workspace with the "Open ..." command.
The project-specific files for Graphics Designer (file name extension .PDL)
are listed as defaults.
For further information about the process of file selection, see the Windows
95 description or the Windows NT description.
Note: With a "Multi-User System" project type, another user may already
have the picture file open that you want to open. In this case, the system opens
a copy of the file with write protection. If you make changes, this file must be
saved under another name.
Close
Remove the opened file from the screen with the "Close" command.
If you have not yet saved a change to the file, Graphics Designer asks if you
want to save the file. If you answer with "Yes," the file is saved. If the file is a
new picture, you open the "File" - "Save As ..." dialog.
Activate RUNTIME
Use the "Activate RUNTIME" command to switch to RUNTIME mode to

test the current picture.
Note: If you have not saved the picture yet, a dialog window opens and
requests that you do so. If you exit the save dialog by means of "Cancel," the
system does not switch to RUNTIME mode.
Save
Save the current version of your work with the "Save" command. Use
this command when a file is saved for the first time and does not have a
permanent name, or when you want to save a change to the file under the
same path and name.
The program-specific file name extension .PDL is attached to the file name as
a default.
Note: With a "Multi-User System" project type, the picture file to be saved
may have been opened "write protected." In this case, the "Save" function is
not possible. You must save the file under another name.
2-18
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Save As ...
Graphics Designer
Save the current version of your work with the "Save As ..." command. Use
this command if you want to change the name or the path of the file. The
dialog box is like the one for the "Save" command.
For conventions and procedures about assigning a file name and path, see the
Windows 95 description or the Windows NT description.
The program-specific file name extension .PDL is attached to the file name as
a default.
Save All
Print ...
Save the current version of all open work windows under already existing
names with the "Save All" command. If a window has not been named, the
system automatically switches to the "Save As ..." dialog.
Print the open picture to the preset printer with the "Print ..." command.
Print to File
This routes the print output of a picture to a new file in a drive you specify
instead of sending the output directly to a printer. This is useful if you want to
print a picture on a printer which is not available on your system.
Collate
Sorts the pages by sets when you are making multiple sets of a picture.
Graphics Designer prints out the first set completely before it begins printing
the next set.
Print Preview
Use the "Print Preview" command to check the page layout in the print view
before you print it out.
This gives you a view of the print picture with the following Toolbar:
Print
Start the printout.
Next/Previous
View the next/previous page in the print view.
Two Pages
View two pages beside each other on the screen.
One Page
Switch from the two page view back to the single page view.
Zoom In/Zoom Out
Zoom the print preview display with "Zoom In"/"Zoom Out."
Close
Exit the print preview and return to the normal editing view of Graphics
Designer.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-19
Graphics Designer
Printer Setup ...
08.97
Set up the desired printer and its parameters.

Properties
Open a dialog box in which you can set printer-specific properties. These
properties are dependent on the capabilities of the printer that is set. This
means that the dialog boxes are quite different depending on the type of
printer.
Print Feedback
Documentation ...
Print the current picture and all of the objects contained therein along with
their properties with the "Print Feedback Documentation ..." command by
means of the report system in WinCC (Report Designer).
Note: The feedback documentation is sent to the printer that is set in the
Report Designer. You can change the print layout by means of the Report
Designer.
Feedback
Documentation
Preview
Use the "Feedback Documentation Preview" command to check the page

layout of the feedback documentation in the print view before you print it out.
This gives you a view of the print picture with the following Toolbar:
Print
Start the printout.
Next/Previous
View the next/previous page in the print view.
Two Pages
View two pages beside each other on the screen.
One Page
Switch from the two page view back to the single page view.
Zoom In/Zoom Out
Zoom the print preview display with "Zoom In"/"Zoom Out."
Close
Exit the feedback documentation preview.
Export ...
Export the picture which is currently in the configuration window in the

"Enhanced Meta File (.EMF)" or "Windows Meta File (.WMF)" format.
The program-specific file name extension .EMF is attached to the file name
as a default.
Note: When you export a picture created with the Graphics Designer, you lose
all object properties which can be made dynamic that belong to individual
objects.
2-20
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
File List
The file list displays the file names of the four most recently edited pictures.
This area offers you rapid access to the files without having to use the "File" "Open ..." dialog.
Exit
Exit the Graphics Designer.

If you have not yet saved changes to open files, Graphics Designer asks if you
want to save the files. If you answer with "Yes," you open the save dialog (see
"Save File" or "Save File As ...").
Note: You can also exit Graphics Designer implicitly by means of the Control
Center. If you still have a dialog window open in Graphics Designer at that
point, the system releases an appropriate message. You must then exit
Graphics Designer explicitly.
2.6.2 Edit Menu

Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Duplicate
Paste
Take back the last command used in processing the picture (Undo).
Repeats the action that was undone ("Undo") previously.
Remove objects from the picture and place them on the Clipboard. The
picture is stored on the Clipboard until a new "Cut" or "Copy" replaces it.
Create a copy of an object and store it on the Clipboard. The picture is

stored on the Clipboard until a new "Cut" or "Copy" replaces it.
Create a copy of an object directly in the picture. Objects duplicated this way
are not stored on the Clipboard.
Copy the contents of the Clipboard and insert them in the picture. The
contents of the Clipboard do not change.
Delete
Remove all of the highlighted objects from the picture without overwriting the
Clipboard. The objects can only be returned to the picture using the "Undo"
command.
Select All
Highlight all of the objects in the picture.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-21
Graphics Designer
Group
08.97
Group multiple selected objects together in what is known as a group object.

All objects except OLE Controls and OLE Objects may be grouped. All of the
objects in a group can be selected and edited with one single mouse click.
How Make a Group of Objects:

1. Holding the "Shift" key, click on all of the objects that you want to group
together.
or
Draw a border around the desired objects using the mouse.
2. Click on "Group" in the "Edit" menu.
Edit Group Objects
You can change the properties of all of the group elements globally or edit the
properties of each individual element using the "Object Properties" window.
Sample
Object properties of an object group consisting of a line, a circle, and a

rectangle:
2-22
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
How to Edit Objects within a Group:

1. Highlight the group of objects.
2. Display the object properties (by double clicking on the group).
3. Select a property of an individual object or a property from the whole
group.
4. Edit the properties.
Notes:
The properties of the group consist of the default attributes of the group and
the batch of attributes belonging to all of the subobjects. Each attribute is only
listed once. Changing a group attribute has an effect on all of the subobjects
that share the attribute.
Changing the attributes "Position X" and "Position Y" in the group element
does not change the same attributes in the individual elements. Each
individual object retains this property in relation to the group origin.
Ungroup
Ungroup a group of objects so that you can edit each object individually.
TAB Sequence
Influence the sequence in which operable objects are triggered in RUNTIME

mode. Differentiate between the following:
Alpha Cursor Objects

Tab Order Objects
"Alpha Cursor" - "Sequence" generally relates to I/O objects. I/O objects can
also contain a number in the sequence for the Tab order.
"Tab Order" - "Sequence" relates to objects which are selected using the
"Object Type" data area. Open the "Object Type" dialog box with the "Edit" "TAB Sequence" - "Tab Order" - "Settings" command.
Note: Operable I/O objects can possess a number in the TAB sequence for
both the Alpha Cursor and the Tab Order. These are listed according to the
sequence in which they were created.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-23
Graphics Designer
08.97
How to Set the TAB Sequence of the Alpha Cursor:

1. Click on "TAB Sequence" - "Alpha Cursor" - "Sequence" in the "Edit"
menu.
A numbered rectangle appears in the upper left corner of each
input/output object.
2. Click on these rectangles sequentially. The numbers increase

correspondingly.
3. End the input by clicking on an empty space in the workspace.
You can still change numbering later. You can also remove objects from the
TAB sequence or reenter objects in the TAB sequence.
Note: If you hold the "Shift" key and click on the object, the number is reset
to 1.
How to Set the TAB Sequence of the Tab Order:

1. Click on "TAB Sequence" - "Tab Order" - "Sequence" in the "Edit" menu.
A numbered rectangle appears in the upper left corner of each object
selected by "Edit" - "TAB Sequence" - "Tab Order" - "Settings".
2. Click on these rectangles sequentially. The numbers increase

correspondingly.
3. End the input by clicking on an empty space in the workspace.
You can still change numbering later. You can also remove objects from the
TAB sequence or reenter objects in the TAB sequence.
Note: If you hold the "Shift" key and click on the object, the number is reset
to 1.
2-24
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
How to Change the Selection of Object Types for the Tab Order:
1. Click on "TAB Sequence" - "Tab Order" - "Settings ..." in the "Edit"
menu.
2. In the dialog box, click on the object types which should be included in the
TAB sequence of the Tab Order.
How to Change an Existing TAB Sequence:

1. In the "Edit" menu, click on "TAB Sequence" - "Alpha Cursor" or "TAB
Sequence" - "Tab Order."
The TAB sequence number is inserted in the objects.
2. The first object you click on receives the number 1.
3. Now click sequentially on the other objects. They are numbered according
to the order of their selection.
Notes:
If you click on an object while holding the "Shift" key, you assign the number
1 and thus start a new sequence.
In order to renumber only some of the objects, hold the "Ctrl" key and click
on the last object which should retain its number. Numbers above that one are
reassigned to other objects when you click on those objects.
How to Delete an Object from a TAB Sequence:

1. Click on "TAB Sequence" - "Alpha Cursor" or "TAB Sequence" - "Tab
Order" in the "Edit" menu.
The TAB sequence numbers are inserted in the objects.
2. Holding the "Shift" + "Ctrl" keys, click on the object to be deleted from
the TAB sequence.
The number of the object is replaced by an asterisk (*). The objects with
higher numbers are automatically renumbered.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-25
Graphics Designer
08.97
How to Reinsert an Object into the TAB Sequence:

1. Click on "TAB Sequence" - "Alpha Cursor" or "TAB Sequence" - "Tab
Order" in the "Edit" menu.
The TAB sequence number is inserted in the objects.
2. Holding the "Shift" + "Ctrl" keys, click on the object marked with an
asterisk (*) that is to be reinserted in the TAB sequence.
The asterisk (*) is replaced by the next number in the TAB sequence.
Properties
Transfer the properties of an object or an object group to another object using

the "Properties" menu item under the "Edit" menu. You can select from two
functions which can also be accessed using the standard toolbar icons:
Copy Properties
Assign Properties
Copy Properties
Copies the properties from an object (except for the object name and the
properties belonging to the "Geometry" area) in order to transfer them to
another object.
Assign Properties
After you take properties from one object with the "Properties" - "Copy"
command, transfer them to a selected object with the "Properties" - "Assign"
command. Only the properties (attributes) which both objects contain (like
color, line weight, and border weight) are assigned.
2.6.3 View Menu

Properties
Library
Opens a window where the properties of the selected object or object

group are displayed.
Opens the Graphics Designer picture library. You can store objects
created in Graphics Designer as icons under any name you select in this
library. Then you can paste them into other pictures if necessary.
The pictures can be stored in either a global library (path is provided in the
MCP.INI file) or a project-related library (\LIBRARY in project path).
How to Store a Graphic Object in a Library:

1. Highlight the object or the group of objects you want to store under a name
in the library.
2. In the toolbar, select the
button, or click on "Library" in the "View"
menu. The library window will open.
2-26
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
3. Select whether the object should be stored in the "Global Library" or in the
"Project Library."
4. Select a folder in which to store the object.
5. Using the mouse, move the object to the file list. The object receives the
default name Objectx (x = 1, 2, 3 ...). The name remains highlighted.
6. Assign a picture-related name to the object. You can also change the name
of a picture later.
You can also use the pop-up commands "Copy" and "Paste" as well as the
Toolbar icons or the keystroke combination "Ctrl + C" and "Ctrl + V" to
move the object.
Note: Pictures with tag links and actions should not be stored in the "Global
Library" since this could lead to errors when they are linked to other projects.
How to Paste a Graphic Object from a Library:

2. Select whether you want to take the object from the "Global Library" or
from the "Project Library."
3. Select the folder you want to take the object from.
4. Click on the desired object and move it to the Graphics Designer
workspace.
or
Click on the desired object, open the pop-up menu, and click on the
"Copy" command. Click on the Graphics Designer workspace, open the
pop-up menu, and execute the "Paste" command.
How to Change a Picture Name in the Library:

2. Click on the icon for the picture to be changed.
3. Using the right mouse button, open the pop-up menu and execute the
"Rename" command. The file name is highlighted.
4. Input a new name for the picture.
Library Toolbar
The Library Toolbar contains some of the icons that are in the Windows
Explorer Toolbar, plus "Preview."
Toolbars ...
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Turn the palettes and toolbars on and off depending on your need.
2-27
Graphics Designer
08.97
How to Display/Hide Toolbars:

1. Click on "Toolbars ..." in the "View" menu.
2. In the Toolbars dialog, select or deselect palettes and toolbars by

clicking on the corresponding check-boxes. This will turn them on or off.
A check mark in the control box shows that the palette or toolbar is selected.
You can test the effect on the screen display without exiting the dialog box by
using the "Apply" button.
Use the "Restore" button to recreate the last setting of the toolbars that was
saved.
Full Screen
Enlarge the workspace to the full screen size. This hides all palettes and bars.
Switch back to the normal view by pressing any given key or any mouse
button.
Grid ...
You can insert a grid into the workspace in order to make your work
there more precise. If you also switch on the "Snap to Grid" function, all
newly drawn objects are automatically aligned with the grid points.
Note: The minimum grid space displayed on the screen is 10 pixels. If you set
a smaller value (for example, 4 pixels), you can align your objects to that
smaller grid value. However the screen display will show the next evennumbered multiple of that value greater than 10 pixels (in case of a setting of
4 pixels, the screen will display 12).
2-28
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Zoom
Graphics Designer
Change the size of the picture shown on the screen. The view can be
changed according to the following increments:
From 20% to 100% in increments of 10%
From 100% to 400% in increments of 50%
From 400% to 800% in increments of 100%.
With the "Zoom" - "Zoom Area" command, you can select a segment of the
screen with a lasso and enlarge the segment.
Layers ...
Switch layers to active or inactive. This displays or hides the objects in those
different layers. An object is assigned to a layer through its object properties.
How to Make Layers Active/Inactive:

1. Click on "Layers ..." in the "View" menu. This displays the "Settings"
dialog box with the "Visible Layers" tab.
2. Click on the layers in the selection list which are to be set to active. These
are then marked with a check mark in the list.
or
Use the "All On" button to make all of the layers active, or the
"1 to 15 Off" button to deactivate layers 1 to 15.
or
Click on the numbers in the layer bar
be set to visible or invisible.
for the layers to
Notes:
Objects are created in the first visible layer of the graphic workspace. Layer 0
is set as the default for this in Graphics Designer.
The system does not allow you to switch off all of the layers.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-29
Graphics Designer
Language ...
08.97
An object can receive different inputs for different languages. Use the
"Language ..." command to select the language with which the object input is
linked.
Example:
2.6.4 Insert
Import ...
Import graphic objects which are stored in different formats.

The system supports the WMF format (Windows Meta File) and the EMF
format (Enhanced Windows Meta File).
2.6.5 Align
Rotate
Mirror
Align
2-30
Rotate objects by 90 degrees each. Only certain object types can be

rotated (for example, an OLE object cannot be rotated). The properties are
appropriately adjusted during a rotation (for example, when a text box is
rotated by 90 degrees, the text orientation changes from "horizontal" to
"vertical").
Mirror objects on the horizontal or vertical middle axis of the object.

Only certain object types can be mirrored (for example, an OLE object cannot
be mirrored). The properties are appropriately adjusted when an object is
mirrored (for example, when a text box is mirrored at the vertical middle axis,
the text orientation changes from "left justify" to "right justify").
Determine the location of objects relative to each other. The functionality

corresponds to the alignment palette.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Within the Layer
Graphics Designer
You can influence the location of an object with the "Within the Layer"
command. The following functions are available:
Place On Top
Place On Bottom
Move Up One Layer
Move Down One Layer
Place On Top
Move an object to the foreground within a layer using the "Within the
Layer" - "Place On Top" command.
Place On Bottom
Move an object to the background within a layer using the "Within the Layer"
- "Place On Bottom" command.
Move Up One Layer

Move an object one position forward within a layer using the "Within the
Layer" - "Move Up One Layer" command.
How to Move an Object One Space Forward within the Layer:

1. Highlight the object you want to move one space forward.
2. Click on "Within the Layer" - "Move Up One Layer" in the "Arrange"
menu.
or
Hit the "Plus" key.
Move Down One Layer
Move an object one position backward within a layer using the "Within the
Layer" - "Move Down One Layer" command.
How to Move an Object One Space Backward within the Layer:

1. Highlight the object you want to move one space backward.
2. Click on "Within the Layer" - "Move Down One Layer" in the "Arrange"
menu.
or
Hit the "Minus" key.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-31
Graphics Designer
08.97
2.6.6 Options Menu

Update References
Update existing OLE links.

This command tests all links with OLE objects and updates the contents of the
objects. If a link to an OLE object is no longer valid, the object is represented
by an empty object with a line through it in the Graphics Designer. You also
receive an appropriate error message in the status bar.
How to Update OLE Links:

Click on "Update References" in the "Options" menu.
or
Press the F5 function key.
Settings ...
The "Settings ..." command opens a dialog window with the following tabs:
"Grid" Tab
"Options" Tab
"Visible Layers" Tab
"Grid" Tab
"Default Objects" Tab

You can insert a grid into the workspace using the "Display Grid" function in
order to make your work there more precise. If you also switch on the "Snap
to Grid" function, all newly drawn objects are automatically aligned with the
grid points.
Note: The minimum grid space displayed on the screen is 10 pixels. If you set
a smaller value (for example, 4 pixels), you can align your objects to that
smaller grid value. However, the screen display will show the next evennumbered multiple of that value that is greater than 10 pixels (in case of a
setting of 4 pixels, the screen will display 12).
Determine basic program settings using the "Options" tab .
"Options" Tab
Decide if you want to save the configuration settings when you exit.
Decide if the objects must be completely surrounded by the lasso when
they are selected or if they only have to be touched.
Decide if, after an object is created in the object palette, the object type
continues to be highlighted in the object palette or if it is reset.
Decide if you want to use the configuration dialog. It makes it easier to
configure the objects for the "I/O Field," "Bar," "Button," "Slider," and
"Status Display" objects types.
You can make the picture layers 0 to 15 visible or invisible in the "Visible
"Visible Layers" Tab Layers" tab.
Note: The system will not allow you to switch off all the layers.
2-32
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
"Default Objects" Tab Set the parameters for saving the presettings in the "Default Objects" tab .
Decide if you want to save the presettings when exiting.
Select the file in which the presetttings are to be stored. Use the
button to search through the available paths and set a different path.
Use the "Save Now" or "Load Now" button to save or load the presettings
of the objects now.
2.6.7 Window Menu

New Window
Create a copy of the current picture in another window. This means you can
display different segments of a picture at the same time.
Cascade
Display all of the windows in the workspace by overlapping them in the upper
left corner.
Tile Vertically
Arrange the workspace so that all open windows are visible and each window
has a maximum height. The width of the individual windows is determined by
the number of windows. This action fills up the entire configuration window.
Tile Horizontally
Arrange the workspace so that all open windows are visible and each window
has a maximum width. The height of the individual windows is determined by
the number of windows. This action fills up the entire configuration window.
Arrange Icons
Arrange all of the pictures which are reduced to icons in the workspace in the
left lower half of the picture.
Close All
Close all of the open windows.
Window List
Lists all of the windows which are currently open. Any number of windows
can be opened.
The selected window becomes the current window and is placed in the
foreground of the picture. The name of the current window is marked with a
check mark.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-33
Graphics Designer
08.97
2.6.8 Help Menu

Contents
Access the On-Line Help for Graphics Designer.

For the rest of the procedure, see the Windows 95 description or the Windows
NT description.
Find ...
Turn on the context-sensitive Help.

NT description.
Index
Request the index for On-Line Help.

NT description.
Glossary
Call up the glossary.

NT description.
Using Help
Receive information about how to use On-Line Help.
Tutorial
Start the tutorial for learning how to use Graphics Designer.
About Graphics
Designer
Receive more detailed information about the Graphics Designer program

and its platform.
2-34
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
2.7 Standard Toolbar

The standard toolbar contains buttons you can click on with the mouse in
order to execute commands which are needed often.
You can place the standard toolbar anywhere in the workspace or anchor it to
a border.
The following buttons are available:
New File
(Menu File - New)
Open File
(Menu File - Open ...)
Save File
(Menu File - Save)
Activate RUNTIME
(Menu File - Activate RUNTIME)
Cut
(Menu Edit - Cut)
Copy
(Menu Edit - Copy)
Paste
(Menu Edit - Paste)
Undo
(Menu Edit - Undo)
Redo
(Menu Edit - Redo)
Print File
(Menu File - Print ...)
Place on Top within the Layer
(Menu Arrange - Within the Layer - Place on Top)
Place on Bottom within the Layer
(Menu Arrange - Within the Layer - Place on Bottom)
Grid On/Off
(Menu View - Grid ...)
Snap to Grid
(Menu View - Grid ...)
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-35
Graphics Designer
08.97
Enlarge View
(Menu View - Zoom - Zoom In)
Reduce View
(Menu View - Zoom - Zoom Out)
Enlarge Segment
(Menu View - Zoom - Area)
Copy Static Properties of the Selected Object
(Menu Edit - Properties)
Assign Static Properties
(Menu Edit - Properties)
Mirror Object Vertically
(Menu Arrange - Mirror - Vertically)
Mirror Object Horizontally
(Menu Arrange - Mirror - Horizontally)
Rotate Object
(Menu Arrange - Rotate)
Display Object Properties
(Menu View - Properties)
Open Library
(Menu View - Library)
Turn on Context Sensitive Help
(Menu ? - Find).
Note:
You can place the standard toolbar anywhere in the workspace or anchor it to
a border.
The toolbar can be turned on or off via the
2-36
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
2.8 Font Palette

Quickly change the font and font color of text objects as well as the line color
of standard objects with the font palette.
Change Font
Change Font Size
Change Font Color
Change Line Color
Note:
You can place the font toolbar anywhere in the workspace or anchor it to a
border.
The font palette can be turned on or off via the
2.8.1 Changing the Font

The currently active font is displayed in the box.
2.8.2 Changing the Font Size

The font size in points (pt.) which is currently active is displayed.
2.8.3 Changing the Font Color

The square in the
icon always takes on the color which was selected last.
This color can be directly assigned to another text object by clicking on the
icon.
2.8.4 Changing the Line Color

The function affects the following colors:
The color of the border in area objects

The line color in line objects
icon takes on the color which was selected last. This
The square in the
color can be directly assigned to another object by clicking on the icon.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-37
Graphics Designer
08.97
2.9 Status Bar

The status bar provides you with the following information:
Displays a brief help text for a selected
function.
Displays the language selected for the text input.
Displays the name of the selected object. If multiple
objects are selected, they are all displayed.
Displays the X-Y position of the object. If there is no
object selected, this displays the position of the cursor.
Displays the X-Y expansion of the object. If there is no
object selected, this display does not appear.
Displays the keystroke status (for example, the Num
Lock key is engaged in this case).
Note: The status bar can be turned on or off via the
2.10 Layer Bar

In the layer bar, you can select which of the 16 layers (Layer 0 to Layer 15)
are visible. Objects are created in the first visible layer of the graphic
workspace. Layer 0 is the default setting for this in Graphics Designer.
Notes:
The system does not allow you to switch off all the layers.
You can place the layer bar anywhere in the workspace or anchor it to a
border.
The layer bar can be turned on or off via the
2-38
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
2.11 Object Properties

The "Object Properties" window displays all of the properties of a selected
object, an object group, or the defaults for an object type. These properties can
be changed or copied. Furthermore, objects can be made dynamic here by
setting the appropriate attributes, and they can be linked with actions.
Structure
The "Object Properties" window consists of the following items:
Pin to fix the window

Pipettes to copy and assign properties
Object List
"Properties" Tab
"Event" Tab
You can place the object properties window anywhere in the workspace.
2.11.1 Display Object Properties

How to Display Object Properties:
Double click on the desired object.
or
1. Select the object whose properties you want to view.
2. In the "View" menu, click on "Properties."
or
Click on the
icon on the standard toolbar.
or
Open the pop-up menu with the right mouse button and click on
"Properties."
2.11.2 Pin
The pin gives you the opportunity to affix the "Object Properties" window to a
specific location on the screen. The window can be moved to a desired
position and remains open even when other objects are being processed. Its
contents conform to each object selected.
How to Affix the Window:

1. Click on the pin
. The view of the pin changes to
2. Click on the title bar of the window and, holding down the left mouse
button, move the bar to the desired position.
3. By clicking on the pin
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
again, you can detach the window.
2-39
Graphics Designer
08.97
2.11.3 Pipettes for Transferring Object Properties

How to Transfer Object Properties:
1. Double click on the object whose properties you want to transfer. This
opens the "Object Properties" window.
2. Click on the pin to affix the window.
3. Click on the left pipette icon
4. In the object list or in the workspace, select the object to which you want
to transfer the copied properties.
5. Click on the right pipette icon
Note: Only object properties of matching object characteristics (for example,

colors, border weights, etc.) are transferred.
2.11.4 Object List

In the object list, you can select additional objects in order to process them
without closing the "Object Properties" window.
How to Select an Object from the Object List:

1. Click on the arrow in the object selection list to open the list.
2. Click on the desired object. The name of the active object is displayed to
the left of the selection list.
Note: Objects that contains at least one dynamic attribute or one configured
event are highlighted in a "bold" font in the object list.
2.11.5 "Properties" Tab

Define the properties of the selected object in the "Properties" tab.
Subject Tree
2-40
The object properties are arranged in groups in a subject tree in the left half of
the "Properties" tab. When you select a group from the subject tree, the
corresponding attributes are displayed in the right half of the window.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
The following are examples of subjects which are possible depending on the
object:
Geometry
Colors
Styles
Flashing
Filling
Font
Limits
Axis
Miscellaneous
Output/Input
Note: Subjects that contains at least one dynamic attribute are highlighted in
a "bold" font in the subject tree in the "Properties" tab.
Attributes
You can change the attributes using either value inputs, palettes, or pop-up
menus, depending on the type of attribute.
You can make the attributes dynamic by using either a tag or the return value
of an action.
Attribute Settings
The attributes are dependent on the object type and subject you select in the
subject tree. Four settings are assigned to each attribute:
Static (S ...) for the static properties of the attribute

Dynamic (D ...) to make the attribute dynamic
Update (U ...) to set the update of the attribute
Indirect (I ...) in case the tag which makes the attribute dynamic is
addressed indirectly
A green light bulb in the "Dynamic" column shows that the attribute is
dynamically linked with a "Tag."
If the attribute was made dynamic using a "Dynamic Dialog," the light bulb
is replaced by a red lightning bolt.
If the attribute was made dynamic using a "C Action," the light bulb is
replaced by a green lightning bolt.
An attribute which is to be made dynamic using a "C Action" that has not
been compiled yet, is marked by a yellow lightning bolt.
You can learn how to make an attribute dynamic by looking under "Making
an Attribute Dynamic."
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-41
Graphics Designer
Static Attribute
08.97
You can set certain properties for each attribute. These properties are set in
the defaults and can be changed statically as well as dynamically for each
attribute.
Note: With multiple selection, all of the attributes of the selected objects are
listed in the "Properties" tab. However, only attribute values that are identical
in all of the objects are displayed. If you change an attribute, the new attribute
value is displayed regardless of whether the attribute was changed in one,
multiple, or all objects.
Various procedures are described in more detail in the following:
How to Change an Attribute with Switchover:

1. Select the desired subject in the subject tree. The corresponding attributes
are displayed in the right half of the window.
2. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the property
set in the "Static" column (for example, Object: Static Text; Subject: Font;
Attribute: Text Orientation). The attribute changes, for example, Vertical /
Horizontal.
or
Click the right mouse button on the property which is set in the "Static"
column. This opens the pop-up menu. Confirm the "Edit" menu item to
change the property of the attribute.
How to Change an Attribute by Selecting One of Multiple Options:

set in the "Static" column (for example, Object: Circle; Subject: Flashing;
Attribute: Background Flash Frequency). Click on one of the options
offered.
Example:
or
Click the right mouse button on the property which is set in the "Static"
column. This opens the pop-up menu. Select the "Edit" menu item and
then select the desired property for the attribute.
How to Change the Value of an Attribute:

2. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the value
displayed in the "Static" column (for example, Object: Rectangle; Subject:
Geometry; Attribute: Position X). This opens the input dialog box.
2-42
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Example:
or
Click the right mouse button on the value displayed in the "Static"
column. This opens the pop-up menu. Select the "Edit" menu item which
then opens the input dialog box.
3. Enter the new value for the attribute.
How to Change the Text of an Attribute:

2. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the value
displayed in the "Static" column (for example, Object: Static Text;
Subject: Font; Attribute: Text). This opens the input dialog box.
Example:
or
Click the right mouse button on the text displayed in the "Static" column.
This opens the pop-up menu. Select the "Edit" menu item which then
opens the input dialog box.
3. Enter the new text for the attribute.
Note: If the text input contains control characters, they are also displayed in
the object properties (for example, \r\n corresponds to CR/LF).
How to Change the Color of an Attribute:

1. Select the "Colors" subject in the subject tree. The corresponding attributes
2. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the color
displayed in the "Static" column (for example, Object: Ellipse; Subject:
Colors; Attribute: Background Color). This opens the color palette.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-43
Graphics Designer
08.97
Example:
or
Click the right mouse button on the color displayed in the "Static" column.
This opens the pop-up menu. Select the "Edit" menu item which then
opens the color palette.
3 Select the new color for the attribute.
or
Select another color using the "Other ..." button.
How to Change the Pattern of an Attribute:

1. Select the "Styles" subject in the subject tree. The corresponding attributes
2. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the pattern
displayed in the "Static" column (for example, Object: Bar; Subject:
Styles; Attribute: Fill Pattern). This opens the pattern palette.
Example:
or
Click the right mouse button on the pattern displayed in the "Static"
then opens the pattern palette.
3 Select the new pattern for the attribute.
2-44
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
How to Change the Line Style/Border Style of an Attribute:

2. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the line
displayed in the "Static" column (for example, Object: Line; Subject:
Styles; Attribute: Line Style; or Object: Rounded Rectangle; Subject:
Styles; Attribute: Border Style). In both cases, this opens the selection
dialog box for line style.
Example:
or
Click the right mouse button on the line style displayed in the "Sta tic"
then opens the selection dialog box for lines.
3 Select the new line style/border style for the attribute.
Note: If you select the line styles/border styles "dash," "dot," "dash dot," or
"dash dot dot," a weight of 1 pixel is displayed independent of the selected
line weight/border weight.
How to Change the Line Weight/Border Weight of an Attribute:

Styles; Attribute: Line Weight; or Object: Rectangle; Subject: Styles;
Attribute: Border Weight). In both cases, this opens the selection dialog
box for line weights.
Example:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-45
Graphics Designer
08.97
or
Click the right mouse button on the line displayed in the "Static" column.
This opens the pop-up menu. Select the "Edit" menu item which opens the
line weight selection dialog box.
3. Select the new line weight/border weight for the attribute using the
larger/smaller buttons.
or
Input the new value directly.
Note: If you select the line styles/border styles "dash," "dot," "dash dot," or
"dash dot dot," a weight of 1 pixel is displayed independent of the selected
line weight/border weight.
How to Change the Line End Style of an Attribute:

Styles; Attribute: Line End Styles). This opens the selection dialog box for
line end styles.
Example:
or
Click the right mouse button on the line displayed in the "Static" column.
This opens the pop-up menu. Select the "Edit" menu item which opens
the line end style selection dialog box.
3. Select the new line end styles (left and right) for the attribute.
How to Change the Font of an Attribute:

1. Select the "Text" subject in the subject tree. The attributes are displayed in
the right half of the window.
2. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the font
displayed in the "Static" column (for example, Object: I/O field; Subject:
Text; Attribute: Font). This opens the selection dialog box for fonts.
2-46
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Example:
or
Click the right mouse button on the font displayed in the "Static" column.
This opens the pop-up menu. Select the "Edit" menu item which opens the
font selection dialog box.
3. Select the new font for the attribute.
How to Change an Attribute through Picture Selection:
1. Depending on the object, select the "Picture," "Pictures" or "Status"
subject in the subject tree. The corresponding attributes are displayed in
the right half of the window.
set in the "Static" column (for example, Object: Round button; Subject:
Pictures; Attributes: Picture Status Off; or Object: Status display; Subject:
Status; Attribute: Flash picture).
or
Click the right mouse button on the graphic that is displayed in the
"Static" column. This opens the pop-up menu. Select the "Edit" menu item
to open the dialog window for picture selection.
3. In both cases, the selection dialog for picture selection opens.
Example:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-47
Graphics Designer
08.97
4. Select the desired graphic for the attribute.

or
Click on the "Browse" button to use the Windows default dialog to find
the graphic in another folder.
Note: To delete an assigned picture, use the "Cancel Selection" button.
How to Delete a Language Entry:

1. Select the "Miscellaneous" subject in the subject tree. The attributes are
displayed in the right half of the window.
2. Double click on the "Configured Languages" attribute or on the language
displayed in the "Static" column (for example, Object: Static Text;
Subject: Miscellaneous; Attribute: Configured Languages). This opens the
selection dialog box for languages.
Example:
or
Click the right mouse button on the language displayed in the "Static"
opens the language selection dialog box.
3. Delete the language entry assigned to the object by selecting a new
language.
2-48
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Making an Attribute You can make an attribute dynamic by linking it with a tag or an action.
Dynamic
How to Link an Object with an Existing Tag:
2. Open the pop-up menu using the r ight mouse button. Select the
"Properties" menu item.
3. Select the subject and the corresponding attribute from the "Properties"
tab, for example "Flashing" - "Background Flash Color On."
4. Click on the light bulb with the right mouse button and select the "Tag"
menu item from the pop-up menu.
5. In the tag dialog box, select the tags needed.
The light bulb turns green.
How to Link an Object with a New Tag:

2. Open the pop-up menu by using the right mouse button. Select the
tab, for example "Flashing" - "Background Flash Color Off."
4. Click on the light bulb with the right mouse button and select the "Tag ..."
menu item from the pop-up menu.
5. In the dialog, click on the
button and assign parameters to properties
of the new tag in the dialog window.
6. After setting the parameters, select the tag needed from the tag dialog box.
The light bulb turns green.
How to Link an Object with a New Action:

2. Open the pop-up menu by using the right mouse button. Select the
tab, for example "Flashing" - "Background Flash Frequency."
4. Click on the light bulb with the right mouse button and select the
"Dynamic Dialog" or "C Action" menu item from the pop-up menu.
5. Edit the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box or configure a "C Action"
A red lightning bolt (dynamic dialog) or a green lightning bolt (C action)
replaces the light bulb.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-49
Graphics Designer
Setting the Update

Cycle
08.97
The update cycle determines how up-to-date the object attributes are, and thus
determines how current the dynamic object is.
You can select one of the standard cycles for the dynamic TAB sequence, or
you can set your own cycle time.
Indirect addressing is not possible with actions.
How to Set the Update Cycle:

Double click on the box in the "Update" column and select the TAB
sequence from the list box.
or
Click the right mouse button on the box in the "Update" column and select
the desired TAB sequence.
Indirect Addressing of A string tag for making the attribute dynamic must be provided with indirect
an Attribute
addressing. This string tag contains the name of another tag whose contents
trigger the attribute change. By changing the name in the string tag, you can
access different tags dynamically.
Indirect addressing is marked with a check mark.
How to Set Indirect Addressing of an Attribute:

Double click on the box in the "Indirect" Column.
or
Click the right mouse button on the box in the "Indirect" column. This
opens the pop-up menu. Select the way in which the attribute is to be
made dynamic.
2.11.6 "Event" Tab

In the "Event" tab, you define actions to be carried out by the selected object.
Subject Tree
Object events are divided into groups in the subject tree in the left half of the
"Event" tab. If you select a group from the subject tree, the corresponding
events are displayed in the right half of the window. You can link each event
with a hot key that also triggers the action.
You can select the following subjects depending on the object:
Mouse
Keyboard
Miscellaneous
Property Subjects with the Attributes of the Object
Note: Subjects that contain at least one configured event are highlighted in a
"bold" font in the "Properties" tab subject tree.
2-50
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Events
Graphics Designer
If an event is linked to an action, the

lightning bolt is green. Standard
functions are available for the actions. You can select the standard functions
with a dialog box. You can also program your own actions in C programming
language.
When you configure actions, the attributes must be accessed using their OLE
automation names.
If a direct connection has been configured for an event, a blue
lightning
bolt is displayed. A direct connection is easy to configure and performs very
fast during runtime.
Object Event
Each object in a picture can be linked with actions.

You can trigger an action with the following events:
Mouse event, when the pointer is on an object:

Press or release the left or right mouse button.
Keystroke event:
Press or release a key.
Miscellaneous object events:

Changing the object
Events which are linked to an attribute of the object:

-
Changing an object attribute

Changing the status of a tag which affects an object attribute
Notes on Runtime Behavior:

Event Mouse - Mouse Click: The event is triggered by releasing the mouse
key, but only if the mouse pointer is over the object when the key is pressed
and released.
Event Mouse - Press Left/Right: The event is triggered directly by pressing
the mouse key over the object.
Triggering Events
Event Mouse - Release Left/Right: Releasing the mouse key triggers the
event for the object over which the mouse pointer was located when the mouse
key was pressed.
Triggering events is dependent on the object you select from the subject tree.
The following setting is assigned to every triggering event:
Action (A ...) to display an assigned action or direct connection
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-51
Graphics Designer
08.97
Selecting the Action
The following two entirely different possibilities are available for further
processing events:
C Action
A "C Action" occurs by linking an event with a function which is
formulated in ANSI-C programming language and is triggered cyclically
or by the event.
You can find information about linking an event with a function to an
action under Connecting an Event with a Function .
The lightning bolt in the object properties window turns green, if the event
is linked to a function.
Direct Connection
To establish a direct connection, select a source element (constant,
dynamic object, or tag) and a target element (current dialog, object, or tag)
from the Direct Connection dialog.
How to configure a direct connection, is described in "Making a Direct
Connection Dynamic ".
The lightning bolt in the object properties window will turn blue, if a
direct connection has been configured for an event.
How to Link an Event with a Function:

2. Call up the pop-up menu with the right mouse button and select the
3. In the "Event" tab, select the subject and the corresponding attribute, for
example, "Mouse" - "Mouse Operation."
4. Call up the pop-up menu for the action dialog b y clicking the right mouse
button on the lightning bolt.
5. Select the "C Action" menu item.
6. Configure the "C-Function".
The lightning bolt in the object properties window will turn green.
2.11.7 Setting Dynamics with a Direct Connection

Configuring a direct connection for an event causes the value of the source
element (source) to be transferred to the target element (target) during
runtime, if this event occurs. Sources can be constants, tags, or attributes of
picture objects. Targets can be tags or dynamic attributes (of objects, dialogs,
or tags).
Advantages of a direct connection are its easy configuration and increased
performance during runtime.
The appearance of the dialog for configuring a direct connection is dependent
on the objects contained in the picture and on the source/target.
2-52
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Basic Elements
Graphics Designer
Operating Element
Description
Selects a configured picture that is to be
displayed during a picture change.
Opens the Tag Selection dialog.
Object List
Lists all objects contained in a picture. A

selection can only be made, if an object is used as
a source or target
Property List
Lists all dynamic attributes of a selected object.

A selection can only be made, if an object is used
as a source or target
Direct/Indirect Tag
Set the tag addressing via these option buttons.

In direct addressing, the read/write access is
carried out to the indicated tag. In indirect
addressing, the indicated tag must be a text tag.
The read/write access is carried out to the tag,
which has been entered in the text tag.
The option buttons can only be accessed, if a tag
is used as a source or target.
Tag, Operating Message
An operating message will be displayed if the

event occurs. The check box can only be selected,
if a tag is used as the source of the direct
connection.
Note:
If an entry is incomplete, a message will be displayed.
WinCC can not check, if your input is logically correct or makes sense.
Assignment errors made can only be noticed in the runtime mode .
How to Configure a Direct Connection:

1. Select an object.
2. Call up the pop-up menu with the right mouse button and select the
3. In the "Event" tab, select the subject and the corresponding attribute, for
example, "Mouse" - "Mouse Operation."
4. Call up the pop-up menu for the action dialog by clicking the right mouse
button on the lightning bolt.
5. Select the "Direct Connection..." menu item.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-53
Graphics Designer
08.97
6. In the Direct Connection dialog, select the Source type:

Constant, to enter a string sequence into the text field
(digits
will be converted by WinCC) or to select a picture via the

button and the Select Picture dialog
Property, to select an object and a dynamic property
Tag, to select a tag via the
button and the selection dialog
These actions define the source element.

7. In the Direct Connection dialog, select the Target type:
Current Window, to select a dynamic property of the current
dialog (the "Target" - "Object" field will be blank)
Object in Picture, to select an object and a dynamic property
Tag, to select a tag via the
button and the selection dialog
These actions define the source element.

The lightning bolt in the object properties window will be blue.
Note:
You will be informed, if the input is incomplete.
WinCC can not check, if your input is logically correct or makes sense.
Assignment errors made can only be noticed in the runtime mode
The object list contains the entry this object. This entry should be used, if
you want to use the properties of the currently selected object as the source or
the target of a direct connection. If an object is copies, its dynamics will be
copied as well. The direct connection of the object that has been created by the
copy procedure will therefore point to this object. The newly created object
will therefore be used as the source or target of the direct connection.
2-54
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
2.11.7.1 Constants as Source of a Direct Connection
If a constant is selected as the source of a direct connection, a string chain can

be entered into the text field. The following table explains the effects of the
text input on various target elements:
Source
Target
Explanation
"picture1.pdl"
Current Dialog / Picture If the event occurs, a picture

Name
change will be carried out. In the
dialog, the picture named
picture1.pdl will be displayed.
"picture1"
Button1 / Text
If the event occurs, the object

Button1 will be labeled
Picture1.
50
Rectangle1 / Width
If the event occurs, the object

Rectangle1 will be displayed
50 pixels wide.
50
Tag, with direct

Operating Message
If the event occurs, the tag will

be assigned a value of 50.
Simultaneously, an operating
message will be displayed.
To configure a picture change, you can also use the

button. This will
open a dialog containing all the previously configured pictures.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-55
Graphics Designer
08.97
2.11.7.2 Object Properties as Source of Direct Connections
The following table explains the effects of various direct connections, if an

object property is used as a source:
Source
Target
Explanation
Circle1 / Width
Current Dialog / Width
If the event occurs, the dialog

width will adapt to the width of
the object Circle1.
Circle1 / Fill
Pattern
Rectangle1 / Fill Pattern If the event occurs, the fill

pattern of the object
Rectangle1 will adapt to the fill
pattern of the object Circle1.
Bar1 / Height
Direct Tag
If the event occurs, the height of

the object Bar1 will be
assigned to the tag.
Note:
The object list contains the entry this object. This entry should be used, if
you want to use the properties of the currently selected object as the source or
the target of a direct connection. If an object is copies, its dynamics will be
copied as well. The direct connection of the object that has been created by the
copy procedure will therefore point to this object. The newly created object
will therefore be used as the source or target of the direct connection.
2-56
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
2.11.7.3 Tags as Source of Direct Connections
The following table explains the effects of various direct connections, if a tag
is used as a source:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Source
Target
Explanation
Tag1, direct
Circle1 / Radius
If the event occurs, the radius of

the object Circle1 will be
changed according to the tag
value.
Tag1, direct
Tag2, indirect with

operating message
If the event occurs, the tag,

which has been entered in tag 2,
will be assigned the value of tag
1. Additionally, an operating
message will be displayed.
2-57
Graphics Designer
2-58
08.97
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
3 Configuring Actions
3.1 Introduction
"Actions" are functions which are formulated in ANSI -C programming
language and are executed cyclically or because of an event. Examples of
events are keystrokes, changes in object properties, or changes in the value of
tags.
Actions may be linked with any of the following:
Graphical objects
Process value archives (see Volume 3, Tag Logging, Section
3.3.2.2)
User archives (see Volume 3, Tag Logging, Section 3.3.4.2)
Compressed archives (see Volume 3, Tag Logging, Section 3.3.3.2)
Archive tags (see Volume 3, Tag Logging, Section 3.4.3)
Loop in Alarm functionality of the message system (Alarm
Logging)
The return value of a function can control a property of the object with which
the action is linked.
Functions and actions which may be used throughout a project or across
projects are called "global scripts". They are not linked to an object.
In addition to the project functions, you may use "internal functions" and
default functions unique to the system, as well as all of the C standard library
functions (contained in the internal functions).
Note:
Actions are processed interpretatively. When implementing numerous or
extensive actions, you should plan for a higher system load. It is therefore
better to replace extensive actions by implementing separate DLLs (Dynamic
Link Libraries).
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-1
Graphics Designer
08.97
3.2 Linking Actions with Graphic Objects

You may link an action with an attribute belonging to a graphic object that
was created with Graphics Designer, the systems graphic editor. The
function used has a return value that controls the objects attribute which is
linked with it.
Before you can formulate an action and link it to an object, make the
following preparations::
Open a configured picture using the WinCC Control Center.
You can now utilize the dynamic-wizard, which will support you in
formulating your action.
If you want to formulate the action yourself, the following additional steps are
required:
Open the box "Object Properties" for the desired object.
If you wish to make the objects properties dynamic, select

"Properties".
If you wish to react with an action to an event in conjunction with

the selected object, select "Event.".
3.2.1 Making Object Properties Dynamic

You selected the "Properties" tab in the "Object Properties" box.
Now select the category of properties which contains the attribute you want to
influence during run time. Example: for a rectangle, you would select the
geometric properties and position X.
3-2
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Click the right mouse button on the white light bulb in the "Dynamic" column
in the "Position X" row. This opens a pop-up menu with the following options
for making a property dynamic:
Use the Dynamic Dialog
Use a C Action
Use a tag value
Delete a dynamic creation which is already present
3.2.1.1 Setting Dynamics Using the Dynamics Dialog

By clicking the right mouse button on the white light bulb in the "Object
Properties" box, you opened a pop-up menu and selected "Dynamics
Dialog...". This opens the "Dynamic Value Ranges" dialog box.
Here you can formulate the dynamic function by using tags, functions, and
arithmetic operations in an expression.
The value of the expression and the status of the tags used in the expression
work together to create the attribute value. You determine how this occurs by
setting the following options in the box:
Select the data type of the expressing result.
The data type determines the ways in which the value ranges are
defined.
Set the value ranges and assign attribute values.
Start a status evaluation of the tags used in the expression.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-3
Graphics Designer
08.97
Finally, you must determine the trigger to be used to update the attribute value
using the value of the expression.
Note:
If you do not set an update event and the expression does not contain any tags,
the system uses the default cycle with a default cycle time as the update event.
If the expression contains tags, "Tag" is used as the update event with a
default cycle time.
As a final step, the formula for setting dynamics is changed to an action.
You have now made the selected object attribute dynamic.
Note:
When you copy the object whose attribute you just made dynamic in the
Graphics Designer, the action that is connected to that attribute is copied
along with it.
At run time, the attribute value is determined according to specific Rules
using the value of the formulated expression and the states of the tags used in
the expression.
How to Include a Tag as a Part of an Expression:

Click the left mouse button on the
button or, as an alternative, click the
right mouse button on the "Expression/Formula" row. This opens the
appropriate pop-up menu.
Click the left mouse button on "Tag...". This opens the "Select Tag" box
where you can select the tag you wish to use in the dynamic expression.
Select the tag either by double clicking the left mouse button on the tag name,
or single clicking the left mouse button on the tag name and then clicking the
"OK" button. The "Select Tag" box is then closed.
3-4
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Note:
A tag name can also be entered directly in the "Expression/Formula" field of
the "Dynamic Value Ranges" dialog.
Observe the following:
Tag names must always be enclosed by single quotation marks ()
Tag names must not contain the symbols +, -, *, or /.
How to Include a Function as Part of an Expression:

Click the left mouse button on "Function...". This opens the "Function
Browser" box:
Select the desired function by opening folders with the mouse. You may do
this in any of the following ways:
Double click the left mouse button on the function name.
This opens the dialog for assigning parameters to this function.
After you assign the current parameters to the function, you return
to the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box. The function is entered in the
"Expression/Formula" column at the insertion mark.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-5
Graphics Designer
08.97
Mark the function and click the "OK" button. The "Function
Browser" box is closed and the function and its formal parameters
are inserted in the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box in the
"Expression/Formula" column at the insertion mark.
Click the right mouse button on the function name:
This opens a pop-up menu.
Select the menu item "Parameter Assignment" which will place you
in the dialog for assigning parameters within this function.
After assigning the current parameters to the function, you return
to the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box. The function, with its current
parameters, is now entered in the "Expression/Formula" row at the
insertion mark.
Click the right mouse button on the function name:
This opens a pop-up menu.
Select the menu item "Apply." The function and its formal
parameters are then entered in the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box in
the "Expression/Formula" box at the insertion mark. The "Function
Browser" box remains open.
If you marked text in the "Expression/Formula" text row, that selected text
was replaced by the formula. If necessary, enter the current parameters in the
set of parentheses following the function name.
For assigning parameters, see Section 3.2.1.2, Making a Function Dynamic
Using a C Action, "How to Assign Parameters to a Function"
How to Include an Operator as Part of an Expression:

Click the left mouse button on "Operator...". This opens a second menu in
which you can select the desired operator by clicking on it with the left mouse
button.
This closes both menus and enters the selected operator to the right of the
insertion mark in the "Expression/Formula" row.
The following operators are available:
Operator
+
*
/
Description
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
Note:
You can also use the keyboard to enter operators. In that case, however, use
only the operators listed in the table above. Other operators will lead to errors
because all of the tests executed in the generated C functions are in
floating-point format.
3-6
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
How to Determine the Data Type of an Expression:

You can set the data type of an expression by clicking the left mouse button
on the appropriate entry in the "Data Type" box.
The data type of the expression determines the type of value ranges which you
may need to set.
How to Define a Value Range:

The adjustable value range depends on the data type selected. The following
data types are available:
Selected Data Type "ANALOG":
You can define value ranges for an expression in the "Result of the
Expression/Formula" list.
Set the value of the object attribute for each value range. In order to do this,
you must click the left mouse button on the "Add" box or click the right
mouse button on the "Result of the Expression/Formula" area and select
"New..." from the open pop-up menu. The first value range, "Value Range1,"
is entered.
In the above example, the value range reaches from the minimum value that
the expression can carry to a value of 100.
You can establish an additional value range in the same way.
The default high limit for a value range is 100 for "Value Range1." The
default increment to the high limit for the next value range is 100.
You can change the values for the high limits and attributes by double
clicking the left mouse button on the value to be changed (or click the right
mouse button on the value and then click "Edit..."). This opens a box in which
you can change the value.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-7
Graphics Designer
08.97
Note:
After a tag has been selected, the "Tag" value is entered in the "Event Name"
box. The selected tag is automatically used as a trigger tag and is scanned for
changes during run time at a default cycle time of two seconds.
Selected Data Type "BOOL":
You can define the value of an object attribute for the cases "yes/TRUE"
(value of the expression <> 0) and "no/FALSE" (value of the expression = 0)
in the "Result of the Expression/Formula" list.
You cannot set other valid ranges. You can change the attribute value by
double clicking the left mouse button on the value to be changed (or click the
right mouse button on the value and then click "Edit..."). This opens a box in
which you can change the attribute value.
Note:
Selected Data Type "BIT":
You define the value of the object attribute in the "Result of the
Expression/Formula" list for either case in which a selected bit of a tag is set
or not set.
3-8
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
You cannot set other valid ranges. You can change the attribute value by
double clicking the left mouse button on the value to be changed (or click the
right mouse button on the value and then click "Edit..."). This opens a box in
which you can change the attribute value.
Use the "Select Tags" box to select the tags that contain the bits to be scanned.
Open the box by clicking on the left button
and then clicking on the
button.
You can set the bit of the previously selected tag by clicking on the right
. This opens the "Bit Selection" box in which you can click on the
button
desired bit to select it.
Note:
Selected Data Type "DIRECT":
The value of the expression is directly assigned to the object attribute. You
cannot set a value range.
Note:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-9
Graphics Designer
08.97
Determining the Effect of the Tag Status on an Attribute Value:

If you want the tag status to influence an attribute value, you must activate the
"Evaluate the Status of the Tags" box by clicking on it with the left mouse
button. This expands the Dynamic Dialog window.
The tag names (without quotation marks) used in the expression are located
in the left part of the window under Status. Click the left mouse button on a
tag name. All of the states which a tag can assume appear in the right part of
the window.
You can set the appropriate attribute value for each state by clicking the left
mouse button on the attribute value to be changed (or click the right mouse
button on the value and then click "Edit"). This opens the "Value Input" box
in which you can change the value. Close the "Value Input" box by clicking
on "OK." The value you entered is then accepted as the attribute value.
How Value Ranges and Tag States are Evaluated:

The value assigned to the attribute is established according to the following
rules:
Evaluation of the Status
The status evaluation has the highest priority. The system checks
whether one or more tags used in the expression have one or more
states corresponding to the status list. If so, the status with the
highest priority determines the value assignment. The priority of
the states corresponds to their sequence in the status list; the first
entry in the list has the highest priority.
Evaluation of the Value Ranges
If the status evaluation did not result in a value assignment, the
value range containing the value of the expression is determined.
The attribute value linked to this value range is assigned to the
object attribute.
3-10
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
How to Set the Update Event:

Click the
button. This opens the "Change Trigger " box.
Note:
The system presets the trigger event with a default entry. The default depends
on the contents of your formulated expression in the "Dynamic Value Ranges"
box. If the expression contains one or more tags, the default entry for the
trigger event is "Tag" and all of the tags that are in the expression are
transferred to the tag list . If the expression does not contain tags, the default
entry for the trigger event is "Default Cycle." The entry for the cycle is set
with a default value.
You select an event by opening the "Event" list with the left mouse button and
marking the desired event by clicking on it with the left mouse button.
You can select from the following events:
Tag
Default Cycle
Picture Cycle
Window Cycle
If you select "Default Cycle," "Picture Cycle," or "Window Cycle" as the

event, you can assign a trigger name to the event. Input the trigger name by
placing the cursor in the "Trigger Name" row using a left mouse click. If you
enter the name using the keyboard, you delete an entry that was already there.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-11
Graphics Designer
08.97
If you selected "Default Cycle" or "Tag," you may need to change the cycle
time. Do this by opening the "Cycle" list with the left mouse button and
marking the desired time by clicking on it with the left mouse button. You
can select from the following cycle times:
At change
250 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
5s
10 s
1 min
5 min
10 min
1 hr
User cycle 1
User cycle 2
User cycle 3
User cycle 4
User cycle 5
The "At change" entry is only available if you selected "Tag" as the event. If
you selected "Tag" as the event, the contents of the "Change Trigger" box
change:
Here you can input one or more tags which serve as a trigger for the action
when their value changes from one cycle to the next. If more than one tag is
input, the action is triggered when the value of one of these tags changes from
one cycle to the next.
3-12
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
There are three ways to input tags:

Using the left mouse button, place the cursor on the text line Tag
Name and enter a name. The name will not be enclosed by
quotation marks.
Afterwards, click on the "Add" button to transfer the tag to the tag
list.
Right mouse button click on the Trigger Name column in the tag
list. If you want to use an existing tag, select DM_Tags from the
displayed pop-up menu. The Select Tag dialog will open from
which you can select the desired tag.
If you want to enter the tag name directly, select New from the
pop-up menu.
By clicking on the
button, open the "Select Tag" box
from which you may select the desired tag.
You then return to the "Change Trigger" box. The selected tag is now entered
in the "Trigger Name" column in the tag list.
The system assigns a cycle time to the entered tags in the "Default Cycle"
column. This is the time span between two sequential scans of the tags for
value change.
If you want to change the cycle time of a tag at a later time, use the following
steps:
Click the right mouse button on the cycle time to be changed to
open the pop-up menu.
Select the new cycle time from the pop-up menu.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-13
Graphics Designer
08.97
An alternative procedure is the following:

Double click on the cycle time to be changed to open the "Update"
box.
Select the new cycle time from the list and click the "OK" button to
close the box.
Delete entered tags by marking them in the tag list and then clicking the
"Remove" button.
Mark a connected range of tags by marking the first tag in the range and then
marking the last tag with the "Shift" key depressed. Mark individual multiple
tags by marking the first tag and then marking all others with the "Ctrl" key
depressed.
Attention:
In the case of the "Tag" trigger event, the entry "At Change" is available as a
cycle. This means that the action is triggered as soon as the value of one of
the tags in the tag list changes. This type of trigger causes a heavy system
load.
If the update event has been set, close the "Change Trigger" box by clicking
on the "OK" button.
How to Create an Action from the Entries:

You have completed all of the entries for making the object attribute dynamic.
In order for the settings to control the object attribute during the run time, you
must create an action from them.
Do this by clicking on the "OK" button in the "Dynamic Value Ranges"
dialog box. The system then creates an action from the entries. If errors occur
during this process, they are reported in the "Error Messages" box:
In order to find the causes of the errors, click the "Details" button. The box is
then enlarged and displays a description of the errors.
If the action was generated without errors, the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box
closes and you are returned to the "Object Properties" box. The white light
bulb in the "Dynamic" column is now a red lightning bolt . It shows that an
action created with the dynamic dialog is linked to this attribute.
3-14
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Notes:
If you wish to test your entries in the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box
for errors without creating an action, click on the "Test" button.
When you click the "Test" or "OK" button, the "Result of the
Expression/Formula" list of value ranges is sorted according to
increasing range high limits.
You may view and edit the created action by clicking the right mouse button
on the red lightning bolt and opening the corresponding pop-up menu. Select
"C Action..." from the pop-up menu.
Attention! A box will notify you that this action was created using the
"simplified script configuration," that is, with the help of the dynamic dialog.
This is significant because once an action has been loaded as a "C Action," it
can no longer be processed using the dynamic dialog.
Note:
For C-actions, tag names used in the expression are enclosed by double
quotation marks (").
If a tag name contains the symbol ", the symbol \ will be placed in front of it
in the C-action.
Example: Motor"M"1 will be changed to Motor\"M\"1.
3.2.1.2 Adding Dynamics with the Dynamic-Wizard

The dynamic wizard allows you to add dynamics, via C-actions, to an object.
If the wizard is executed, the preconfigured C-actions and trigger events are
set and stored at the object properties.
The preconfigured C-actions can be edited in the Events tab of the Object
Properties window.
The preconfigured C-action are divided into the following categories:

System Functions
Miscellaneous
Standard Dynamics
Import Functions
Picture Functions
User Archive Functions
The different categories can be selected by clicking on the appropriate tabs

with the left mouse button.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-15
Graphics Designer
08.97
Note: The display of the dynamic wizard can be turned on or off via the
"Toolbars..." entry from the "View" menu.
How to add Dynamics to an Object with the Dynamic Wizard:

1. In the Graphics Designer, select the object or picture to which you want to
add dynamics.
2. Select the dynamic wizard via a left mouse button click on the appropriate
tab of the C-action categories.
3. In the dynamic wizard, select a C-action via double click.
4. Follow the instructions in the dynamic wizard dialogs.
After completing the dynamic wizard, the C-action stored at the object
properties can be edited if necessary.
3.2.1.2.1 System Functions

Hardcopy
With this function, an action for creating a hardcopy of the display can be
configured.
Exit WinCC Runtime
With this function, an action can be created that exits the runtime mode of
WinCC.
Exit WinCC or
Windows
With this function, an action can be created that exits WinCC or the operating
system. You can determine how the operating system is exited (Shut down,
Restart, or Log on as a different user).
Language Switch
With this function, an action can be created that switches the data language.
Exit WinCC
With this function, an action can be created that exits WinCC.
Start another
application
With this function, an action can be created that starts another application. In
the course of the wizard, you will indicate the path and name of the
application to be started.
3.2.1.2.2 Miscellaneous Functions

Generate Script
This function creates the framework of a wizard script. The wizard script can
be edited with the program "DynWizEdit.exe" and be run with the program
"Dynwiz.exe".
3.2.1.2.3 Standard Dynamics

Operational if
authorized
With this function, an action can be created that checks the operator
authorization of an user.
Copy Tag Value
This function allows you to copy the value of one tag to another tag. You will
be asked to indicate the source and target tag.
3-16
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Link a prototype to a This function allows you to link an object property, that has been edited via
structure
Add dynamics to a prototype function, to a tag of the data type Structure
Tag.
Make a property
dynamic
This function allows you to link a object property to a tag, and make that
object property dynamic via the tag value. You will be asked to indicate the
object property and tag in the course of the wizard.
Add dynamics to the This function allows you to add dynamics to an object property via an element
prototype
of a structure tag.
Set tag value
This function allows you to set the value of a tag. You will be asked to
indicate the tag to be changed and the value.
Move Object
The object properties Position X" and "Position Y" can be linked to tags,
which will male the position of the object dynamic.
Fill Object
With this function, an action can be created that that makes the fill level of an
object dynamic via a tag. In the course of the wizard, you can define, in
addition to the tags, the upper and lower limits for the fill levels 0% and
100%.
Output String Tag
With this function, the Text attribute of an object can be linked to a text tag.
This C-action is only available for objects containing the Text attribute.
3.2.1.2.4 Import Functions

Import S7 S5 Assignment List
This wizard allows you to read an assignment list of Step 5 or Step 7 into
WinCC. Additional information can be found in "Hantzuli.doc" file on the
WinCC CD-ROM.
Import Messages
This wizard allows you to accept a COROS LS-B message list into WinCC.
Additional information can be found in "Hantmigr.doc" file on the WinCC
CD-ROM.
Import S5L Only Tag This wizard allows you to accept a COROS LS-B tag list into WinCC.
Additional information can be found in "Hantmigr.doc" file on the WinCC
CD-ROM.
3.2.1.2.5 Picture Functions

Set/Reset multiple
Bits
With this function, an action can be created that sets multiple bits of a tag.
You will be asked to indicate the tag to be changed and the bit number by the
wizard.
Rcksetzen/Ausmaskieren?
Display WinCC Dialog This function allows you to display any picture of the Graphics Designer in a
Box
picture window. Indicate the name of the picture to be displayed and set the
appearance of the picture window in the course of the wizard.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-17
Graphics Designer
08.97
Picture Change in the This function allows you to change the content of a window object in a
Window
Graphics Designer picture.
Set/Reset Bit
With this function, an action can be created that sets a bits of a tag. You will
be asked to indicate the tag to be changed and the bit number by the wizard.
Rcksetzen? ausmaskieren?
Display Instruction
Box
With this function, an action can be created that displays an instruction box.
You will be asked to indicate the type of instruction (information, question, or
emergency box), as well as the title and text of the message, by the wizard.
ohne Abbruchknopf?
Single Picture Change With this function, an action for a picture change can be created. You will be
asked to indicate the name of the new picture to be displayed.
Display Error Box
With this function, an action can be created to display an error box. You will
be asked to indicate the type of instruction (information, question, or
emergency box), as well as the title and text of the message, by the wizard.
3.2.1.2.6 User Archive Functions

Generate Archive
Objects
3-18
For the processing of an user archive, the wizard creates objects (buttons, I/O
fields, etc.) in the selected picture. The wizard will ask you to select an user
archive created in Tag Logging.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
3.2.1.2.7 Example of a configured Dynamic

1. In the Graphics Designer, create a picture with an object of the type
Button.
2. Select the button.
3. Activate the dynamic wizard via a double click on the picture function
Display Instruction Box.
4. In the wizard window Select Trigger, select Left mouse key as the
trigger event and click on the Next button.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-19
Graphics Designer
08.97
5. In the wizard window "Set options, determine the content of the title line
and instruction text, as well as the appearance of the message window.
Afterwards, click on the Next button.
6. In the final wizard window, click on the Finish button.

The C-action generated by the wizard can be edited via the buttons pop-up
menu item Properties (Events tab).
7. Save the picture.
8. Activate the project by clicking on the
Graphics Designers.
button in the toolbar of the
9. In runtime, if you position the mouse pointer above the button, the mouse
pointer will be displayed with a green lightning bolt. If you click the left
mouse button, a message window, displaying the configured texts, will
open.
3-20
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
3.2.1.3 Setting Dynamics with a C Action

Properties" box, you open a pop-up menu and select "C Action...". The "Edit
Action" box is then opened.
In C programming language, you must then formulate the Function that you
wish to implement in order to control object attributes. In this formulation you
may use the preprogrammed C functions which the system makes available in
the left half of the box. In that case, you need only undertake the Parameter
Assignment.
The function becomes an action when you Assign an Update Event.
Note:
If you do not select an update event, the system sets the default cycle with a
default cycle time as the update event.
Using the return value of the function, you control the attribute that is linked
to the action. Within the function, you can access each attribute of every
single object in each picture using the Get... and Set... functions. This means
you can read and set the attribute value.
The formulated function must be compiled. During compilation, errors which
may have occurred are reported. If the compilation is carried out without
errors, the formulation of the action is completed, and the action is linked
with the attribute. A compiled C action is marked with a green lightning bolt
in the "Object Properties" box.
Note:
After formulating the action, you can exit the "Edit Action" box and return to
the "Object Properties" box without compiling the action. A box will notify
you of this situation. Select "Compile Yes or No." If you decide not to compile
the action, this is noted with a yellow lightning bolt in the "Dynamic" column
within the "Object Properties" box.
You can export actions which were compiled without errors and load them in
a file. You can also import exported actions and thus link them with a new
attribute. The imported action can then be edited if necessary.
Note:
When you copy the object whose attribute you just made dynamic in the
Graphics Designer, the action that is connected to that attribute is copied
along with it.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-21
Graphics Designer
08.97
How to Formulate a C Function:

Open the "Edit Action" box:
Formulate the function in the right half of the window. The first row contains
the header file to be linked. The second row already contains the function
name followed by parentheses containing the formal parameters, as well as
the left (open) parenthesis. The last row contains the right (close) parenthesis.
The parameters are:
Parameter
lpszPictureName
lpszObjectName
lpszPropertyName
Meaning
Picture name of the active picture
Object name of the selected object
Attribute name of the attribute with
which the action is to be linked
Type
char pointer
char pointer
char pointer
Edit the C function in this section of the window.

The following edit functions are available:
Function
New row
Delete character to the right
Delete character to the left
Jump to the beginning of the row
Jump to the end of the row
Jump to the beginning of the text
Jump to the end of the text
Move the insertion point
Cut selected text
Copy selected text
Paste text from the Clipboard
3-22
Keyboard
Enter
Delete
Backspace
Home
End
Ctrl+Home
Ctrl+End
with the cursor keys
Ctrl+X
Ctrl+C
Ctrl+V
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Function
Mark text
Mark a word
Mouse
with left mouse button
Double click with left mouse
button
with left mouse button
Further edit functions are:

Write mode is "Insert."
The selected text is replaced by the next character selected using
the keyboard.
Expanded selection.
Select a range:
Place the cursor where you wish the selection to begin, hold down
the Shift key, and then place the cursor where you wish the
selection to end.
Expand a selection:
Hold the Shift key and place the cursor at the desired end of the
selection.
You can place fully programmed functions within your function at the cursor
location. This function replaces selected text. Open the folders in the left half
of the window and select the desired function by clicking on it with the right
mouse button.
This opens a pop-up menu in which you select the menu item "Parameter
Assignment." This opens the "Assign Parameters " dialog box where you can
assign parameters to the selected function. Once the parameter assignment is
successfully carried out, the selected function with its current parameters is
inserted at the insertion mark. If you selected text, it is replaced by the
function.
Note:
You can also open the "Assign Parameters" box by double clicking the left
mouse button on the desired function.
If you want to edit the parameter assignment yourself, select "OK" from the
pop-up menu. The selected function is inserted at the cursor location as
"Prototype." This means it contains a declaration of the data types and the
formal parameters. If you selected text, it is replaced by the function.
You can insert tag names by clicking on the
button. This opens the
"Select Tag" box from which you select the desired tag.
You can shift the split bar right or left using the mouse.
See also Volume 2, Global Script, Section 3, Standard Functions, and Volume
2, Global Script, Section 4, Internal Functions.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-23
Graphics Designer
08.97
How to Assign Parameters to a Function:

By clicking the right mouse button on the function name in the "Edit Action"
box, you opened a pop-up menu and selected the "Parameter Assignment"
menu item. The "Assign Parameters " box is opened.
The entries in the "Description" and "Data Type" columns are informational.
You can enter parameters in the following ways:
Once all of the parameters have been entered, close the "Assigning
Parameters" box by clicking on the "OK" button. The selected function and its
parameters are placed at the insertion mark in the "Edit Action" box.
How to Input a Tag as a Parameter:

In the Setting Parameters box, you opened the drop-down menu by clicking
button and selected the Select Tag entry to open the "Select Tag"
on the
dialog:
Note:
The graphic displayed contains hot spots. If you click the left mouse button
on a hot spot, you will receive an explanation of the hot spot. The keystroke
combination <Ctrl>Tab makes all hot spots visible.
3-24
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
You then return to the "Assign Parameters" box and the selected tag is
entered as a parameter.
How to Input the Name of a Picture, an Object, or an Attribute as a

Parameter:
In the Setting Parameters box, you opened the drop-down menu by clicking
button and selected the Graphic Objects entry. This opens the
on the
"Picture Browser"" dialog:
The left third of the box contains a list of pictures available in the project.
Click on a picture to select it. The "Object" list includes the objects that are
contained in the selected picture. If you want to use the picture name as a
parameter, highlight the object name of the picture in the "Objects" list by
clicking on it ("NewPdl1" in the example above) and then click "OK".
If you want to use the object name of an object contained in a picture as a
parameter, click on the desired object name in the "Objects" list. The
"Properties" list is filled with the attribute names owned by the selected
object. Click on "OK".
If you want to use an attribute name as a parameter, click on the desired
attribute name in the "Properties" list and then on "OK".
This closes the "Select Picture" box. You return to the "Assign Parameters"
box and the selected name is entered as a parameter.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-25
Graphics Designer
08.97
How to Set the Update Event:

Click the
button. This opens the "Change Trigger " box.
Note:
The system presets the trigger event with a default entry. The default depends
on the contents of your formulated expression in the "Dynamic Value Ranges"
box. If the expression contains one or more tags, the default entry for the
trigger event is "Tag" and all of the tags that are in the expression are
transferred to the tag list . If the expression does not contain tags, the default
entry for the trigger event is "Default Cycle." The entry for the cycle is set
with a default value.
You select an event by opening the "Event" list with the left mouse button and
marking the desired event by clicking on it with the left mouse button.
You can select from the following events:
Tag
Default Cycle
Picture Cycle
Window Cycle
If you select "Default Cycle," "Picture Cycle," or "Window Cycle" as the

event, you can assign a trigger name to the event. Input the trigger name by
placing the cursor in the "Trigger Name" row using a left mouse click. If you
enter the name using the keyboard, you delete an entry that was already there.
3-26
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
If you selected "Default Cycle" or "Tag," you may need to change the cycle
time. Do this by opening the "Cycle" list with the left mouse button and
marking the desired time by clicking on it with the left mouse button. You
can select from the following cycle times:
At change
250 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
5s
10 s
1 min
5 min
10 min
1 hr
User cycle 1
User cycle 2
User cycle 3
User cycle 4
User cycle 5
The "At change" entry is only available if you selected "Tag" as the event. If
you selected "Tag" as the event, the contents of the "Change Trigger" box
change:
Here you can input one or more tags which serve as a trigger for the action
when their value changes from one cycle to the next. If more than one tag is
input, the action is triggered when the value of one of these tags changes from
one cycle to the next.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-27
Graphics Designer
08.97
There are three ways to input tags:

Using the left mouse button, place the cursor on the text line Tag
Name and enter a name. The name will not be enclosed by
quotation marks.
Afterwards, click on the "Add" button to transfer the tag to the tag
list.
Right mouse button click on the Trigger Name column in the tag
list. If you want to use an existing tag, select DM_Tags from the
displayed pop-up menu. The Select Tag dialog will open from
which you can select the desired tag.
If you want to enter the tag name directly, select New from the
pop-up menu.
By clicking on the
button, open the "Select Tag" box
from which you may select the desired tag.
You then return to the "Change Trigger" box. The selected tag is now entered
in the "Trigger Name" column in the tag list.
The system assigns a cycle time to the entered tags in the "Default Cycle"
column. This is the time span between two sequential scans of the tags for
value change.
If you want to change the cycle time of a tag at a later time, use the following
steps:
Click the right mouse button on the cycle time to be changed to
open the pop-up menu.
Select the new cycle time from the pop-up menu.
3-28
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
An alternative procedure is the following:

Double click on the cycle time to be changed to open the "Update"
box.
Select the new cycle time from the list and click the "OK" button to
close the box.
Delete entered tags by marking them in the tag list and then clicking the
"Remove" button.
Mark a connected range of tags by marking the first tag in the range and then
marking the last tag with the "Shift" key depressed. Mark individual multiple
tags by marking the first tag and then marking all others with the "Ctrl" key
depressed.
If the update event has been set, close the "Change Trigger" box by clicking
on the "OK" button. This returns you to the "Edit Action" box.
How to Control the Attribute Value:

You can use the return value of your C function to control the attribute that is
linked to your action.
Example:
In the Graphics Designer, open the picture than contains the object whose
attribute you want to make dynamic. Open the "Object Properties" box by
clicking the right mouse button on the appropriate object. In this box, select
the property to be made dynamic. In the following figure, this is the "Circle1"
object and the "Colors" property.
Click the right mouse button on the light bulb icon for the appropriate
attribute that you want to make dynamic, for example, on the light bulb icon
in the row with the "background color" attribute.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-29
Graphics Designer
08.97
From the pop-up menu that opens, select "C-Action...". The "Edit Action"
window opens. In the right half of the window, it already contains the
completed structure of a C function.
Formulate your function and set the trigger that will call your C function
during run time.
The function consists of the definition of both local tags xvar and result. The
GetTagDWord ("var") function assigns the value of the process tags var to the
local tags xvar.
The if-else construct assigns the result tags result a value of CO_RED (value
for the color red) if the value of the xvar tags is greater than 128, otherwise it
receives the value CO_BLUE (value for the color blue).
The last row ensures that the function value of the C function main receives
the value of the event tags.
A change of the value of the var process tags was selected as the trigger event
and the value of the tags is checked every two seconds by the Control Center.
How to Compile the C Function:

button in the Toolbar of the "Edit Action" box. The function
Click on the
is compiled. This procedure is displayed in the boxs Toolbar with a "Compile
Action..." message.
If the function was compiled without errors, the status bar displays the
message "0 Error(s), 0 Warning(s)."
If errors occurred during the compilation, the message "n Error(s), m
Warning(s)" appears in the status bar. The n and m characters are the number
of errors or warnings.
3-30
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
The errors and warnings appear in the lower part of the edit window , dividing
the window. You can shift this split bar up and down using the mouse.
After a successful compilation, close the "Edit Action" box by clicking on
"OK." This returns you to the "Object Properties" box. The attribute linked to
the action is marked with a green lightning bolt in the "Dynamic" column.
This shows that this attribute is linked to a compiled C action.
Note:
If you close the box without compiling the action, you are notified of this in a
dialog box. You then have the choice of compiling or returning to the "Object
Properties" box without compiling. If you decide not to compile the action, it
is marked with a yellow lightning bolt in the "Dynamic" column in the
"Object Properties" box.
How to Export an Action:

button in the Toolbar. This opens the "Save As" box:
Click on the
Here you select the storage location and the name of the export file. The
extension "act" is added by the system.
Clicking the "Save" button exports the action and loads it in the file you
selected.
The "Save As" box is closed.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-31
Graphics Designer
08.97
How to Import an Action:

Click on the
button in the Toolbar. This opens the "Open" box:
Here you select the desired import file. Import files are files which were
previously created by exporting an action, and which have an extension "act."
Clicking the "Open" button imports the action and then closes the "Open"
box.
Note:
The imported action completely replaces an action that was previously
created.
3.2.1.4 Setting Dynamics with a Tag Value

Properties" box, you opened a pop-up menu and selected "Tag...". The "Select
Tag" box is then opened.
Here you select the Tag that you want to use to set the dynamics of the
referenced object attribute.
The "Select Tag" box is closed and you return to the "Object Properties" box.
The previously white light bulb is now green. It shows that a tag was used to
set the dynamics in the attribute. The tag name is entered next to the green
light bulb.
Next, you must set the type of Addressing in the "Object Properties" box.
3-32
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
There are two addressing methods:

Direct addressing.
The tag value is assigned to the attribute directly.
Indirect addressing.
The tag must be a string type and contain, as a value, the name of a
tag whose value is assigned to the attribute.
The default addressing method is direct.

Finally, set the Update Cycle. The default value is 2 seconds. Through the
update cycle, you determine the frequency with which the tag value updates
the attribute value.
This concludes setting the dynamics of the attribute.
How to Select a Tag from the "Select Tag" Box:

Open the "Select Tag" box.
You then return to the "Object Properties" box. The tag name is now entered
in the object attribute row in the "Dynamic" column. The white light bulb is
colored green.
How to Select the Method of Addressing:

Double click with the left mouse button on the square located in the "Indir ."
column in the object attribute row.
Alternatively, you can open a pop-up menu by clicking the right mouse button
on the appropriate square. From this pop-up menu you can select the method
of addressing by clicking the right or left mouse button.
With an empty square, the addressing method is set to "direct." In the case of
indirect addressing, the square contains a check mark.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-33
Graphics Designer
08.97
How to Set the Update Cycle:

There are two ways to set the update cycle.
Click the right mouse button on the "Object Attribute" row and the "Current"
column. This opens a pop-up menu with the following preset update cycles:
In addition to preset cycle times, you find:

Picture Cycle
Window Cycle
At Change
The attribute value is updated when the tag value is changed.
User Cycle 1 to User Cycle 5
The times and names are presented as defaults.
The times as well as the names can be changed in the WinCC
Control Center under "Update Cycles."
Using the left or right mouse button, select the desired update cycle from the
pop-up menu. This closes the menu and enters the selected value in the
"Update" column in the "Object Properties" box.
You can also set the update cycle by double clicking the left mouse button to
open the "Update" box. The box is located in the "Update" column on the row
containing the appropriate object attribute.
Open the list here by clicking the left mouse button on the list window or on
the button to the right of the list window. Position the entries using the slider
and select the update cycle you want by clicking on it with the left mouse
button.
Clicking on the "OK" button returns you to the "Object Properties" box. The
update cycle is now entered.
3-34
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
3.2.2 Reacting to Events

You selected the "Event" tab in the "Object Properties" box and set an object
like "Rectangle1."
Now select the event category which contains the event for triggering the C
function from the left half of the box. This category could be, for example, a
"Mouse Event."
Click the right mouse button on the white lightning bolt in the "Action"
column, for example, on the "Press Left" row. Now the function to be
formulated is triggered when the left mouse button is clicked on the
"Rectangle1" object. With keystroke events, the function is executed when the
event occurs and the "Rectangle1" object is selected.
A pop-up menu opens in which you can select any one of the following
options:
Create the function or edit an existing function (C Action...)
Create a direct connection
Delete the function (Delete)
Select "C Action..." to formulate a new function or to change an already

available function.
The "Edit Action" box opens. Since you have already set the event, the
button is set to inactive in this box. Otherwise, you would use this button to
configure the triggering event.
Formulate your C function.
See also Section 3.2.1.2, Setting Dynamics with a C Action
Note:
When you copy the object you just made dynamic in the Graphics Designer,
the action that is connected to the object is copied along with it.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-35
Graphics Designer
3-36
08.97
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4 Appendix
This chapter describes the object types (standard objects, smart objects,
Windows objects,group objects, and picture objects) of the Graphics Designer
with their specific properties (attributes).
Then the attributes of the objects are explained (in alphabetical order).
The conclusion explains the output formats of the I/O-Field and the
assignments of the Text List.
Note: The Smart Objects "3D Bar" and "Group Display" are parts of the
"Basic Process Control" option package. They are described along with their
properties and specific attributes in the WinCC Options Manual.
4.1 Object types and their properties

4.1.1 Line Properties
All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the
"Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab.
The "Line" object is described using the following attributes:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Rotation Reference X
Rotation Reference Y
Rotation Angle
Colors
Line Color
Line Background Color
Styles
Line Weight
Line Style
Line End Style
Flashing
Flashing Line Active

Flashing Line Color Off
Flashing Line Color On
Line Flash Frequency
Miscellaneous
Operator-Control Enable
Password
Display
4-1
Graphics Designer
08.97
4.1.2 Polygon Properties

The "Polygon" object is described using the following attributes:
4-2
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Rotation Angle
Number of Corners
Current Value X
Current Value Y
Index
Colors
Border Color
Border Background Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
Flashing
Flashing Border Active

Flashing Border Color Off
Flashing Border Color On
Border Flash Frequency
Flashing Background Active
Flashing Background Color Off
Flashing Background Color On
Background Flash Frequency
Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Filling
Dynamic Filling
Fill Level
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.3 Polyline Properties

The "Polyline" object is described using the following attributes:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Rotation Angle
Number of Corners
Current Value X
Current Value Y
Index
Colors
Line Color
Styles
Line Weight
Line Style
Line End Style
Flashing

Miscellaneous
Password
Display
4-3
Graphics Designer
08.97
4.1.4 Ellipse Properties

The "Ellipse" object is described using the following attributes:
4-4
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Radius X
Radius Y
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
Flashing

Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Filling
Dynamic Filling
Fill Level
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.5 Circle Properties

The "Circle" object is described using the following attributes:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Radius
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
Flashing

Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Filling
Dynamic Filling
Fill Level
4-5
Graphics Designer
08.97
4.1.6 Ellipse Segment Properties

The "Ellipse Segment" object is described using the following attributes:
4-6
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Start Angle
End Angle
Radius X
Radius Y
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
Flashing

Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Filling
Dynamic Filling
Fill Level
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.7 Pie Segment Properties

The "Pie Segment" object is described using the following attributes:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Start Angle
End Angle
Radius
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
Flashing

Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Filling
Dynamic Filling
Fill Level
4-7
Graphics Designer
08.97
4.1.8 Ellipse Arc Properties

The "Ellipse Arc" object is described using the following attributes:
4-8
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Start Angle
End Angle
Radius X
Radius Y
Colors
Line Color
Styles
Line Weight
Line Style
Flashing

Miscellaneous
Password
Display
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.9 Circular Arc Properties

The "Circular Arc" object is described using the following attributes:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Start Angle
End Angle
Radius
Colors
Line Color
Styles
Line Weight
Line Style
Flashing

Miscellaneous
Password
Display
4-9
Graphics Designer
08.97
4.1.10 Rectangle Properties

The "Rectangle" object is described using the following attributes:
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
Flashing

Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Dynamic Filling
Fill Level
Filling
4-10
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.11 Rounded Rectangle Properties

The "Rounded Rectangle" object is described using the following attributes:
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Corner Radius X
Corner Radius Y
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
Flashing

Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Dynamic Filling
Fill Level
Filling
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-11
Graphics Designer
08.97
4.1.12 Static Text Properties

The "Static Text" object is described using the following properties:
4-12
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Font Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
Font
Text
Font
Font Size
Bold
Italic
Underline
Text Orientation
X Alignment
Y Alignment
Flashing

Flashing Text Active
Flashing Text Color Off
Flashing Text Color On
Text Flash Frequency
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Adapt Border
Configured Languages
Filling
Dynamic Filling
Fill Level
Note: If the text contains control characters, they are also displayed in the
object properties window in the tab labeled "Properties" - Subject "Text" Attribute "Text" - "Static" (for example, \r\n equals CR/LF).
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-13
Graphics Designer
08.97
4.1.13 Application Window Properties

The "Application Window" object is described using the following attributes:
4-14
Base
Object Name
Layer
Window Contents
Template
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Window Width
Window Height
Miscellaneous
Display
Sizable
Moveable
Border
Title
Can Be Maximized
Can Be Closed
Foreground
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.14 Picture Window Properties

The "Picture Window" object is described using the following attributes:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Window Width
Window Height
Miscellaneous
Display
Update Cycle
Sizable
Moveable
Border
Title
Can Be Maximized
Can Be Closed
Foreground
Scroll Bar
Adapt Size
Adapt Picture
Picture Name
Picture Offset X
Picture Offset Y
Scaling Factor
4-15
Graphics Designer
08.97
4.1.15 OLE Control Properties

Only individual standard types can be made dynamic in WinCC. For this
reason, WinCC OLE controls provide the attributes which are to be made
dynamic as individual attributes. WinCC and OLE control internal
mechanisms are used to change that kind of attribute.
The "OLE Control" object is described using the following attributes:
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Miscellaneous
Display
Server Name
OLE Control Properties
Notes:
The properties "Position X," "Position Y," "Width," "Height," and "View" are
determined by the container and are no longer separate in OLE Control.
Properties like "Operator-Control Enable," "Password," and "Operator
Activities Report" cannot be configured in the container since WinCC does
not influence which operation the OLE control passes to its container.
Structures cannot be made dynamic. The OLE control object properties must
be used for configuration. If you select that kind of attribute in the WinCC
object properties, it is triggered by the OLE control and displayed. The
changes are accepted as long as the reporting mechanism is implemented in
the OLE control.
4-16
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.16 OLE Object Properties

The "OLE Object" is described by the following attributes:
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Miscellaneous
Display
Server Name
Notes:
Windows uses a registration database to manage all of the OLE tasks installed
on your computer. This database contains all of the information about each
OLE task, such as the file name and path of the OLE task. Each time an OLE
task is installed, it is automatically registered in the database.
If you move or copy an OLE task to another folder manually, it is possible for
the entries in the registration database to not be current. In this case, you must
process the database with the registration editor.
You can receive information about using the registration database from the
Help functions of the registration editor.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-17
Graphics Designer
08.97
4.1.17 I/O Field Properties

"Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. You can set some
attributes in the configuration dialog if you select this option in the "Options"
- "Settings" - "Options" menu.
The "I/O Field" object is described using the following attributes:
4-18
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Font Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
Font
Font
Font Size
Bold
Italic
Underline
Text Orientation
X Alignment
Y Alignment
Flashing

WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Graphics Designer
Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Operator Activities Report
Operator Input Message
Adapt Border
Cursor Control
Immediate Input
Limits
Low Limit Value

High Limit Value
Output/Input
Field Type
Output Value
Data Format
Output Format
Apply on Full
Apply on Exit
Clear on New Input
Clear on Invalid Input
Hidden Input
4-19
Graphics Designer
08.97
4.1.18 Bar Properties

The "Bar" is described using the following attributes:
4-20
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Bar Width
Bar Height
Bar Direction
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Bar Color
Scale Color
Bar Background Color
Trend Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
Bar Pattern
Font
Font
Font Size
Bold
Flashing

WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Graphics Designer
Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Change Color
Maximum Value
Zero Point Value
Minimum Value
Hysteresis
Hysteresis Range
Trend
Average Value
Process Driver Connection
Axis
Scale
Alignment
Long Axis Sections
Label Each
Only Long Axis Sections
Length of Axis Section
Exponent Display
Bar Scaling
Zero Point
Axis Section
Scale Marks
Digits to the Left of the Decimal Point
Digits to the Right of the Decimal Point
Limits
Limit Marker
Monitoring AL
Limit AL
Bar Color AL
Type AL
Monitoring WL
Limit WL
Bar Color WL
Type WL
Monitoring TL
Limit TL
Bar Color TL
Type TL
Monitoring RL4
Limit RL4
Bar Color RL4
Type RL4
Monitoring RL5
Limit RL5
Bar Color RL5
Type RL5
Monitoring AH
Limit AH
Bar Color AH
Type AH
4-21
Graphics Designer
08.97
Monitoring WH
Limit WH
Bar Color WH
Type WH
Monitoring TH
Limit TH
Bar Color TH
Type TH
Monitoring RH4
Limit RH4
Bar Color RH4
Type RH4
Monitoring RH5
Limit RH5
Bar Color RH5
Type RH5
4-22
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.19 Graphic Object (External Format) Properties

The "Graphic Object" object is described using the following attributes:
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
Flashing

Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Filling
Dynamic Filling
Fill Level
Picture
Picture
Picture Referenced
Picture Transparent Color
Picture Transparent Color On
Note:
The graphic files (.bmp, .dip, .emf, and .wmf) for the attribute "Picture" must
be located in the GraCS folder of the project path.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-23
Graphics Designer
08.97
4.1.20 Status Display Properties

The "Status Display" object is described using the following attributes:
4-24
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Colors
Border Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Flashing

Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Status
Current Status
Basic Picture
Basic Picture Referenced
Basic Picture Transparent Color
Basic Picture Transparent Color On
Flash Picture
Flash Picture Referenced
Flash Picture Transparent Color
Flash Picture Transparent Color On
Flash Picture Flash Frequency
Flashing Flash Picture Active
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.21 Text List Properties

"Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. You can set some of the
attributes in the configuration dialog if you select the option in the "Options" "Settings" - "Options" menu.
The "Text List"" object is described using the following attributes:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Font Color
Selection Font Color
Select Text Color
Selection Background Color
Select Background Color
Separation Line Color
Separation Line Background Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
Separation Line Weight
Separation Line Style
Font
Font
Font Size
Bold
Italic
Underline
Text Orientation
X Alignment
Y Alignment
4-25
Graphics Designer
4-26
08.97
Flashing

Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Adapt Border
Cursor Control
Immediate Input
Language Switch
Output/Input
Field Type
Output Value
List Type
Assignments
Bit Number
Apply on Exit
Number of Visible Lines
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.22 Button Properties

The "Button" object is described using the following attributes:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Font Color
3D Border Color
3D Shadow Color
Styles
Line Weight
Line Style
Fill Pattern
3D Border Weight
Windows Style
Font
Text
Font
Font Size
Bold
Italic
Underline
Text Orientation
X Alignment
Y Alignment
Flashing

4-27
Graphics Designer
08.97
Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Adapt Border
Hot Key
Picture Status On
Picture Status Off
Filling
Dynamic Filling
Fill Level
Notes:
The graphic files (.bmp) for the attributes "Picture Status On" and "Picture
Status Off" must be located in the GraCS folder of the project path.
If you need to use a label with more than one line on a button, use the
following trick:
1. Create a "Static Text" object (
2. Create the button (
).
).
3. Select "Static Text" and "Button" (multiple selection) and open the
"Object Properties" window (
).
4. In the "Properties" tab, select the "Text" attribute under the "Font" area
and double click on the attribute to open the "Text Input" dialog window.
5. Enter the multiple line text. Use the "Shift" + "Enter" keystroke
combination to move the cursor to the beginning of the next line.
6. Close the "Text Input" dialog window.
7. Delete the "Static Text" object.
4-28
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.23 Check Box Properties

The "Check Box" object is described using the following attributes:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Number of Boxes
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Font Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
Box Alignment
Font
Index
Text
Font
Font Size
Bold
Italic
Underline
Text Orientation
X Alignment
Y Alignment
Flashing

4-29
Graphics Designer
4-30
08.97
Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Adapt Border
Filling
Dynamic Filling
Fill Level
Output/Input
Selected Boxes
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.24 Option Group Properties

The "Option Group" object is described using the following attributes:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Number of Boxes
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Font Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
Box Alignment
Font
Index
Text
Font
Font Size
Bold
Italic
Underline
Text Orientation
X Alignment
Y Alignment
Flashing

4-31
Graphics Designer
4-32
08.97
Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Adapt Border
Filling
Dynamic Filling
Fill Level
Output/Input
Selected Box
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.25 Round Button Properties

The "Round Button" object is described using the following attributes:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Radius
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
3D Border Color
3D Shadow Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
3D Border Weight
Latch Down
Switch Setting
Flashing

Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Filling
Dynamic Filling
Fill Level
4-33
Graphics Designer
08.97
Pictures
Picture Status Off

Picture Off Referenced
Picture Off Transparent Color
Picture Off Transparent Color On
Picture Status On
Picture On Referenced
Picture On Transparent Color
Picture On Transparent Color On
Picture Status Deactivated
Picture Deact. Referenced
Picture Deact. Transparent Color
Picture Deact. Transparent Color On
Note:
The graphic files (.bmp, .dip, .emf, and .wmf) for the attributes "Picture
Status Off", "Picture Status On" and "Picture Status Deactivated" must be
located in the GraCS folder of the project path.
4-34
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.26 Slider Properties

The "Slider" object is described using the following attributes:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Alignment
Colors
Border Color
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
High Limit Background Color
Low Limit Background Color
Button Color
High Limit Color
Low Limit Color
Styles
Border Weight
Border Style
Fill Pattern
Border Weight
Windows Style
Flashing

4-35
Graphics Designer
08.97
Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Tool Tip Text
Extended Operation
Maximum Value
Minimum Value
Operation Steps
Process Driver Connection
Filling
Dynamic Filling
Fill Level
Note: You can configure an outline for the slider ("Border Weight" and
"Background Color" attributes). The size of the object remains the same and
the slider is reduced appropriately. In addition, you can configure another
border inside the border ("Border Weight" and "Border Color"). The border
is displayed at the maximum width of the outline even if you configured a
larger value.
4-36
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.1.27 Group Properties

The standard attributes of the group and the combined amount of the
attributes of all of the subobjects are listed. Each attribute appears only once.
The following attributes are always present in a "Group Object":
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Base
Object Name
Layer
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Width
Height
Miscellaneous
Password
Display
User-Defined
Attributes from Other Subjects
4-37
Graphics Designer
08.97
4.1.28 Picture Properties

All of the object attributes are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in
the "Properties" tab.
The "Picture" object is described using the following attributes:
4-38
Geometry
Picture Width
Picture Height
Grid On
Grid Width
Grid Height
Colors
Background Color
Fill Pattern Color
Grid Color
Styles
Fill Pattern
Miscellaneous
Password
Display
Update Cycle
Date of Last Change
Cursor Mode
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
4.2 Attributes in Alphabetical Order

The attributes (properties) of the various object types are divided into topic
groups. Each object includes the topics with properties that are specific to that
object type. This means that each object does not possess all of the available
attributes.
The following is an alphabetical listing of all of the available attributes
without their object assignment. The OLE automation name is also provided
under the attribute name. In addition to an explanation of the attribute, the
listing also indicates whether you can make that attribute dynamic.
3D Border Color
BorderColorTop
Set the color for the left and top part of the 3D border.
The 3D Border Color can be made dynamic with the name
BorderColorTop.
3D Border Weight
BackBorderWidth
Set the weight of the 3D border.
3D Shadow Color
BorderColorBottom
Set the color for the right and bottom part of the 3D border.
Adapt Border
AdaptBorder
The 3D Border Weight attribute can be made dynamic with the name
BackBorderWidth.
The 3D Shadow Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name
BorderColorBottom.
Select whether the border should be dynamically fitted to the text size in
objects that contain text.
If the contents of the box are changed dynamically, the size of the box
changes.
The Adapt Border attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Adapt Picture
AdaptPicture
Set the picture size to fit the window size.
Adapt Size
AdaptSize
Set the window size to fit the picture size.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
The Adapt Picture attribute cannot be made dynamic.
The Adapt Size attribute cannot be made dynamic.
4-39
Graphics Designer
Alignment
Alignment
Direction
08.97
Bar:
Set the alignment of the scale (left/right or top/bottom) with a bar.
With bars, bar scaling is only visible when scaling is active.
The Alignment attribute can be made dynamic with the name Alignment.
Slider:
Set the location of the slider (horizontal/vertical) with a slider object.
The Alignment attribute can be made dynamic with the name Direction.
Apply on Exit
AssumeOnExit
Set the system to accept the input as soon as the field is exited (using the Tab
key or a mouse click).
This attribute is only relevant for input fields and for combined I/O fields.
The Apply on Exit attribute can be made dynamic with the name
AssumeOnExit.
Apply on Full
AssumeOnFull
Set the system to automatically (without Tab or Return key) exit the input
field and accept the input as soon as the input has been completed (the
specified number of characters were entered).
The Apply on Full attribute can be made dynamic with the name
AssumeOnFull.
Assignments
Assignments
Set the connections between the output value and the text that is to be actually
output. The assignments depend on the list type that is set.
The Assignments attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Average Value
Average
Set whether the last 15 values should be averaged.
Axis Section
AxisSection
Set the units of measurement on the axis.
The Average Value attribute can be made dynamic with the name Average.
The size of the units depends on the "Long Axis Sections" attribute.
The Axis Section attribute can be made dynamic with the name AxisSection.
Background Color
BackColor
Set the background color of the object.

The background color is only displayed when the object is at least partially
filled.
The Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name
BackColor.
4-40
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Background
Set the flash frequency for the background.
Flash Frequency
You can set the frequency to slow (approximately 0.5 Hz), medium
FlashRateBackColor
(approximately 2 Hz), and fast (approximately 8 Hz).
Since flashing is implemented by means of software, the frequency is systemand hardware-dependent (number of objects, processor, memory, update
cycle, and more).
The Background Flash Frequency attribute can be made dynamic with the
name FlashRateBackColor.
Bar Background Color Set the color of the bar background.

BackColor3
The Bar Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name
BackColor3.
Bar Color
BackColor2
Set the color of the bar for displaying the current value.
Bar Color AH
ColorAlarmHigh
Set the color for the limit value of "alarm high."
The Bar Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name BackColor2.
If the monitor function for the limit value is active, the bar will take on the
color specified in this attribute when the limit value is reached.
The Bar Color AH attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ColorAlarmHigh.
Bar Color AL
ColorAlarmLow
Set the color for the limit value for "alarm low."
The Bar Color AL attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ColorAlarmLow.
Bar Color RH4

ColorLimitHigh4
Set the color for the high limit value of "reserve 4."
The Bar Color RH4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ColorLimitHigh4.
Bar Color RH5

ColorLimitHigh5
Set the color for the high limit of "reserve 5."

The Bar Color RH5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ColorLimitHigh5.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-41
Graphics Designer
Bar Color RL4

ColorLimitLow4
08.97
Set the color for the low limit value of "reserve 4."
The Bar Color RL4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ColorLimitLow4.
Bar Color RL5

ColorLimitLow5
Set the color for the low limit value of "reserve 5."
The Bar Color RL5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ColorLimitLow5.
Bar Color TH
ColorToleranceHigh
Set the color for the limit value of "tolerance high."

The Bar Color TH attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ColorToleranceHigh.
Bar Color TL
ColorToleranceLow
Set the color for the limit value "tolerance low."

The Bar Color TL attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ColorToleranceLow.
Bar Color WH
ColorWarningHigh
Set the color for the limit value of "warning high."

The Bar Color WH attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ColorWarningHigh.
Bar Color WL
ColorWarningLow
Set the color for the limit value "warning low."

The Bar Color WL attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ColorWarningLow.
Bar Direction
Direction
4-42
Set the positive bar axis.

The Bar Direction attribute can be made dynamic with the name Direction.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Bar Height
Height
Set the height of the bar in pixels.
Bar Pattern
FillStyle2
Set the fill pattern of the bar. You can select a pattern from the selection
dialog box.
The Bar Height attribute can be made dynamic with the name Height.
The Bar Pattern attribute can be made dynamic with the name FillStyle2.
Bar Scaling
ScalingType
Set the type of bar scaling (linear, logarithmic, or automatic).

The bar scaling is only visible when the "Scale" attribute is active.
The Bar Scaling attribute can be made dynamic with the name ScalingType.
Bar Width
Width
Set the width of the bar in pixels.
Basic Picture
BasePicture
Set the basic picture for the status display. Depending on the "Basic Picture
Referenced" attribute, the entire object or only the object reference is stored.
The Bar Width attribute can be made dynamic with the name Width.
The corresponding status is selected by means of the "Current Status"

attribute.
The Basic Picture attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Basic Picture
Referenced
BasePicReferenced
Determine whether the assigned picture is stored in the status display object
or only the corresponding object reference is stored.
Basic Picture
Transparent Color
BasePicTransColor
Determine which color of the assigned bitmap object (.bmp, .dib) should be
set to "transparent".
The Basic Picture Referenced attribute cannot be made dynamic.
The attribute is analyzed only if the "Basic Picture Transparent Color On"
attribute is activated.
The Basic Picture Transparent Color attribute can be made dynamic with
the name BasePicTransColor.
Basic Picture
Use this attribute to specify whether the "Transparent Color" function should
Transparent Color On be used. This function is only available for bitmap objects (.bmp, .dib).
BasePicUseTransColor
The Basic Picture Transparent Color On attribute can be made dynamic
with the name BasePicUseTransColor.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-43
Graphics Designer
Bit Number
BitNumber
08.97
Set the number of the relevant bit in the output value.

This attribute is used only with the "bit" list type.
The Bit Number attribute can be made dynamic with the name BitNumber.
Bold
FontBold
Set the text attribute Bold for the text in the object.
Border
WindowBorder
Determine whether the windows should be displayed with borders.
Border
Background Color
BorderBackColor
Set the background color of the border of the object.
The Bold attribute can be made dynamic with the name FontBold.
The Border attribute cannot be made dynamic.
The background color is only visible when the border is not a solid line
("Border Style" attribute).
The Border Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the
name BorderBackColor.
Border Color
BorderColor
Set the border color of the object.

The Border Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name
BorderColor.
Border
Set the flash frequency for the border.
Flash Frequency
FlashRateBorderColor
cycle, and more).
The Border Flash Frequency attribute can be made dynamic with the name
FlashRateBorderColor.
Border Style
BorderStyle
Set the style of the border of the object.

If you select the border styles "dash," "dot," "dash dot," or "dash dot
dot," a weight of 1 pixel is displayed independent of the selected border
weight.
The Border Style attribute can be made dynamic with the name
BorderStyle.
4-44
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Border Weight
BorderWidth
Graphics Designer
Set the weight of the border of the object.

If you select the border styles "dash," "dot," "dash dot," or "dash dot
dot," a weight of 1 pixel is displayed independent of the selected border
weight.
The Border Weight attribute can be made dynamic with the name
BorderWidth.
Border Weight
BackBorderWidth
Set the weight of the slider border in pixels.

This value contains the possibly available border weight (a value of 0 means
the border is not displayed).
The Border Weight attribute can be made dynamic with the name
BackBorderWidth.
Box Alignment
BoxAlignment
Set whether the boxes (for example, in the option group or check box) should
be aligned left or aligned right.
The Box Alignment attribute can be made dynamic with the name
BoxAlignment.
Button Color
ButtonColor
Can Be Closed
CloseButton
Set the color of the button or the slider.

The Button Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ButtonColor.
Determine whether the window can be closed.

This attribute is not analyzed unless the "Title" attribute is active.
The Can Be Closed attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Can Be Maximized
MaximizeButton
In the case of window objects, determine whether the window can be

enlarged to the maximum screen size.
This attribute is not analyzed unless the "Title" attribute is active.
The Can Be Maximized attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Change Color
ColorChangeType
Set whether a color change (for example, when a limit is reached) is carried
out in individual segments or in the entire bar.
The Change Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ColorChangeType.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-45
Graphics Designer
08.97
Clear on Invalid Input Set the field entry in the input field to be deleted automatically when there is
ClearOnError
an invalid input.
The Clear on Invalid Input attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ClearOnError.
Clear on New Input

ClearOnNew
Set the field entry in the input field to be deleted at startup.

The Clear on New Input attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ClearOnNew.
Configured
Languages
DataLanguage
Set the language for the input in the text object.
Corner Radius X
RoundCornerWidth
Set the corner radius for a rounded rectangle. This value is a percentage of
half the width of the object.
The Configured Languages attribute cannot be made dynamic.
The Corner Radius X attribute can be made dynamic with the name
RoundCornerWidth.
Corner Radius Y
RoundCornerHeight
Set the corner radius for a rounded rectangle. This value is a percentage of
half the height of the object.
The Corner Radius Y attribute can be made dynamic with the name
RoundCornerHeight.
Current Status
Index
Select the status (0 to 232 -1) for the status display object type for which you
want to set the associated attributes for displaying the "Basic Picture" and the
"Flash Picture."
The Current Status attribute can be made dynamic with the name Index.
Current Value X
ActualPointLeft
Set the current horizontal position of the corner point for polygon and
polyline object types in relation to the origin of the picture. The corner is set
by the index.
Changing this setting also affects the "Position X" and "Width" attributes.
The Current Value X attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ActualPointLeft.
4-46
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Current Value Y
ActualPointTop
Graphics Designer
Set the current vertical position of the corner point for polygon and polyline
object types in relation to the origin of the picture. The corner is set by the
index.
Changing this setting also affects the "Position Y" and "Height" attributes.
The Current Value Y attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ActualPointTop.
Cursor Control
CursorControl
Set an alpha cursor to jump to the next box in the tab sequence after exiting
the current box.
Use the "Cursor Mode" attribute to determine whether a tab order or an alpha
cursor sequence should be active.
The Cursor Control attribute can be made dynamic with the name
CursorControl.
Cursor Mode
CursorMode
Set the type of cursor (tab order or alpha cursor).
Data Format
DataFormat
Set the data type (binary, decimal, hexadecimal, or string) of the contents of
the box.
The Cursor Mode attribute cannot be made dynamic.
The Data Format attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Date of Last Change

LastChange
Set the last valid change date of the picture object.
Digits to the Left

of the Decimal Point
LeftComma
Set the number of digits to the left of the decimal point (0 to 20).
Digits to the Right

of the Decimal Point
RightComma
Set the number of digits to the right of the decimal point (0 to 20).
The Date of Last Change attribute cannot be made dynamic.
The Digits to the Left of the Decimal Point attribute can be made dynamic
with the name LeftComma.
The Digits to the Right of the Decimal Point attribute can be made dynamic
with the name RightComma.
Display
Visible
This attribute determines whether the object is visible or invisible.
Dynamic Filling
Filling
Determine whether an object with a solid border (rectangle, rounded

rectangle, circle, ellipse, pie segment, ellipse segment, polygon, text, I/0 field,
and others) can be filled.
The Display attribute can be made dynamic with the name Visible.
The Dynamic Filling attribute can be made dynamic with the name Filling.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-47
Graphics Designer
End Angle
EndAngle
08.97
Set the ending point for the segment and arc object types. The input is
clockwise in degrees, starting with 12 oclock.
The End Angle attribute can be made dynamic with the name EndAngle.
Exponent Display
Exponent
Specify whether the number display should be with exponents.
Extended Operation
ExtendedOperation
Allow the slider to be set to a new appropriate limit value (minimum

value/maximum value) by clicking on the area outside of the current slider
setting.
The Exponent Display attribute can be made dynamic with the name
Exponent.
The Extended Operation attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ExtendedOperation.
Field Type
BoxType
Set the field type (input, output, or combined I/O field).
Fill Level
FillingIndex
Set the percentage value (relative to the height of the object) to which an
object with a solid border (rectangle, rounded rectangle, circle, ellipse,
polygon, text, I/O field, and others) can be filled.
The Field Type attribute can be made dynamic with the name BoxType.
The "Fill Color" is set under the "Colors" topic.

The Fill Level attribute can be made dynamic with the name FillingIndex.
Fill Pattern
FillStyle
Set the fill pattern of the object. You can select a fill pattern from the style
palette or the selection dialog box.
The Fill Pattern attribute can be made dynamic with the name FillStyle.
Fill Pattern Color

FillColor
Flash Picture
FlashPicture
Set the fill pattern color of the object.

The Fill Pattern Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name
FillColor.
Set the flash picture for the status display. Depending on the "Flash Picture
Referenced" attribute, the entire object or only the object reference is stored.
The corresponding status is selected by means of the "Current Status"
attribute.
The Flash Picture attribute cannot be made dynamic.
4-48
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Flash Picture
Flash Frequency
FlashRateFlashPic
Graphics Designer
Set the flash frequency for the flashing picture.

cycle, and more).
The Flash Picture Flash Frequency attribute can be made dynamic with the
name FlashRateFlashPic.
Flash Picture
Referenced
FlashPicReferenced
Determine whether the assigned picture is stored in the status display object
Flash Picture
Transparent Color
FlashPicTransColor
The Flash Picture Referenced attribute cannot be made dynamic.
The attribute is analyzed only if the "Flash Picture Transparent Color On"
The Flash Picture Transparent Color can be made dynamic with the name
FlashPicTransColor.
Flash Picture
FlashPicUseTransColor
The Flash Picture Transparent Color On attribute can be made dynamic
with the name FlashPicUseTransColor.
Flashing Background Activate the background flashing.

Active
The Flashing Background Active attribute can be made dynamic with the
FlashBackColor
name FlashBackColor.
Flashing Background Set the background color when flashing is switched off.
Color Off
The Flashing Background Color Off attribute can be made dynamic with the
BackFlashColorOff
name BackFlashColorOff.
Flashing Background Set the background color when flashing is switched on.
Color On
The Flashing Background Color On attribute can be made dynamic with the
BackFlashColorOn
name BackFlashColorOn.
Flashing Border
Active
FlashBorderColor
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Activate the border flashing.

The Flashing Border Active attribute can be made dynamic with the name
FlashBorderColor.
4-49
Graphics Designer
08.97
Flashing Border
Set the color for the border when flashing is switched off.
Color Off
The Flashing Border Color Off attribute can be made dynamic with the
BorderFlashColorOff
name BorderFlashColorOff.
Flashing Border
Set the color of the border when flashing is switched on.
Color On
The Flashing Border Color On attribute can be made dynamic with the
BorderFlashColorOn
name BorderFlashColorOn.
Flashing Flash Picture Activate the flashing of the flash picture.

Active
The Flashing Flash Picture Active attribute can be made dynamic with the
FlashFlashPicture
name FlashFlashPicture.
Flashing Line
Active
FlashBorderColor
Activate the line flashing.

The Flashing Line Active attribute can be made dynamic with the name
FlashBorderColor.
Flashing Line
Set the color for the line when flashing is switched off.
Color Off
The Flashing Line Color Off attribute can be made dynamic with the name
BorderFlashColorOff
BorderFlashColorOff.
Flashing Line
Set the color for the line when flashing is switched on.
Color On
The Flashing Line Color On attribute can be made dynamic with the name
BorderFlashColorOn
BorderFlashColorOn.
Flashing Text
Active
FlashForeColor
Activate the text flashing.
Flashing Text
Color Off
ForeFlashColorOff
Set the text color when flashing is switched off.
Flashing Text
Color On
ForeFlashColorOn
Font
FontName
The Flashing Text Active attribute can be made dynamic with the name
FlashForeColor.
The Flashing Text Color Off attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ForeFlashColorOff.
Set the text color when flashing is switched on.

The Flashing Text Color On attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ForeFlashColorOn.
Set the type style of the text in the object. All of the fonts installed in
Windows are available to you for this selection.
The Font attribute can be made dynamic with the name FontName.
4-50
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Font Color
ForeColor
Set the color of the text in the object.
Font Size
FontSize
Set the font size for the text in the object. The input is in point size (pt.), and
you can enter any given value.
The Font Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name ForeColor.
The Font Size attribute can be made dynamic with the name FontSize.
Foreground
OnTop
Set whether the window should always be in the foreground.

When there are multiple windows in the foreground, these are to be
arranged so that they do not overlap each other. If the windows would
overlap, they should not be open at the same time.
The Foreground attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Grid Color
GridColor
Set the grid color for the configuration phase.

The grid is only displayed during the configuration phase.
The Grid Color attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Grid Height
GridHeight
Set the grid height (in pixels) in the picture for the configuration phase.
The Grid Height attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Grid On
Grid
Set whether the grid is displayed in the picture for the configuration phase.
The Grid On attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Grid Width
GridWidth
Set the grid width (in pixels) in the picture for the configuration phase.
The Grid Width attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Height
Height
Set the height of the object in pixels.
Hidden Input
HiddenInput
Hide the input value during input. An asterisk (*) is displayed for each
character.
The Height attribute can be made dynamic with the name Height.
The Hidden Input attribute can be made dynamic with the name
HiddenInput.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-51
Graphics Designer
High Limit
Background Color
BackColorTop
08.97
Set the color for the top/left part of the slider.

The High Limit Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the
name BackColorTop.
High Limit Color

ColorTop
Set the color for the top/left slider position.
High Limit Value

LimitMax
Set the high limit value for I/O fields as an absolute value dependent on the
data format.
The High Limit Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ColorTop.
If the value to be displayed is higher than the high limit value, it is

identified with a sequence of ***, showing that it cannot be displayed.
The High Limit Value attribute can be made dynamic with the name
LimitMax.
Hot Key
Hotkey
Set the key or keystroke combination for a mouse operation in a button.
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Set whether the display should occur with hysteresis.
The Hot Key attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Set the hysteresis value with the "Hysteresis Range" attribute.

The Hysteresis attribute can be made dynamic with the name Hysteresis.
Hysteresis Range
HysteresisRange
Set the hysteresis as a percent of the display value.

The calculation is carried out only when the hysteresis has been enabled with
the "Hysteresis" attribute.
The Hysteresis Range attribute can be made dynamic with the name
HysteresisRange.
Immediate Input
EditAtOnce
Set the ability to make an input immediately upon accessing the I/O field with
the Tab key, without having to carry out any further action.
The Immediate Input attribute can be made dynamic with the name
EditAtOnce.
4-52
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Index
Index
Polygon and Polyline:

Enter the number of the corner whose current X or Y value you want to define
relative to the origin of the picture.
The Index attribute can be made dynamic with the name Index.
Check Box and Option Group:
Input the number (1 to 32) of the box whose text you want to define.
The Index attribute can be made dynamic with the name Index.
Italic
FontItalic
Set the text attribute Italic for the text in the object.
The Italic attribute can be made dynamic with the name FontItalic.
Label Each
Determine which sections of the scale representation should be labeled (each
LongStrokesTextEach one, every other one, every third, etc.).
The Label Each attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Language Switch
LanguageSwitch
Determine if the text list objects should be configured in multiple languages

or not.
The Language Switch attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Latch Down
Toggle
Ensure that the "pressed" and "not pressed" switch settings for round button
object types can be latched down.
The Latch Down attribute can be made dynamic with the name Toggle.
Layer
Layer
Set the location of the object in the picture.

There are 16 layers available (0 to 15). Objects in layer 0 are completely in
the background and objects in layer 15 are completely in the foreground.
Within the layer, the objects which were configured first are in the
background. You can also change the location of the elements using the
Arrange - Within a Layer menu item.
When configuring pictures, you can remove layers and thus make those
objects visible which are located in a deeper layer and are hidden by objects in
a higher layer.
The Layer attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Length of Axis Section Set the length (in pixels) of the axis sections ("Long Strokes" attribute).
LongStrokesSize
The Length of Axis Section attribute can be made dynamic with the name
LongStrokesSize.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-53
Graphics Designer
Limit AH
AlarmHigh
08.97
Set the limit value for "alarm high."

Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Alarm High
Type" attribute.
The limit value is monitored only when the value is active.
The Limit AH attribute can be made dynamic with the name AlarmHigh.
Limit AL
AlarmLow
Set the limit value for "alarm low."

Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Alarm Low
Type" attribute.
The Limit AL attribute can be made dynamic with the name AlarmLow.
Limit Marker
Marker
Determine whether the limit value should be displayed as a scale value in the
bar representation.
The Limit Marker attribute can be made dynamic with the name Marker.
Limit RH4
LimitHigh4
Set the high limit value for "reserve 4."

Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Reserve 4
High Type" attribute.
The Limit RH4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name LimitHigh4.
Limit RH5
LimitHigh5
Set the high limit for "reserve 5."

The Limit RH5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name LimitHigh5.
Limit RL4
LimitLow4
Set the low limit value for "reserve 4."

Low Type" attribute.
The Limit RL4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name LimitLow4.
4-54
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Limit RL5
LimitLow5
Graphics Designer
Set the low limit value for "reserve 5."

The Limit RL5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name LimitLow5.
Limit TH
ToleranceHigh
Set the limit value for "tolerance high."

Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Tolerance
The Limit TH attribute can be made dynamic with the name ToleranceHigh.
Limit TL
ToleranceLow
Set the limit value for "tolerance low."

Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Tolerance
The Limit TL attribute can be made dynamic with the name ToleranceLow.
Limit WH
WarningHigh
Set the limit value for "warning high."

Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Warning
The Limit WH attribute can be made dynamic with the name WarningHigh.
Limit WL
WarningLow
Set the limit for "warning low."

Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Warning
The Limit WL attribute can be made dynamic with the name WarningLow.
Line
Background Color
BorderBackColor
Set the background color of the line of the object.

The background color is only visible when the line is not solid ("Line
Style" attribute).
The Line Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name
BorderBackColor.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-55
Graphics Designer
08.97
Line Color
BorderColor
Set the color of the line of the object.
Line End Style

BorderEndStyle
Select the line end style (rounded, start arrow, angled arrow, etc.) for the
object.
The Line Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name BorderColor.
The Line End Style attribute can be made dynamic with the name
BorderEndStyle.
Line
Set the flash frequency for the line.
Flash Frequency
FlashRateBorderColor
cycle, and more).
The Line Flash Frequency attribute can be made dynamic with the name
FlashRateBorderColor.
Line Style
BorderStyle
Set the line style of the object.

If you select the line styles "dash," "dot," "dash dot," or "dash dot dot,"
a weight of 1 pixel is displayed independent of the selected line weight.
The Line Style attribute can be made dynamic with the name BorderStyle.
Line Weight
BorderWidth
Set the weight of the line of the object.

If you select the line styles "dash," "dot," "dash dot," or "dash dot dot,"
a weight of 1 pixel is displayed independent of the selected line weight.
The Line Weight attribute can be made dynamic with the name
BorderWidth.
List Type
ListType
Set the type of text list (decimal, binary, or bit).
Long Axis Sections

LongStrokesBold
Set whether the long axis sections in the scale representation should be
displayed as bold or normal.
The List Type attribute cannot be made dynamic.
The Long Axis Sections attribute can be made dynamic with the name
LongStrokesBold.
Low Limit
Background Color
BackColorBottom
4-56
Set the color for the bottom/right part of the slider.

The Low Limit Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the
name BackColorBottom.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Low Limit Color

ColorBottom
Low Limit Value

LimitMin
Graphics Designer
Set the color for the bottom/right slider position.

The Low Limit Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ColorBottom.
Set the low limit value for I/O fields as an absolute value dependent on the
data format.
If the value to be displayed is lower than the low limit value, it is
identified with a sequence of ***, showing that it cannot be displayed.
The Low Limit Value attribute can be made dynamic with the name
LimitMin.
Maximum Value
Max
Set the absolute value for a full value view.

If the scale view is active, this value is displayed.
The Maximum Value attribute can be made dynamic with the name Max.
Minimum Value
Min
Set the absolute value for the smallest value view.

If the scale view is active, this value is displayed.
The Minimum Value attribute can be made dynamic with the name Min.
Monitoring AH
CheckAlarmHigh
Determine whether the limit value for "alarm high" should be monitored.
The limit value, the representation upon reaching the limit value, and the type
of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit AH", "Bar Color
AH", and "Type AH").
The Monitoring AH attribute can be made dynamic with the name
CheckAlarmHigh.
Monitoring AL
CheckAlarmLow
Determine whether the limit value for "alarm low" should be monitored.
of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit AL", "Bar Color
AL", and "Type AL").
The Monitoring AL attribute can be made dynamic with the name
CheckAlarmLow.
Monitoring RH4
CheckLimitHigh4
Determine whether the high limit value for "reserve 4" should be monitored.
of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit RH4", "Bar Color
RH4", and "Type RH4").
The Monitoring RH4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name
CheckLimitHigh4.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-57
Graphics Designer
Monitoring RH5
CheckLimitHigh5
08.97
Determine whether the high limit value for "reserve 5" should be monitored.
of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit RH5", "Bar Color
RH5", and "Type RH5").
The Monitoring RH5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name
CheckLimitHigh5.
Monitoring RL4
CheckLimitLow4
Determine whether the low limit value for "reserve 4" should be monitored.
of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit RL4", "Bar Color
RL4", and "Type RL4").
The Monitoring RL4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name
CheckLimitLow4.
Monitoring RL5
CheckLimitLow5
Determine whether the low limit value for "reserve 5" should be monitored.
of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes (("Limit RL5", "Bar Color
RL5", and "Type RL5").
The Monitoring RL5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name
CheckLimitLow5.
Monitoring TH
Determine whether the limit value for "tolerance high" should be monitored.
CheckToleranceHigh
of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit TH", "Bar Color
TH", and "Type TH").
The Monitoring TH attribute can be made dynamic with the name
CheckToleranceHigh.
Monitoring TL
Determine whether the limit value for "tolerance low" should be monitored.
CheckToleranceLow
of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit TL", "Bar Color
TL", and "Type TL").
The Monitoring TL attribute can be made dynamic with the name
CheckToleranceLow.
Monitoring WH
CheckWarningHigh
Determine whether the limit value for "warning high" should be monitored.
of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit WH", "Bar Color
WH", and "Type WH").
The Monitoring WH attribute can be made dynamic with the name
CheckWarningHigh.
4-58
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Monitoring WL
CheckWarningLow
Graphics Designer
Determine whether the limit value for "warning low" should be monitored.
of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit WL", "Bar Color
WL", and "Type WL").
The Monitoring WL attribute can be made dynamic with the name
CheckWarningLow.
Moveable
Moveable
Determine whether a window can be moved.
Number of Boxes
BoxCount
Determine how many boxes are available for multiple or single selection in
the Windows objects check box and option group.
The Moveable attribute cannot be made dynamic.
The Number of Boxes attribute can be made dynamic with the name
BoxCount.
Number of Corners
PointCount
Set the number of corners for the polygon and polyline object types.
Number of Visible
Lines
NumberLines
Set the number of lines the selection list of a text list object should contain. If
the amount of configured text is larger than this value, the selection list
receives a vertical scroll bar.
The Number of Corners attribute cannot be made dynamic.
The Number of Visible Lines attribute can be made dynamic with the name
NumberLines.
Object Name
ObjectName
Set the name of the object.

The object name is unique within a picture. During script configuration or
WinCC-API calls, the object is addressed using this unique name.
The object name cannot contain any of the following characters: "\", "/",
":" and ".". Leading and trailing blank spaces are deleted by the system.
The Object Name attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Only Long
Axis Sections
LongStrokesOnly
Set whether the long axis sections alone or both sections should be displayed
in the scale representation.
Operation Steps
SmallChange
Set the number of steps the slider can be moved with a mouse click.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
The Only Long Axis Sections attribute can be made dynamic with the name
LongStrokesOnly.
The Operation Steps attribute can be made dynamic with the name
SmallChange.
4-59
Graphics Designer
Operator Activities
Report
OperationReport
08.97
This attribute determines whether the reason for operator activity needs to be
reported.
When you select the Yes option, a dialog box appears when there is operator
activity in an object. The user can input the reason for the activity as text in
the dialog box. The operator activity is then sent to the diagnostics system and
archived by it.
The Operator Activities Report attribute can be made dynamic with the
name OperationReport.
Operator-Control
Enable
Operation
Specify whether the object can be controlled.

In order for you to actually be able to control the object, you must also have
authorization ("Password" attribute) to control the object.
The Operator-Control Enable attribute can be made dynamic with the name
Operation.
Operator Input
Message
OperationMessage
Determine whether a message should be output when an operation is

successfully carried out.
The operator activity is then sent to the diagnostics system. That system
determines whether a message system is available which could issue a
message in a message line, for example.
The Operator Input Message attribute can be made dynamic with the name
OperationMessage.
Output Format
OutputFormat
Set the way in which the output value is represented. The representation is
dependent on the data format.
The Output Format attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Output Value
OutputValue
Set the defaults for the value to be displayed.

This value is used in RUNTIME mode when the corresponding tag is not
connected or not updated when the picture starts.
The Output Value attribute can be made dynamic with the name
OutputValue.
Password
PasswordLevel
Set the authorization level for controlling this object (no input = no triggering
of actions).
You can set an authorization level (password) for each controllable object.
The operator-control authorizations for each user are stored in a user-specific
system entry.
If 0 is entered as the value for the Password Attribute, there are no user
limits set.
The Password attribute can be made dynamic with the name PasswordLevel.
4-60
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Picture
PictureName
Graphics Designer
Set the picture (external format) to be displayed in the graphics object.

Depending on the "Picture Referenced" attribute, the entire object or the
object reference is saved.
The Picture attribute can be made dynamic with the name PictureName.
Picture Deact.
Referenced
PicDeactReferenced
Determine whether the picture assigned to the Deactivated state is stored in

the object or only the corresponding object reference is stored.
The Picture Deact. Referenced attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Picture Deact.
Transparent Color
set to "transparent."
PicDeactTransparent
The attribute is analyzed only if the "Picture Deact. Transparent Color On"
The Picture Deact. Transparent Color attribute can be made dynamic with
the name PicDeactTransparent.
Picture Deact.
PicDeactUseTransColor
The Picture Deact. Transparent Color On attribute can be made dynamic
with the name PicDeactUseTransColor.
Picture Height
Height
Set the picture height in pixels.

The default value is 600. The input can be larger than the maximum
resolution of the screen. You can shift the picture using the slider.
The Picture Height attribute can be made dynamic with the name Height.
Picture Name
PictureName
Set the name of the picture to be displayed.

The Picture Name attribute can be made dynamic with the name
PictureName.
Picture Off
Referenced
PicUpReferenced
Determine whether the picture assigned to the Off state is stored in the object
Picture Off
Transparent Color
PicUpTransparent
The Picture Off Referenced attribute cannot be made dynamic.
The attribute is analyzed only if the "Picture Off Transparent Color On"
The Picture Off Transparent Color attribute can be made dynamic with the
name PicUpTransparent.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-61
Graphics Designer
08.97
Picture Off
PicUpUseTransColor
The Picture Off Transparent Color On attribute can be made dynamic with
the name PicUpUseTransColor.
Picture Offset X
OffsetLeft
Picture Offset Y
OffsetTop
Picture On
Referenced
PicDownReferenced
Set the horizontal distance of the picture from the left edge of the window.
The Picture Offset X attribute can be made dynamic with the name
OffsetLeft.
Set the vertical distance of the picture from the top edge of the window.
The Picture Offset Y attribute can be made dynamic with the name
OffsetTop.
Determine whether the picture assigned to the On state is stored in the object
The Picture On Referenced attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Picture On
Transparent Color
PicDownTransparent
The attribute is analyzed only if the "Picture On Transparent Color On"
The Picture On Transparent Color attribute can be made dynamic with the
name PicDownTransparent.
Picture On
PicDownUseTransColor
The Picture On Transparent Color On attribute can be made dynamic with
the name PicDownUseTransColor.
Picture Referenced
PicReferenced
Determine whether the assigned picture is stored in the object or only the
corresponding object reference is stored.
The Picture Referenced attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Picture Status
Deactivated
PictureDeactivated
4-62
Set the image (bitmap) that is displayed on a button for the deactivated state.
The Picture Status Deactivated attribute can be made dynamic with the
name PictureDeactivated.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Picture Status
Off
PictureUp
Graphics Designer
Button:
Set the image (bitmap) that is displayed on a button for the off state (button
not depressed).
The Picture Status Off attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Round Button:
Set the image (bitmap) that is displayed for a round button for the off state
(button not depressed).
The Picture Status Off attribute can be made dynamic with the name
PictureUp.
Picture Status
On
PictureDown
Button:
Set the image (bitmap) that is displayed on a button for the on state (button
depressed).
The Picture Status On attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Round Button:
Set the image (bitmap) that is displayed for a round button for the on state
(button not depressed).
The Picture Status On attribute can be made dynamic with the name
PictureDown.
Picture
Transparent Color
PicTransColor
The attribute is analyzed only if the "Picture Transparent Color On" attribute
is activated.
The Picture Transparent Color attribute can be made dynamic with the
name PicTransColor.
Picture
PicUseTransColor
The Picture Transparent Color On attribute can be made dynamic with the
name PicUseTransColor.
Picture Width
Width
Set the picture width in pixels.

The default value is 800. The input can be larger than the maximum
resolution of the screen. You can shift the picture using the slider.
The Picture Width attribute can be made dynamic with the name Width.
Position X
Left
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Set (in pixels) the horizontal distance of the starting point of the object (left
upper corner of the rectangle surrounding the object) from the starting point
of the picture (left upper corner of the picture).
4-63
Graphics Designer
Position Y
Top
08.97
Set (in pixels) the vertical distance of the starting point of the object (left
upper corner of the rectangle surrounding the object) from the starting point
of the picture (left upper corner of the picture).
The Position Y attribute can be made dynamic with the name Top.
Process Driver
Connection
Process
Set the default for the value to be displayed.

This value is used in RUNTIME mode if the appropriate tag is not linked
or not updated when the picture starts.
The Process Driver Connection attribute can be made dynamic with the
name Process.
Radius
Radius
Set the radius in pixels (0 to 999) for circular objects.
Radius X
RadiusWidth
Set the horizontal radius in pixels (0 to 999) for elliptical objects.
Radius Y
RadiusHeight
Set the vertical radius in pixels (0 to 999) for elliptical objects.
Rotation Angle
RotationAngle
Set the clockwise rotation angle (in degrees) of the object around the rotation
point. The starting point (zero) is the configured start position.
The Radius attribute can be made dynamic with the name Radius.
The Radius X attribute can be made dynamic with the name RadiusWidth.
The Radius Y attribute can be made dynamic with the name RadiusHeight.
The Rotation Angle attribute can be made dynamic with the name
RotationAngle.
Rotation Reference X Set the reference point around which the line, polygon, and polyline object
ReferenceRotationLeft types are rotated. The input is relative to the width of the object, starting with
the left edge of the rectangle surrounding the object.
The Rotation Reference X attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ReferenceRotationLeft.
Rotation Reference Y Set the reference point around which the line, polygon, and polyline object
ReferenceRotationTop types are rotated. The input is relative to the object height, starting with the
top edge of the rectangle surrounding the object.
The Rotation Reference Y attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ReferenceRotationTop.
4-64
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Scale
Scaling
Graphics Designer
Set whether an additional scale should be used to represent the values within
the bar representation.
Use the "Bar Scaling" attribute to set the type of scale.
The Scale attribute can be made dynamic with the name Scaling.
Scale Color
ScaleColor
Set the color of the scale.

This attribute is only in effect when the scale is active.
The Scale Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name ScaleColor.
Scale Marks
ScaleTicks
Set the scale divisions within the bar.

The input is a percentage of the entire bar height.
The Scale Marks attribute can be made dynamic with the name ScaleTicks.
Scaling Factor
Zoom
Set the zoom factor for the window view.
Scroll Bars
ScrollBars
Determine whether scroll bars are available in the window when needed.
Select Background
Color
UnselBGColor
Set the color of the background for the unselected entries in the browser list
for "Text List" objects.
Select Text Color

UnselTextColor
The Scaling Factor attribute can be made dynamic with the name Zoom.
The Scroll Bars attribute cannot be made dynamic.
The Select Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name
UnselBGColor.
Set the color of the text for the unselected entries in the browser list for "Text
List" objects.
The Select Text Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name
UnselTextColor.
Selected Box
Process
This attribute informs the system which box the user selected with a single
selection (option group).
In a 32-bit value, each box is represented by a bit (box 1 corresponds to the bit
value of 0). The selected box is indicated by a set bit (1). Boxes which are not
available are indicated by 0.
If more than 1 bit is set, an error has occurred. The input is then
discarded in this case.
The Selected Box attribute can be made dynamic with the name Process.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-65
Graphics Designer
Selected Boxes
Process
08.97
This attribute informs the system which boxes the user selected with multiple
selection (check box).
In a 32-bit value, each box is represented by a bit (box 1 corresponds to the bit
value of 0). The selected box is indicated by a set bit (1). Boxes which are not
available are indicated by 0.
The Selected Boxes attribute can be made dynamic with the name Process.
Selection Background Set the color of the background in the selected entry of the browser list for
Color
"Text List" objects.
SelBGColor
The Selection Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the
name SelBGColor.
Selection Text Color

SelTextColor
Set the color of the text in the selected entry of the browser list for "Text List"
objects.
The Selection Text Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name
SelTextColor.
Separation Line
Set the background color of the separation lines in the browser list for "Text
Background Color
List" objects.
ItemBorderBackColor
The Separation Line Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with
the name ItemBorderBackColor.
Separation Line Color Set the color of the separation lines in the browser list for "Text List" objects.
ItemBorderColor
The Separation Line Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ItemBorderColor.
Separation Line Style Set the style of the separation lines in the browser list for "Text List" objects.
ItemBorderStyle
The Separation Line Style attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ItemBorderStyle.
Separation Line
Weight
ItemBorderWidth
Server Name
ServerName
Set the separation line weight in the browser list for "Text List" objects.
The Separation Line Weight attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ItemBorderWidth.
Displays the name under which the embedded object (OLE control or OLE
object) is registered in Windows.
The Server Name attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Sizeable
Sizeable
4-66
Determine whether the window size can be changed.

The Sizeable attribute cannot be made dynamic.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Start Angle
StartAngle
Graphics Designer
Set the beginning point for the segment and arc object types. The input is
clockwise in degrees, starting with 12 oclock.
The Start Angle attribute can be made dynamic with the name StartAngle.
Switch Setting
Pressed
Template
Template
Indicate the status of the round button ("pressed" or "not pressed").

The Switch Setting attribute can be made dynamic with the name Pressed.
Set the type of template according to the application (message system, process
data acquisition, etc.) in the window.
The Template attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Text
Text
Set the text to be displayed in the object. For check- and radio-boxes, the
object property "Index" determines, to which element the text change is
referring.
The text properties are set with other attributes.
If the text entered contains control characters, they are also displayed in
the "Object Properties" window (for example, \r\n equals CR/LF).
The Text attribute can be made dynamic with the name Text.
Text
Flash Frequency
FlashRateForeColor
Set the flash frequency for the text.

cycle, and more).
The Text Flash Frequency attribute can be made dynamic with the name
FlashRateForeColor.
Text Orientation
Orientation
Set the direction of the text (horizontal/vertical).

This only changes the alignment of the text within the object, not the entire
object.
The Text Orientation attribute can be made dynamic with the name
Orientation.
Title
Caption
In the case of window objects, determine whether the window has a title bar.
The "Can Be Maximized" and "Can Be Closed" attributes are analyzed
only when the "Title" attribute is active.
The Title attribute cannot be made dynamic.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-67
Graphics Designer
Tool Tip Text

ToolTipText
08.97
The attribute tool tip text determines the text that will be displayed in runtime
as a "Tool Tip", if the mouse pointer is positioned above the object.
The attribute Tool Tip Text can be made dynamic with the name
ToolTipText.
Trend
Trend
Set whether the trend should be displayed. The trend view shows the
directional trend of the measured value when there are small changes to that
value.
The trend is represented with a small arrow beneath the bar. Depending on
the tendency of the measured value, it points up or down.
The Trend attribute can be made dynamic with the name Trend.
Trend Color
TrendColor
Set the color for the trend display.

The trend is represented by a small arrow beneath the bar. Depending on the
tendency of the measured value, it points up or down.
The Trend Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name TrendColor.
Type AH
TypeAlarmHigh
Determine whether the limit value for "alarm high" should be provided as a
percentage or absolute. The default is absolute.
The Type AH attribute can be made dynamic with the name
TypeAlarmHigh.
Type AL
TypeAlarmLow
Determine whether the limit value for "alarm low" should be provided as a
The Type AL attribute can be made dynamic with the name
TypeAlarmLow.
Type RH4
TypeLimitHigh4
Determine whether the high limit value for "reserve 4" should be provided as
a percentage or absolute. The default is absolute.
The Type RH4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name
TypeLimitHigh4.
Type RH5
TypeLimitHigh5
Determine whether the high limit value for "reserve 5" should be provided as
The Type RH5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name
TypeLimitHigh5.
4-68
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Type RL4
TypeLimitLow4
Graphics Designer
Determine whether the low limit value for "reserve 4" should be provided as a
The Type RL4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name
TypeLimitLow4.
TypeRL5
TypeLimitLow5
Determine whether the low limit value for "reserve 5" should be provided as a
The Type RL5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name
TypeLimitLow5.
Type TH
TypeToleranceHigh
Determine whether the limit value for "tolerance high" should be provided as
The Type TH attribute can be made dynamic with the name
TypeToleranceHigh.
Type TL
TypeToleranceLow
Determine whether the limit value for "tolerance low" should be provided as a
The Type TL attribute can be made dynamic with the name
TypeToleranceLow.
Type WH
TypeWarningHigh
Determine whether the limit value for "warning high" should be provided as a
The Type WH attribute can be made dynamic with the name
TypeWarningHigh.
Type WL
TypeWarningLow
Determine whether the limit value for "warning low" should be provided as a
The Type WL attribute can be made dynamic with the name
TypeWarningLow.
Underline
FontUnderline
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Set the text attribute Underline for the text in the object.
The Underline attribute can be made dynamic with the name FontUnderline.
4-69
Graphics Designer
08.97
Update Cycle
UpdateCycle
Set the method and frequency for updating the object.
Width
Width
Set the width of the object in pixels.
Window Contents
Application
Determine the type of application (message system, process data acquisition,

etc.) in the window.
The Update Cycle attribute cannot be made dynamic.
The Width attribute can be made dynamic with the name Width.
The Window Contents attribute cannot be made dynamic.
Window Height
Height
Set the height of the window in pixels.
Window Width
Width
Set the width of the window in pixels.
Windows Style
WindowsStyle
Determine whether the object should correspond to the general Windows style
(gray buttons without borders).
The Window Height attribute can be made dynamic with the name Height.
The Window Width attribute can be made dynamic with the name Width.
When this attribute is active, attributes that do not correspond to the

Windows style are ignored (for example, "Border Weight"). On the other
hand, setting a border weight of a non-gray background color deactivates
the "Windows Style" attribute.
The Windows Style attribute can be made dynamic with the name
WindowsStyle.
X Alignment
AlignmentLeft
Y Alignment
AlignmentTop
Zero Point
ZeroPoint
Set the horizontal alignment (aligned left, centered, aligned right) of the text.
The X Alignment attribute can be made dynamic with the name
AlignmentLeft.
Set the vertical alignment of the text (top, center, bottom).

The Y Alignment attribute can be made dynamic with the name
AlignmentTop.
Set the zero point of the bar for bar objects.

The input is a percentage of the entire bar height. The zero point can also be
outside of the range represented.
This attribute is only analyzed when the "Bar Scaling" attribute is set to
"automatic."
The Zero Point attribute can be made dynamic with the name ZeroPoint.
4-70
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Zero Point Value

ZeroPointValue
Graphics Designer
Set the absolute value for the zero point.

For bar object types, set the location of the zero point with the "Zero Point"
attribute.
The Zero Point Value attribute can be made dynamic with the name
ZeroPointValue.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-71
Graphics Designer
08.97
4.3 Output formats for I/O-Fields

Data Format
Binary
You may select the predefined output format "Binary" from the selection list.
Example:
You can define your own output format in the "Enter Format" input field. The
following characters are allowed:
Character
"1"
Definition
Binary values "0" or "1"
Each "1" stands for a character in the output value.

A preceding "0" indicates that leading zeros are inserted where necessary (up
to a maximum number of "1").
4-72
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Data Format
Decimal
Graphics Designer
You may select the predefined output format "Decimal" from the selection
list.
Example:
Character
"s"
"e"
"9"
"0"
"."
Definition
Sign provided
Exponent representation
Number between 0 and 9
Leading zero accompanies output
Decimal point
Examples:
Value 1.0 is to be displayed

Output Format
Display
9.9
1.0
s9.9
+1.0
s9.9e
+1.0e+000
09.99
01.00
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-73
Graphics Designer
Data Format
String
08.97
You may select the predefined output format "String" from the selection list.
Example:
Character
*
?
a
A
b
B
d
t
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
h
4-74
Definition
Any string in any length
Any string with a length of "Number ?"
(for example, ???? any string with 4 characters)
Lower- or uppercase letters or number "0 ... 9"
Uppercase letters or number "0 ... 9"
Lower- or uppercase letters
Uppercase letters
Sign ("+" or "-"), decimal point, blank, or number "0 ... 9"
Separator "/", ":", ".", "," or blank
Number 0 ... 1
Number 0 ... 2
Number 0 ... 3
Number 0 ... 4
Number 0 ... 5
Number 0 ... 6
Number 0 ... 7
Number 0 ... 8
Number 0 ... 9
Hexacharacter 0 ...9, A ... F, or a ... f
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Data Format
Hexadecimal
Graphics Designer
You may select the predefined output format "Hexadecimal" from the
selection list.
Example:
Character
"f"
Definition
Hexadecimal value "0" to "f"
Each "f" stands for a character in the output value.

A preceding "0" indicates that leading zeros are inserted where necessary (up
to a maximum number of "f").
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-75
Graphics Designer
08.97
4.4 Assignments for Text Lists

List Type
Decimal
Use the "Assignments" attribute to assign the values for the text list .
Four range types ("To Value," "Single Value," "From-To Value," and "From
Value") are provided for the assignment in the "Decimal" list type . Depending
on the range type that is set, the value range (relative to the value to be
displayed) can be defined. Exactly one value can be assigned to a text for the
"Single Value" range type. The "From-To Value" range type allows you to
enter two values that define a value range (including the values you enter).
The "To Value" range type defines a value range that is open on the bottom
and reaches to include the value you entered. The "From Value" range is
analogous to this and defines a value range that is open on the top.
If there is no text assigned to the value to be displayed, the text "***" is
output in CONFIGURATION mode and in RUNTIME mode.
Use the "Append" button to add a new list entry to the end of the list. Use the
"Remove," "Up," and "Down" buttons to remove a list entry or shift it up or
down within the sequence of the list.
4-76
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
List Type
Binary
Graphics Designer
Use the "Assignments" attribute to assign the values for the text list .
One text can be assigned to each bit number (relative to the value to be
displayed) for the "Binary" list type. The bit number has a value range of 0 to
31.
If there is no text configured for the bit number and if the corresponding bit is
set as the only one in the output value, the text "***" is displayed in
CONFIGURATION mode and in RUNTIME mode.
Use the "Append" button to add a new list entry to the end of the list. Use the
"Remove," "Up," and "Down" buttons to remove a list entry or shift it up or
down within the sequence of the list.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-77
Graphics Designer
List Type
Bit
4-78
08.97
Use the "Assignments" attribute to assign the value for the text list .
Exactly two texts can be configured for assignment to the "Bit" list type. One
is for the case in which the bit that is observed has a value of 0, and one is for
the case in which the bit has a value of 1. Use the "Bit Number" attribute
(value range 0 to 31) to specify which bit of the value to be displayed is
observed.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
Index
3
3D Bar 2-7
3D Border Color 4-39
3D Border Weight 4-39
3D Shadow Color 4-39
A
Action 2-51; 3-1; 3-2; 3-14
Action configuration 3-1
ActualPointLeft 4-46
ActualPointTop 4-47
Adapt Border 4-39
Adapt Picture 4-39
Adapt Size 4-39
Addressing 3-33
Addressing method 3-33
AlarmHigh 4-54
AlarmLow 4-54
Alignment 4-40
Alignment palette 2-15
AlignmentLeft 4-70
AlignmentTop 4-70
Alpha Cursor 2-23
Application Window 2-4; 4-14
Apply on Exit 4-40
Apply on Full 4-40
Assignments 4-40
AssumeOnExit 4-40
AssumeOnFull 4-40
Attribute name 3-25
Attributes 2-41; 4-39
Average 4-40
Average Value 4-40
Axis Section 4-40
AxisSection 4-40
B
BackBorderWidth 4-39; 4-45
BackColor 4-40
BackColor2 4-41
BackColor3 4-41
BackColorBottom 4-56
BackColorTop 4-52
BackFlashColorOff 4-49
BackFlashColorOn 4-49
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Background Color 4-40

Background Flash Frequency 4-41
Bar 2-5; 4-20
Bar Background Color 4-41
Bar Color 4-41
Bar Color AH 4-41
Bar Color AL 4-41
Bar Color RH4 4-41
Bar Color RH5 4-41
Bar Color RL4 4-42
Bar Color RL5 4-42
Bar Color TH 4-42
Bar Color TL 4-42
Bar Color WH 4-42
Bar Color WL 4-42
Bar Direction 4-42
Bar Height 4-43
Bar Pattern 4-43
Bar Scaling 4-43
Bar Width 4-43
BasePicTransColor 4-43
BasePicUseTransColor 4-43
Basic Picture 4-43
Basic Picture Referenced 4-43
Basic Picture Transparent Color 4-43
Basic Picture Transparent Color On 4-43
BIT 3-8
Bit Number 4-44
Bit selection 3-9
BitNumber 4-44
Bold 4-44
Border 4-44
Border Background Color 4-44
Border Color 4-44
Border Flash Frequency 4-44
Border Style 4-44
Border Weight 4-45
BorderBackColor 4-44; 4-55
BorderColor 4-44; 4-56
BorderColorBottom 4-39
BorderColorTop 4-39
BorderEndStyle 4-56
BorderFlashColorOff 4-50
BorderFlashColorOn 4-50
BorderStyle 4-44; 4-56
BorderWidth 4-45; 4-56
Box Alignment 4-45
BoxAlignment 4-45
BoxCount 4-59
BoxType 4-48
Button 2-8; 4-27
Index-1
Graphics Designer
Button Color 4-45

ButtonColor 4-45
C
C Action 2-49; 2-52; 3-21
C Function 3-22; 3-30
Can Be Closed 4-45
Can Be Maximized 4-45
Change 3-1
Change Color 4-45
Changing the palette size 2-2
Check Box 2-8; 4-29
CheckAlarmHigh 4-57
CheckAlarmLow 4-57
CheckLimitHigh4 4-57
CheckLimitHigh5 4-58
CheckLimitLow4 4-58
CheckLimitLow5 4-58
CheckToleranceHigh 4-58
CheckToleranceLow 4-58
CheckWarningHigh 4-58
CheckWarningLow 4-59
Circle 2-4; 4-5
Circular Arc 2-4; 4-9
Clear on Invalid Input 4-46
Clear on New Input 4-46
ClearOnError 4-46
ClearOnNew 4-46
Color palette 2-2
ColorAlarmHigh 4-41
ColorAlarmLow 4-41
ColorBottom 4-57
ColorChangeType 4-45
ColorLimitHigh4 4-41
ColorLimitHigh5 4-41
ColorLimitLow4 4-42
ColorLimitLow5 4-42
ColorToleranceHigh 4-42
ColorToleranceLow 4-42
ColorTop 4-52
ColorWarningHigh 4-42
ColorWarningLow 4-42
Configured Languages 4-46
Context sensitive help 2-1
Corner Radius X 4-46
Corner Radius Y 4-46
Ctrl+C 3-22
Ctrl+End 3-22
Ctrl+Home 3-22
Ctrl+V 3-22
Ctrl+X 3-22
Index-2
08.97
Current Status 4-46

Current Value X 4-46
Current Value Y 4-47
Cursor Control 4-47
Cursor Mode 4-47
CursorControl 4-47
Cycle 3-11; 3-12; 3-14; 3-26; 3-27
Cycle time 3-8; 3-9; 3-12; 3-13; 3-27; 3-28;
3-34
D
Data Format 4-47
Data type 3-3; 3-7; 3-8; 3-9
Date of Last Change 4-47
Default addressing 3-33
Default cycle 3-4; 3-11; 3-21; 3-26
Default cycle time 3-4; 3-21
Default entry 3-11; 3-26
Default value 3-11; 3-26; 3-33
Digits to the Left of the Decimal Point 4-47
Digits to the Right of the Decimal Point 4-47
Direct connection 2-51; 2-52; 2-53
Direction 4-40; 4-42
Display 4-47
Drawing an Object 2-9
Dynamic 2-41; 2-49
Make dynamic 3-2; 3-3; 3-4; 3-21; 3-32
Dynamic dialog 2-49
Dynamic Filling 4-47
E
Edit functions 3-22; 3-23
Edit window 3-31
EditAtOnce 4-52
Ellipse 2-4
Ellipse Arc 2-4; 4-8
Ellipse Segment 2-4; 4-6
End Angle 4-48
EndAngle 4-48
Event 2-50; 2-51; 3-1; 3-2; 3-11; 3-26; 3-30;
3-35
Event category 3-35
Events 3-35
Exponent 4-48
Exponent Display 4-48
Export 2-20; 3-31; 3-32
Export file 3-31
Expression 3-5
Extended Operation 4-48
ExtendedOperation 4-48
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
F
Feedback Documentation 2-20
Field Type 4-48
Fill Level 4-48
Fill Pattern 4-48
Fill Pattern Color 4-48
FillColor 4-48
Filling 4-47
FillingIndex 4-48
FillStyle 4-48
FillStyle2 4-43
Flash Picture 4-48
Flash Picture Flash Frequency 4-49
Flash Picture Referenced 4-49
Flash Picture Transparent Color 4-49
Flash Picture Transparent Color On 4-49
FlashBackColor 4-49
FlashBorderColor 4-49; 4-50
FlashFlashPicture 4-50
FlashForeColor 4-50
Flashing Background Active 4-49
Flashing Background Color Off 4-49
Flashing Background Color On 4-49
Flashing Border Active 4-49
Flashing Border Color Off 4-50
Flashing Border Color On 4-50
Flashing Flash Picture Active 4-50
Flashing Line Active 4-50
Flashing Line Color Off 4-50
Flashing Line Color On 4-50
Flashing Text Active 4-50
Flashing Text Color Off 4-50
Flashing Text Color On 4-50
FlashPicTransColor 4-49
FlashPicUseTransColor 4-49
FlashRateBackColor 4-41
FlashRateBorderColor 4-44; 4-56
FlashRateFlashPic 4-49
FlashRateForeColor 4-67
Font 4-50
Font Color 4-51
Font palette 2-37
Font Size 4-51
FontBold 4-44
FontItalic 4-53
FontName 4-50
FontSize 4-51
FontUnderline 4-69
ForeColor 4-51
ForeFlashColorOff 4-50
ForeFlashColorOn 4-50
Foreground 4-51
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Graphics Designer
Formula 3-5
Function 3-5
Function name 3-5; 3-22
Function value 3-30
G
Graphic Object (External Format) 2-5; 4-23
Grid Color 4-51
Grid Height 4-51
Grid On 4-51
Grid Width 4-51
Group 2-22; 4-37
Group Display 2-7
Group object 2-22; 4-37
H
Height 4-43; 4-51; 4-61; 4-70
Hidden Input 4-51
HiddenInput 4-51
High limit 3-7
High Limit Background Color 4-52
High Limit Color 4-52
High Limit Value 4-52
Home 3-22
Hot Key 4-52
Hysteresis 4-52
Hysteresis Range 4-52
HysteresisRange 4-52
I
I/O Field 2-5; 4-18
Immediate Input 4-52
Import 2-30; 3-32
Import file 3-32
Increment 3-7
Index 4-46; 4-53
Indir 3-33
Indirect addressing 2-41; 2-50
Italic 4-53
ItemBorderBackColor 4-66
ItemBorderColor 4-66
ItemBorderStyle 4-66
ItemBorderWidth 4-66
K
Keystroke 3-1
Index-3
Graphics Designer
08.97
Label Each 4-53

Language Switch 4-53
Languages 2-30; 2-48
Latch Down 4-53
Layer 2-29; 4-53
Layer bar 2-38
LeftComma 4-47
Length of Axis Section 4-53
Library 2-26
Light bulb 3-3; 3-14; 3-21; 3-32; 3-33
Light bulb 3-3
Light bulb icon 3-29
Lightning bolt 3-14; 3-15; 3-21; 3-31; 3-35
Limit AH 4-54
Limit AL 4-54
Limit Marker 4-54
Limit RH4 4-54
Limit RH5 4-54
Limit RL4 4-54
Limit RL5 4-55
Limit TH 4-55
Limit TL 4-55
Limit WH 4-55
Limit WL 4-55
LimitHigh4 4-54
LimitHigh5 4-54
LimitLow4 4-54
LimitLow5 4-55
LimitMax 4-52
LimitMin 4-57
Line 2-4; 4-1
Line Background Color 4-55
Line Color 4-56
Line End Style 4-56
Line Flash Frequency 4-56
Line Style 4-56
Line Weight 4-56
List Type 4-56
List type "Binary" 4-77
List type "Bit" 4-78
List type "Decimal" 4-76
Long Axis Sections 4-56
LongStrokesBold 4-56
LongStrokesOnly 4-59
LongStrokesSize 4-53
Low Limit Background Color 4-56
Low Limit Color 4-57
Low Limit Value 4-57
Marker 4-54
Max 4-57
Maximum Value 4-57
Menu bar 2-17
Menu commands 2-17
Min 4-57
Minimum value 3-7; 4-57
Monitoring AH 4-57
Monitoring AL 4-57
Monitoring RH4 4-57
Monitoring RH5 4-58
Monitoring RL4 4-58
Monitoring RL5 4-58
Monitoring TH 4-58
Monitoring TL 4-58
Monitoring WH 4-58
Monitoring WL 4-59
Mouse event 3-35
Moveable 4-59
Multiple selection 2-42; 4-28
Index-4
N
Number of Boxes 4-59
Number of Corners 4-59
Number of Visible Lines 4-59
NumberLines 4-59
O
Object 3-2
Object attribute 3-4; 3-33
Object list 2-40
Object name 3-25; 4-59
Object palette 2-3
Object properties 2-10; 2-26; 2-39
OffsetLeft 4-62
OffsetTop 4-62
OLE automation name 4-39
OLE Control 2-5; 4-16
OLE links 2-32
OLE Object 2-5; 4-17
On-line help 2-1
Only Long Axis Sections 4-59
Operation 4-60
Operation Steps 4-59
OperationMessage 4-60
OperationReport 4-60
Operator 3-6
Operator Activities Report 4-60
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Operator Input Message 4-60

Operator-Control Enable 4-60
Operators 3-6
Option Group 2-8; 4-31
Orientation 4-67
Output Format 4-60
Output format "Binary" 4-72
Output format "Decimal" 4-73
Output format "Hexadecimal" 4-75
Output format "String" 4-74
Output Value 4-60
OutputValue 4-60
P
Palette 2-27
Parameter
Set parameters 3-23; 3-24
Parameter assignment 3-5; 3-23; 3-24
Parameter parentheses 3-22
Parameters 3-5; 3-22; 3-23; 3-24; 3-25
Password 4-60
PasswordLevel 4-60
PicDeactTransparent 4-61
PicDeactUseTransColor 4-61
PicDownTransparent 4-62
PicDownUseTransColor 4-62
PicTransColor 4-63
Picture 4-38; 4-61
Picture Browser 3-25
Picture cycle 3-11; 3-26; 3-34
Picture Deact. Referenced 4-61
Picture Deact. Transparent Color 4-61
Picture Deact. Transparent Color On 4-61
Picture Height 4-61
Picture name 3-25; 4-61
Picture Off Referenced 4-61
Picture Off Transparent Color 4-61
Picture Off Transparent Color On 4-62
Picture Offset X 4-62
Picture Offset Y 4-62
Picture On Referenced 4-62
Picture On Transparent Color 4-62
Picture On Transparent Color On 4-62
Picture Referenced 4-62
Picture Status Deactivated 4-62
Picture Status Off 4-63
Picture Status On 4-63
Picture Transparent Color 4-63
Picture Transparent Color On 4-63
Picture Width 4-63
Picture Window 2-5; 4-15
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Graphics Designer
PictureDeactivated 4-62
PictureDown 4-63
PictureName 4-61
PictureUp 4-63
PicUpTransparent 4-61
PicUpUseTransColor 4-62
PicUseTransColor 4-63
Pie Segment 2-4; 4-7
Polygon 2-4; 4-2
Polyline 2-4; 4-3
Position Y 4-64
Presetting 3-11; 3-26
Pressed 4-67
Print Preview 2-19
Priority 3-10
Process 4-64; 4-65; 4-66
Process Driver Connection 4-64
Process tag 3-30
Properties 3-25
Property 3-1; 3-2
R
Radius 4-64
Radius X 4-64
Radius Y 4-64
RadiusHeight 4-64
RadiusWidth 4-64
Range 3-23
Range high limit 3-15
Rectangle 2-4; 4-10
ReferenceRotationLeft 4-64
ReferenceRotationTop 4-64
Result of expression 3-3
Result tags 3-30
Return value 3-1; 3-2; 3-21; 3-29
RightComma 4-47
Rotation Angle 4-64
Rotation Reference X 4-64
Rotation Reference Y 4-64
RotationAngle 4-64
Round Button 2-8; 4-33
RoundCornerHeight 4-46
RoundCornerWidth 4-46
Rounded Rectangle 2-4; 4-11
Runtim mode 2-53
Run-Time Behavior 2-51
Runtime Mode 2-7; 2-18; 2-23
Index-5
Graphics Designer
S
Scale 4-65
Scale Color 4-65
Scale Marks 4-65
ScaleColor 4-65
ScaleTicks 4-65
Scaling 4-65
Scaling Factor 4-65
ScalingType 4-43
Scroll Bars 4-65
SelBGColor 4-66
Select Background Color 4-65
Select Text Color 4-65
Selected Box 4-65
Selected Boxes 4-66
Selecting an Object 2-10
Selection Background Color 4-66
Selection Text Color 4-66
SelTextColor 4-66
Separation Line Background Color 4-66
Separation Line Color 4-66
Separation Line Style 4-66
Separation Line Weight 4-66
Server Name 4-66
Sizeable 4-66
Slider 2-8; 4-35
SmallChange 4-59
Smart Objects 2-4
Split bar 3-23; 3-31
Standard Objects 2-4
Standard toolbar 2-35
Start Angle 4-67
StartAngle 4-67
Static 2-41; 2-42
Static Text 2-4; 4-12
Status 3-3; 3-4; 3-10
Status bar 2-38; 3-30
Status Display 2-6; 4-24
Status evaluation 3-10
Status list 3-10
Style palette 2-12
Subject tree 2-40; 2-50
Switch Setting 4-67
System load 3-1
T
Tab "Default Objects" 2-33
Tab "Event" 2-50
Tab "Grid" 2-32
Tab "Options" 2-32
Tab "Properties" 2-40
Index-6
08.97
Tab "Visible Layers" 2-32

Tab Order 2-23
Tag 3-24
Tag dialog 2-49
Tag list 3-11; 3-13; 3-14; 3-26; 3-28; 3-29
Tag name 3-4; 3-13; 3-23; 3-25; 3-28; 3-32;
3-33
Tag status 3-10
Tag value 3-32
Template 4-67
Text 4-67
Text Flash Frequency 4-67
Text List 2-6; 4-25; 4-76; 4-77; 4-78
Language Switch 2-6
Text Orientation 4-67
Tips & Tricks 2-1
Title 4-67
Toggle 4-53
ToleranceHigh 4-55
ToleranceLow 4-55
Tool Tip Text 4-68
Toolbar 2-27
ToolTipText 4-68
Top 4-64
Trend 4-68
Trend Color 4-68
TrendColor 4-68
Trigger 3-4; 3-11; 3-12; 3-26; 3-27
Trigger event 3-11; 3-14; 3-26
Trigger name 3-11; 3-26
Trigger tag 3-8; 3-9
Triggering events 2-51
Type AH 4-68
Type AL 4-68
Type RH4 4-68
Type RH5 4-68
Type RL4 4-69
Type RL5 4-69
Type TH 4-69
Type TL 4-69
Type WH 4-69
Type WL 4-69
TypeAlarmHigh 4-68
TypeAlarmLow 4-68
TypeLimitHigh4 4-68
TypeLimitHigh5 4-68
TypeLimitLow4 4-69
TypeLimitLow5 4-69
TypeToleranceHigh 4-69
TypeToleranceLow 4-69
TypeWarningHigh 4-69
TypeWarningLow 4-69
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Graphics Designer
U
Underline 4-69
UnselBGColor 4-65
UnselTextColor 4-65
Update cycle 2-41; 2-50; 3-33; 3-34; 4-70
Update event 3-4; 3-11; 3-26
User cycle 3-12; 3-27; 3-34
V
Valid range 3-8; 3-9
Value assignment 3-10
Value change 3-1; 3-12; 3-13; 3-27; 3-28
Value range 3-3; 3-5; 3-7; 3-10
Visible 4-47
W
WarningHigh 4-55
WarningLow 4-55
Width 4-43; 4-63; 4-70
Window Contents 4-70
Window cycle 3-11; 3-26
Window Height 4-70
Window Width 4-70
Windows Objects 2-8
Windows Style 4-70
WindowsStyle 4-70
X
X Alignment 4-70
Y
Y Alignment 4-70
Z
Zero Point 4-70
Zero Point Value 4-71
ZeroPoint 4-70
ZeroPointValue 4-71
Zoom 4-65
Zoom palette 2-17
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Index-7
Graphics Designer
Index-8
08.97
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
WinCC
Global Scripts
Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Edition August 1997
WinCC, SIMATIC, SINEC, STEP are Siemens registered trademarks.

All other product and system names in this manual are (registered) trademarks of their respective owners
and must be treated accordingly.
(The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or ist

contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or
design, are reserved.)
(We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement

with the hardware and software described. Since deviations
cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full
agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed
regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent
editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.)
Siemens AG 1994-1997 All rights reserved
Technical data subject to change
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Table of Contents
1
Introduction ...............................................................................
1-1
Project Functions ......................................................................
2-1
Standard Functions...................................................................
3-1
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Alarm (Standard Functions)............................................................

GRAPHICS (Standard Functions)...................................................
TAGLOG (Standard Functions) ......................................................
TEMPLATE....................................................................................
TOOLBAR BUTTONS....................................................................
WINCC (Standard Functions).........................................................
WINDOWS (Standard Functions) ...................................................
Options (Standard Functions).........................................................
Report (Standard Functions) ..........................................................
Split Screen Manager (Standard Functions) ...................................
3-3
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-13
3-20
3-22
3-22
3-24
3-25
Internal Functions .....................................................................
4-1
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
4.4.6
4.4.7
4.4.8
4.4.9
4.4.10
4.4.11
4.4.12
4.4.13
4.4.14
4.4.15
4.4.16
4.4.17
4.4.18
4.4.19
4.4.20
4.4.21
4.4.22
4.4.23
4.4.24
alarm (Internal Functions)...............................................................

allocate ..........................................................................................
c_bib ..............................................................................................
graphics .........................................................................................
graphics-get-axes Functions...........................................................
graphics-get-color Functions ..........................................................
graphics-get-fill Functions...............................................................
graphics-get-flash Functions...........................................................
graphics-get-focus-Functions .........................................................
graphics-get-font Functions............................................................
graphics-get-general Functions ......................................................
graphics-get-geometry Functions ...................................................
graphics-get-i_o Functions .............................................................
graphics-get-limits Functions..........................................................
graphics-get-link Functions.............................................................
graphics-get-misc Functions...........................................................
graphics-get-ole_control Functions.................................................
graphics-get-pictures Functions......................................................
graphics-get-property-Funktionen...................................................
graphics-get-state Functions ..........................................................
graphics-get-style Functions...........................................................
graphics-set-axes Functions...........................................................
graphics-set-color Functions...........................................................
graphics-set-fill Functions...............................................................
graphics-set-flash Functions...........................................................
graphics-set-focus-Functions..........................................................
graphics-set-font Functions ............................................................
graphics-set-geometry Functions....................................................
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-7
4-10
4-14
4-15
4-17
4-17
4-19
4-19
4-23
4-26
4-34
4-35
4-42
4-43
4-46
4-47
4-49
4-51
4-55
4-61
4-62
4-65
4-65
4-68
Global Scripts
4.4.25
4.4.26
4.4.27
4.4.28
4.4.29
4.4.30
4.4.31
4.4.32
4.4.33
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
4.5.7
4.5.8
4.6
4.6.1
08.97
graphics-set-i_o Functions..............................................................
graphics-set-limits Functions ..........................................................
graphics-set-link Functions.............................................................
graphics-set-misc Functions...........................................................
graphics-set-ole_control Functions.................................................
graphics-set-pictures Functions......................................................
graphics-set-property-Funktionen...................................................
graphics-set-state Functions...........................................................
graphics-set-style Functions...........................................................
Tag ................................................................................................
tag-get-Functions ...........................................................................
tag-get-state Functions...................................................................
tag-get-wait Functions....................................................................
tag-get-state-wait Functions ...........................................................
Tag-set Functions ..........................................................................
tag-set-state Functions...................................................................
tag-set-wait Functions ....................................................................
tag-set-state-wait Functions ...........................................................
wincc..............................................................................................
wincc system..................................................................................
4-73
4-76
4-88
4-89
4-96
4-97
4-101
4-103
4-106
4-110
4-111
4-114
4-117
4-121
4-125
4-128
4-132
4-136
4-140
4-140
Actions .......................................................................................
5-1
Value Definitions of the Attributes ..........................................
6-1
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
ii
Language Identifiers.......................................................................
Colors ............................................................................................
Line End Styles ..............................................................................
Line Styles .....................................................................................
Flash Frequencies..........................................................................
Text Orientation .............................................................................
Bar Orientation...............................................................................
I/O-Field, Field Type.......................................................................
I/O-Field, Data Type of the Field Content .......................................
Element Orientation in Check- and Radio Boxes ............................
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
Preface
Purpose of the
Manual
This manual introduces you to the functions of each software component and
their operation in a reference manual format. You can find the information
you need quickly by using the table of contents or the index. Naturally, the
information is also available to you in the on-line help in either a
context-sensitive fashion or in the on-line help contents.
Total Overview and

Configuration
Example
The "Getting Started" manual, which is part of the WinCC package, contains
a total overview of WinCC and a configuration example in which the most
significant functions of the individual components are followed through in a
practical application.
Additional Support
If you have technical questions, please address them to your Siemens contact
partner, located in the businesses responsible for your location. You can find
the addresses in the attachment entitled Siemens Worldwide, in "S7-300
Automation System Structure in an S7-300," in catalogs, and on CompuServe
(go.autforum). In addition, you may call our Hotline at 011-49-911-895-7000
(Fax 7001).
You can find additional information on the Internet under the address
www.aut.siemens.de/coros/html_00/coros.htm.
Information about
SIMATIC products
Up to date information about SIMATIC products can be obtained:

*
from the Internet under http://www.aut.siemens.de/
*
via fax# 08765-93 02 77 95 00
In addition, the SIMATIC Customer Support provides current information
and downloads that can be beneficial for the utilization of SIMATIC products:
*
from the Internet under
http://www.aut.siemens.de/support/html_00/index.shtml
*
via the SIMATIC Customer Support Mailbox under phone#
+49 (911) 895-7100
*
To address the mailbox, use a modem with up to V.34 (28.8
kBaud), which parameters must be set as follows: 8, N, 1, ANSI, or dial up
through ISDN (x.75, 64 kBit).
The SIMATIC Customer Support can be reached by phone under the number
+49 (911) 895-7000 and by fax under the number +49 (911) 895-7002.
Inquiries can also be made via Internet mail or mail addressed to the above
mailbox.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
iii
Global Scripts
iv
08.97
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
1 Introduction
Global Scripts is the general term for C functions and actions that can be used
throughout a project or across projects depending on their type.
You can differentiate among the following types:
Project Functions
You can create new project functions and change existing project
functions. The project functions are unique to the project in which they
were created.
Standard Functions
You can create new standard functions and change existing standard
functions. The standard functions are recognized across projects.
Internal Functions
You cannot create or change internal functions. They are recognized
across projects.
Actions
You can create and change actions as global scripts. These actions are
unique to the project in which they were created.
Use project functions, standard functions, and internal functions in the
following areas:
In object-related C actions
In object-related actions that you create in the dynamic dialog
Use them to make the following areas dynamic:

Process value archives
User archives
Compressed archives
At run time, you can implement global script actions in the process control .
Before you do this, you must activate the project and start the run-time
system.
For activating the project, see Control Center, Section 2.1.4.
To start the run -time system, see Control Center, Section 6.3.
Note: Actions are processed interpretively. When implementing numerous or
extensive actions, you should plan for a higher system load. It is therefore
better to replace extensive actions with separate DLLs (Dynamic Link
Libraries).
Functionalities of available DLLs can be made available to functions and
actions in WinCC. Use the following command sequence for this purpose:
#pragma code("<NAME>.dll")
#include "<NAME>.h"
#pragma code()
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
1-1
Global Scripts
08.97
Note: If you define your own structures in connection with project or standard
functions, the following construction will cause translation errors:
struct MyOwnStruct;
{
....
}
void MyFunction (struct MyOwnStruct...);
{
...
}
The prototype of this function will be transferred to the file ap_pbib.h or

ap_glob.h, but the structure is missing from there.
To realize the transfer of such a structure or call back function, proceed as
follows:
In the project catalog (projectpath\library), insert apdefap.h before the
#include "ap-pbib.h" structure
struct MyOwnStruct;
{
....
}
#include "ap-pbib.h"
Correspondingly also:
#pragma code ("pdlcsapi.dll")
#include "pldcsapi.h"
#prgma code()
#include "ap_pbib.h"
The structure of MyOwnStruct and the structure of the call back function will
therefore be known to the object, while the prototype of the project function is
transferred.
In the project function itself, write only the following
#include "apdefap.h"
1-2
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
2 Project Functions
Project functions are C functions that you program and change yourself. They
are unique to the current project in which they were created. You can use
project functions to make graphic objects and archives dynamic. You can also
use them in other project functions and Global Script actions. Create a project
function by means of the Global Script editor. Start the editor in the Control
Center.
Use the following steps in creating a project function:
1. Formulate the function
2. Add function information
3. Compile the function
4. Save the function and, if necessary, rename it.
5. If necessary, generate header files.
You have now created your project function.
The first time you create a project function, the header file apdefap.h is loaded
in the project folder ...\<Projectname>\LIBRARY. The file contains the
header file from the project library ap_plib.h which contains the header file
ap_glob.h.
The header file ap_plib.h contains the definitions of the project functions. If a
project function is loaded and other default or project functions are used there,
you must integrate the header file apdefap.h or ap_glob.h.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-1
Global Scripts
08.97
How to Formulate a Function:

1. Start the Global Script editor in the Control Center. The "Global Script"
box opens.
2. Open the pop-up menu by clicking the right mouse button on the function
type (project function, standard function, or action) in the function
browser. Open the submenu by placing the cursor or clicking on "New"
and select the "Function" submenu item.
or
Use one of the
buttons on the Toolbar.
This selection opens a window that already contains the outline of a C

function.
3. Formulate your function.
The following edit functions are available:

Function
New line
Delete character to the right
Delete character to the left
Jump to the beginning of the line
Jump to the end of the line
Jump to the beginning of the text
Jump to the end of the text
Move the cursor
Cut selected text
Copy selected text
Paste text from the Clipboard
2-2
Key Stroke
Enter
Delete
Backspace
Home
End
Ctrl+Home
Ctrl+End
Cursor keys
Ctrl+X
Ctrl+C
Ctrl+V
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
Function
Highlight text
Highlight a word
Mouse
With the left mouse button
Double click with the left
mouse button
With the left mouse button
Additional edit functions include the following:

The writing mode is "Insert."
Highlighted text is replaced by the next character you enter on the
keyboard.
Expanded highlighting:
Highlight an area:
Place the cursor at the beginning of the area you want to highlight. Hold
down the Shift key and place the cursor at the end of the area you want to
highlight.
Expand a highlighted selection:
Hold down the Shift key and move the cursor to the end of the area you
want to highlight.
You can place fully programmed project functions, standard functions, and
internal functions within your function at the cursor location or you can
replace selected text with such functions. Proceed as follows:
1. Position the cursor or highlight the text you want to replace.
2. In the function browser, open the appropriate folder and click the right
mouse button on the desired function to open the pop-up menu.
3. Select the "Send to..." menu item in the pop -up menu.
4. Select the appropriate editing window from the submenu listing. If you
have multiple editing windows open, the submenu contains an entry for
each one.
5. If necessary, update the parameters of the function you pasted.
Enter tag names by clicking on the
button. This action opens the "Select
a Tag" dialog in which you can select the desired tag. If you need to, open
folders.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-3
Global Scripts
08.97
How to Add Information about a Function:

If you have more than one editing window open, make the window that
contains the desired function the active window.
1. Click on the
button to open the "Description" box.
Date created, date changed, and version are already entered. The date
created and date changed formats are (left to right) "Day," "Month,"
"Year."
2. Enter or change the "Created by" and "Changed by" boxes.
3. Enter a comment, for example, a brief description of the function, in the
"Comment" box.
4. If you want to assign a password to your function to protect it from
changes, click on the "Password" button to activate the "Change" button.
Click on the "Change" button and enter your password in the "Enter
Password" box.
Retype your password to confirm it.
Click on the "OK" button to close the box. You have now protected your
function with a password.
5. Click the "OK" button to close the "Description" box. The entries are
applied.
2-4
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
How to Compile the Function/Action:

If you have more than one editing window open, make the window that
contains the desired function/action the active window.
Click on the
button to begin compiling.
The active editing window is divided into two areas. The top portion contains
your function/action and the bottom displays the messages from the compiler.
How to Save the Function:

If you create a new function or a new action, it receives a default name from
the system.
If you want to save your function or action under its current name, proceed as
follows:
1. Click on the
button. The editing window stays open.
2. Select the "Save" command in the "File" menu. The editing window stays
open.
3. Click on the "Close" box in the editing window. This action opens a box
that tells you that there are changes that have not been saved. You can
then choose to save the function/action, reject the changes, or cancel the
procedure. If you cancel the procedure, the editing window stays open,
otherwise it closes.
If you want to save your function/action under another name select "Save
As" in the "File" menu. This selection opens a box in which you can set the
name and the storage location.
Generally, the storage area is set as follows:
For project functions:
In the "Library" subfolder in the project folder
For actions:
In the "Pas" subfolder in the project folder
For standard functions:
In the WinCC system folder in the "Aplib" subfolder.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
2-5
Global Scripts
08.97
How to Generate the New Header Files:

If functions are programmed autonomously, you can make them available to
the project by copying them to the appropriate folders.
This makes the functions available but unknown to the system.
Use the
button or select the "Generate header" menu item to regenerate
the header files. The system can then recognize these new or changed
functions.
In the same way, deleted functions are made unrecognizable to the system.
When the new header files are generated, the new functions appear in the
function browser of the Global Script Editor.
2-6
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
3 Standard Functions
The system makes standard functions available. These functions can be
changed to adapt to your needs. In addition, you can also create standard
functions yourself.
Standard functions are recognized across projects.
Use standard functions to make graphic objects and archives dynamic. You
can also use them in project functions, other standard functions, and Global
Script actions.
Create a standard function with the Global Script editor. Start this editor in
the Control Center.
You must follow these steps to create a standard function:
Formulate the function. (see Section 2).
Expand the function information. (see Section 2).
Compile the function. (see Section 2).
Save the function. and rename it if necessary (see Section 2).
If necessary, generate header files (see Section 2).
You have now created your standard function.

The header file apdefap.h integrates the header file ap_glob .h that contains
the definition of the standard functions.
The files apdefap.h and ap_glob.h are located in the folder ...\APLIB.
If a new standard function is created and if other standard functions are used
there, you must integrate the header file apdefap .h or ap_glob.h.
New standard functions are added to the available standard functions on the
server computer in the WinCC installation folder under ...\APLIB.
The system provides standard functions. They are divided into the following
categories:
Alarm
GRAPHICS
TAGLOG
WINCC
WINDOWS
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-1
Global Scripts
08.97
Depending on the option package (for example, Basic Process Control,

Advanced Process Control), the system provides you with additional standard
functions.
These functions are divided into the following categories:
Options
Report
Split Screen Manager
userarc
The standard functions contained in "userarc", are explained in more detail
in the Simatic-WinCC-Manual "Tag Logging User Archives".
3-2
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
3.1 Alarm (Standard Functions)

The return value for these functions is the following error code:
TRUE:
= The function was executed without errors.
FALSE: = An error occured
BOOL GMsgFunction(char* pszMsgData)

Function:
This function represents a global function for single messages. It provides the
message data of the single messages and can only be activated if the "trigger
action" parameter is set.
Parameters:
pszMsgData = Pointer to a buffer on which the message data are stored.
BOOL OnBtnArcLong(char* pszMsgWin)

BOOL AXC_OnBtnArcLong(char* pszMsgWin)
Function:
Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic
objects. This function displays the sequence archive (display sequence
archive).
Parameters:
pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnArcLong)
pszMsgWin = Pointer on the name of the OLE-Control-Element
(AXC_OnBtnArcLong)
BOOL OnBtnArcShort(char* pszMsgWin)

BOOL AXC_OnBtnArcShort(char* pszMsgWin)
Function:
objects. This function displays the short-term archive (display short-term
archive).
Parameters:
pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnArcShort)
(AXC_OnBtnArcShort)
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-3
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL OnBtnComment(char* pszMsgWin)

Function:
objects. This function displays the comment (comment).
Parameters:
pszMsgWin
= Pointer to the message window name
BOOL OnBtnEmergAckn(char* pszMsgWin)

Function:
objects. This function opens the acknowledgment dialog (Emergency
acknowledgment/reset).
Parameters:
pszMsgWin
BOOL OnBtnHornAckn(char* pszMsgWin)

BOOL AXC_OnBtnHornAckn(char* pszMsgWin)
Function:
objects. This function acknowledges the horn signal (horn acknowledgment).
Parameters
pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnHornAckn)
(AXC_OnBtnHornAckn)
BOOL OnBtnInfo(char* pszMsgWin)

Function:
objects. This function displays the info text (Infotext).
Parameters:
pszMsgWin
3-4
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL OnBtnLanguage(char* pszMsgWin)

Function:
objects. This function allows you to change the language of the message
window operation (Language switch).
Parameters:
pszMsgWin
This function will not be supported anymore starting with WinCC V4.0.
BOOL OnBtnLock(char* pszMsgWin)

Function:
objects. This function activates the "Set Lock" dialog.
Parameters:
pszMsgWin
BOOL OnBtnLoop(char* pszMsgWin)

BOOL AXC_OnBtnLoop(char* pszMsgWin)
Function:
objects. This function triggers the "Loop-In-Alarm" function of the selected
message.
Parameters:
pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnLoop)
(AXC_OnBtnLoop)
BOOL OnBtnMsgFirst(char* pszMsgWin)

BOOL AXC_OnBtnMsgFirst(char* pszMsgWin)
Function:
objects. This function switches to the beginning of the message list (First list).
Parameters:
pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnMsgFirst)
(AXC_OnBtnMsgFirst)
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-5
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL OnBtnMsgLast(char* pszMsgWin)

BOOL AXC_OnBtnMsgLast(char* pszMsgWin)
Function:
objects. This function switches to the end of the message list (Last list).
Parameters:
pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnMsgLast)
(AXC_OnBtnMsgLast)
BOOL OnBtnMsgNext(char* pszMsgWin)

BOOL AXC_OnBtnMsgNext(char* pszMsgWin)
Function:
objects. This function switches to the next message in the message list (Next
message).
Parameters:
pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnMsgNext)
(AXC_OnBtnMsgNext)
BOOL OnBtnMsgPrev(char* pszMsgWin)

BOOL AXC_OnBtnMsgPrev(char* pszMsgWin)
Function:
objects. This function switches to the previous message in the message list
(Previous message).
Parameters:
pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnMsgPrev)
(AXC_OnBtnMsgPrev)
3-6
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL OnBtnMsgWin(char* pszMsgWin)

BOOL AXC_OnBtnMsgWin(char* pszMsgWin)
Function:
objects. This function calls the process message window (Call process
message window).
Note:
The process message window contains the current messages that have not
been acknowledged.
Parameters:
pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnMsgWin)
(AXC_OnBtnMsgWin)
BOOL OnBtnPrint(char* pszMsgWin)

BOOL AXC_OnBtnPrint(char* pszMsgWin)
Function:
objects. This function activates reporting (Report function).
Parameters:
pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnPrint )
(AXC_OnBtnPrint)
BOOL OnBtnScroll(char* pszMsgWin)

BOOL AXC_OnBtnScroll(char* pszMsgWin)
Function:
objects. This function activates the horizontal and vertical scroll function
(Auto scroll On/Off).
Parameters:
pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnScroll)
(AXC_OnBtnScroll)
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-7
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL OnBtnSelect(char* pszMsgWin)

Function:
objects. This function activates the "Set Selection" dialog.
Parameters:
pszMsgWin
BOOL OnBtnSinglAckn(char* pszMsgWin)

BOOL AXC_OnBtnSinglAckn(char* pszMsgWin)
Function:
objects. This function executes the acknowledgment of a message (single
acknowledgment).
Parameters:
pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnSinglAckn)
(AXC_OnBtnSinglAckn)
BOOL OnBtnVisibleAckn(char* pszMsgWin)

BOOL AXC_OnBtnVisibleAckn(char* pszMsgWin)
Function:
objects. This function executes the acknowledgment of all of the messages
visible in the message window (group acknowledgment).
Parameters:
pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnVisibleAckn)
(AXC_OnBtnVisibleAckn)
3-8
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
3.2 GRAPHICS (Standard Functions)

void OpenPicture(Picture Picture Name)
Function:
Opens the picture with the picture name you set.
Parameters:
Picture Name = Picture Name
3.3 TAGLOG (Standard Functions)

TEMPLATE
TOOLBAR BUTTONS
The return value for the TOOLBAR BUTTONS functions is the following
error code:
TRUE:
The function was executed without errors.
FALSE: An error occured
3.3.1 TEMPLATE
int TlgGetColumnPosition(char* lpszTemplate)
Return Value:
Current position of the column pointer in a table window.
Function:
Gives the current position of the column pointer in a table window. The name
of the table window is transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate.
Parameters:
lpszTemplate
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Pointer on the name of the table window
3-9
Global Scripts
08.97
int TlgGetNumberOfColumns(char* lpszTemplate)

Return Value:
Number of columns in a table window.
Function:
Gives the number of columns in a table window. The name of the table
window is transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate.
Parameters:
lpszTemplate
int TlgGetNumberOfRows(char* lpszTemplate)

Return Value:
Number of rows in a table window.
Function:
Gives the number of rows in a table window. The name of the table window is
transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate.
Parameters:
lpszTemplate
int TlgGetNumberOfTrends(char* lpszTemplate)

Return Value:
Number of visible trends in a trend window.
Function:
Gives the number of trends in a trend window. The name of the trend window
is transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate.
Parameters:
lpszTemplate
3-10
= Pointer on the name of the trend window
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
int TlgGetRowPosition(char* lpszTemplate)

Return Value:
Current position of the row pointer in a table window.
Function:
Gives the current position of the row pointer in a table window. The name of
the table window is transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate.
Parameters:
lpszTemplate
char* TlgGetRulerArchivNameTrend(char* lpszTemplate, int nTrend)

Return Value:
Archive name of a trend in a trend window at the position of the ruler.
Function:
Gives the archive name of a trend with the number n trend in a trend
window at the position of the ruler. The name of the trend window is
transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate.
Parameters:
lpszTemplate
nTrend

= Number of the trend
(0 <= nTrend <= Number of visible trends - 1)
SYSTEMTIME TlgGetRulerTimeTrend(char* lpszTemplate, int nTrend)

Return Value:
Time of a trend in a trend window at the position of the ruler.
Function:
Gives the time of a trend with the number n trend in a trend window at the
position of the ruler. The name of the trend window is transferred with the
parameter lpszTemplate.
Parameters:
lpszTemplate
nTrend
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01

3-11
Global Scripts
08.97
double TlgGetRulerValueTrend(char* lpszTemplate, int nTrend)

Return Value:
Value of a trend in a trend window at the position of the ruler.
Function:
Gives the value of a trend with the number n trend in a trend window at the
position of the ruler. The name of the trend window is transferred with the
Parameters:
lpszTemplate
nTrend

char* TlgGetRulerVariableNameTrend(char* lpszTemplate, int nTrend)

Return Value:
Tag name of a trend in a trend window at the position of the ruler.
Function:
Gives the tag name of a trend with the number n trend in a trend window at
the position of the ruler. The name of the trend window is transferred with the
Parameters:
lpszTemplate
nTrend

char* TlgGetTextAtPos(char* lpszTemplate, int nColumn, int nLine)

Return Value:
Content of a cell of a table window as text.
Function:
For process value archives and user archives.
gives the content of a cell of a table window as text. The cell is specified by
nColumn and nLine. The name of the table window is transferred with the
Parameters:
lpszTemplate
nColumn
nLine
3-12

= Number of the column
= Number of the line
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
3.3.2 TOOLBAR BUTTONS

BOOL TlgTableWindowPressEditRecordButton(char* lpszTemplateName)
Function:
The editing of the table window is permitted/not permitted (toggle-Function)
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
= Pointer on the name of the application window
BOOL TlgTableWindowPressFirstButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
Displays the first data records of the display area in the table window. The
number of records displayed depends on the configured time range
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
BOOL TlgTableWindowPressHelpButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
Displays the online help in the table window
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
BOOL TlgTableWindowPressInsertRecordButton(char*
lpszTemplateName)
Function:
Inserts a data record
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
BOOL TlgTableWindowPressLastButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
Displays the last data records of the display area in the table window. The
Parameters:
lpszTemplateName
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01

3-13
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL TlgTableWindowPressNextButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
Displays the data records following the current display area in the table
window. The number of records displayed depends on the configured time
range
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
BOOL TlgTableWindowPressNextItemButton(char* lpszWindowName)

Function:
The columns of a table window will be moved to the left by one column,
where the left column will be positioned at the right column.
Parameter:
lpszWindowName
BOOL
TlgTableWindowPressOpenArchiveVariableSelectionDlgButton(char*
lpszWindowName)
Function:
Opens a dialog for connecting table columns to one archive name and one tag
each.
Parameter:
lpszWindowName
BOOL TlgTableWindowPressOpenDlgButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
The dialog for the online configuration of the table window is displayed
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
3-14
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL TlgTableWindowPressOpenItemSelectDlgButton(char*
lpszWindowName)
Function:
Opens a dialog for selecting the visible columns.
Parameter:
lpszWindowName
BOOL TlgTableWindowPressOpenTimeSelectDlgButton(char*
lpszWindowName)
Function:
Opens a dialog for connecting table columns to one time range each, in which
the values are displayed.
Parameter:
lpszWindowName
BOOL TlgTableWindowPressPrevButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
Displays the data records preceding the current display area in the table
range
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
BOOL TlgTableWindowPressPrevItemButton(char* lpszWindowName)

Function:
The columns of a table window will be moved to the right by one column,
where the right column will be positioned at the left column.
Parameter:
lpszWindowName
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-15
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL TlgTableWindowPressRemoveRecordButton(char*
lpszTemplateName)
Function:
Deletes a data record
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
= Pointer on the name of a the application window
BOOL TlgTableWindowPressStartStopButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
The updating of the table window is turned on/off (toggle-Function)
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressFirstButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
Displays the first data records of the display area in the trend window. The
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressHelpButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
Displays the online help for the trend window
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
= Pointer on the name of the ap plication window
BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressLastButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
Displays the last data records of the display area in the trend window. The
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
3-16
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressLinealButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
Turns the ruler for the trend window on/off (toggle-Function). The ruler can
be moved via the left or right cursor keys.
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressNextButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
Displays the data records following the current display area in the trend
range
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressNextItemButton(char* lpszWindowName)

Function:
Moves all trends in a trend window one layer to the front. The trend in the
front will be moved to the back.
Parameter:
lpszWindowName
BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressOneToOneButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
The trend window will revert to the state it had before the magnifying glass
was turned on. The magnifying glass is turned off. Selecting a zoom area is
only possible with a mouse. See also TlgTrendWindowPressZoomInButton
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-17
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressOpenArchiveTagSelectionDlgButton(char*
lpszWindowName)
Function:
Opens a dialog for connecting trends in a trend window to one archive name
and one tag each.
Parameter:
lpszWindowName
BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressOpenDlgButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
The dialog for the online configuration of the trend window is displayed.
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressOpenItemSelectDlgButton(char*
lpszWindowNumber)
Function:
Opens a dialog for selecting the visible trends and the trend that is to be
displayed at the front.
Parameter:
lpszWindowName
= Pointer on the name of th e application window
BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressOpenTimeSelectDlgButton(char*
lpszWindowNumber)
Function:
Opens a dialog for connecting trends to one time range each, in which the
values are displayed.
Parameter:
lpszWindowName
3-18
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressPrevButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
Displays the data records preceding the current display area in the trend
range
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressPrevItemButton(char* lpszWindowName)

Function:
Moves all trends in a trend window one layer to the back. The trend in the
back will be moved to the front.
Parameter:
lpszWindowName
BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressStartStopButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
The updating of the trend window is turned on/off (toggle-Function)
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressZoomInButton(char* lpszTemplateName)

Function:
The magnifying glass is turned on. Selecting a zoom area is only possible
with a mouse.
Parameter:
lpszTemplateName
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-19
Global Scripts
08.97
3.4 WINCC (Standard Functions)
void OnErrorExecute(CCAPErrorExecute ErrorExecute)

Function:
OnErrorExecute will be called up, if an error occurred while executing an
action or function. This enables you to perform your own error treatment and
to determine the exact error cause.
Parameter:
ErrorExecute
= Structure, which informs you about the occurred error
Structure Definition:
typedef struckt {
DWORD dwCurrentThreadID;
thread
DWORD dwErrorCode1;
DWORD dwErrorCode2;
BOOL bCycle;
char* szApplicationName;
char* szFunctionName;
char* szTagName;
LPVOID lpParam;
DWORD dwParamSize;
DWORD dwCycle;
CMN_ERROR* pError;
} CCAPErrorExecute;
3-20
//Thread ID of the current

//Error code 1
//Error code 2
//cycle/acycle
//Name of the application
//Name of the function
//Name of the tag
//Pointer to the action stack
//Size of the action stack
//Cycle of the variable
//Pointer to CMN_ERROR
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
The meaning of the individual error markings and the transferred structure
elements depending on them, is described in the following table:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
1007001
1007001
0
1
x x x
x x x
x x
x x
1007001
4097
x x x
x x
1007001
1007001
4098
4099
x x x
x x x
x x
x x
1007001
4100
x x x
x x
1007004
1007005
0
1
x x x
x x
1007005
1007005
1007005
2
4
32768ff
x x
x x x
x x x
1007006
1007006
1007006
0
1
2
x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x x
1007006
x x x x x x x x
1007007
1007007
1007007
1
2
3
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x
x x
x x
x x
x x
x
x
x
Exception in the action

Exception while accessing
the return result
Stack overflow while
executing the action
Division by 0 in the action
Access to a symbol not
present in the action
Access violation in the
action
Unknown function
Action contains no
P-Code
Function name is wrong
Return value type is invalid
Error in the Ciss Compiler
while loading the action
Tag is not defined
Tag timeout
Tag can not be supplied in
the desired format
Tag delivers a status
violation, the status is
located at
CMN_ERROR.dwError1
Error at PDLRTGetProp
Error at PDLRTSetProp
Error at DM-Call
3-21
Global Scripts
08.97
3.5 WINDOWS (Standard Functions)

unsigned int ProgramExecute(char* Programm_Name)
Function:
Starts the program with the name provided.
Parameters:
Program_Name
= Pointer to the program name.
3.6 Options (Standard Functions)

BOOL GetCSigPicture(LPCSTR lpcPictureName, LPCSTR lpcObjectName,
LPCSTR lpcPropertyName, LPSTR lpPictureName)
This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package.
For internal use only.
DWORD GetSignificantMask(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName)
BOOL PASSCheckAreaPermission(LPCTSTR areaname)
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Authorization available
FALSE = No authorization available
Function:
Determines if the user has general authorization for operating a specific
system.
Parameters:
areaname = Name of the system
3-22
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL PASSCheckAreaLevelPermission(LPCTSTR areaname, DWORD

level)
This function is a part of the ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL option
package.
Return Value:
Error code
Function:
Checks whether the user has the authorization for the transferred system
when the authorization level is transferred.
Parameters:
areaname = Name of the system
level
= Authorization level as a number value
void PASSLoginDialog(TCHAR ch)
Function:
Displays the Login dialog and loads the user data to shared memory when a
successful login occurs.
Parameters:
ch
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Specification of the monitor on which the login

dialog is to be opened (for monitor 1, input the "1"
character.).
3-23
Global Scripts
08.97
3.7 Report (Standard Functions)

void ReportJob(LPSTR lpJobName, LPSTR lpMethodName)
This function will be replaced by the functions RPTJobPreview and
RPTJobPrint and should therefore not be used any more.
Function:
Depending on the value of the parameter lpMethodName, a print job or a
print preview will be started.
Parameter
lpJobName
= Pointer on the name of the print job
lpMethodName = Pointer on the name of the function mode
"PRINT" Print job will be executed
"PREVIEW" Print preview is started
BOOL RPTJobPreview(LPSTR lpJobName)
Function:
Starts the preview of a print job.
Parameter
lpJobName
BOOL RPTJobPrint(LPSTR lpJobName)

Function:
Starts the print job.
Parameter
lpJobName
3-24
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
3.8 Split Screen Manager (Standard Functions)

BOOL AcknowledgeAllPicture(LPCTSTR pictName)
void GetASVarIndex(int nVarIndex, int nClassIndex, BOOL* bActive,
BOOL* bQuit)
int GetIndexFromMask(DWORD dwMask)
void GetMessageClassFromVar(TCHAR* VarName, int nClassIndex,
BOOL* bActive, BOOL* bQuit)
BOOL GetCountPicture(LPTSTR aktName, LPTSTR newName, int
nNewNameLength, DWORD dwBitMask)
BOOL LoopInAlarm(TCHAR* TagName)
Return Value:
Error code
Function:
This function displays a prototype picture for the tag name provided and links
the prototype picture with the tag name.
Parameters:
TagName
= Pointer to the tag name
void profile(long pos_no, long value, LPCTSTR lpszPictureName)

WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-25
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL PTMUnload()
Function:
This function unloads the Picture Tree Manager.
void reset_hoer(Tag var)
void SetASVarIndex(int nVarIndex, int nClassIndex, BOOL bActive, BOOL
bQuit)
void SetMessageClassToVar(TCHAR* VarName, int nClassIndex, BOOL
bActive, BOOL bQuit)
BOOL SFCLoopInAlarm(TCHAR* TagInfo)
This function is a part of the ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL option
package.
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Function was executed
FALSE = Function was not executed or incorrect parameter input
Function:
This function opens a view to the SFC plan that triggered the message at the
measurement point provided.
Parameters:
TagInfo
3-26
= Pointer to the buffer on which the information

about the measurement point is stored
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SSMChangeButtonField(char Screen, char* PictureName)

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Display changed in the button area
FALSE = Error; Display not changed
Function:
The picture named lptPictureName is displayed in the button area of the
monitor described with Screen.
Parameters:
Screen
PictureName
= contains the number of the monitor as a

character string
= Pointer to the name, including the extension, of
the picture to be displayed in the button area
BOOL SSMChangeOverviewField(char Screen, char* PictureName)

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Display changed in the overview area
Function:
The picture named lptPictureName is displayed in the overview area of the
monitor described with Screen.
Parameters:
Screen
PictureName
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= contains the number of the monitor as

a character string
the picture to be displayed in the overview area
3-27
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SSMChangeWorkField(char Screen, char* PictureName, BOOL

Store)
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Display changed in the overview area
Function:
The contents of a file are displayed in the workspace of the monitor described
with Screen.
Parameters:
Screen
PictureName
Store

character string
the PDL file to be displayed. If the name specified
in PictureName is included in the hierarchy of the
"Picture Tree Manager," the area name is
transmitted and saved automatically. You can
access the area name by means of the
"SSMGetAreaFromPicturePath" function. If the file
specified in PictureName is not in the hierarchy,
(picture prototype), you can set the area name by
calling the SSMRTSetAreaToPicturePath function.
= Update the picture store if TRUE.
(Default setting)
BOOL SSMCheckWorkFieldDown(char Screen)

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Picture in the first lower node exists.
FALSE = Error or the picture in the first lower node does not exist.
Function:
This function determines which picture in the Screen workspace is displayed
and checks whether the picture exists in the corresponding lower node in the
hierarchy of the "Picture Tree Manager."
Parameters:
Screen
3-28

character string
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SSMCheckWorkFieldLeft(char Screen)

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Picture in the node to the left exists.
FALSE = Error or picture in the node to the left does not exist.
Function:
and checks whether the picture exists in the node to the left in the hierarchy
of the "Picture Tree Manager."
Parameters:
Screen

character string
BOOL SSMCheckWorkFieldRight(char Screen)

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Picture in the node to the right exists.
FALSE = Error or picture in the node to the right does not exist.
Function:
and checks whether the picture exists in the node to the right in the hierarchy
of the "Picture Tree Manager."
Parameters:
Screen
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01

character string
3-29
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SSMCheckWorkFieldUp(char Screen)

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Picture in the next higher node exists.
FALSE = Error or the picture in the next higher node does not exist.
Function:
and checks whether the picture exists in the corresponding higher node in the
hierarchy of the "Picture Tree Manager."
Parameters:
Screen

character string
BOOL SSMChgWorkFieldDown(char Screen)

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Display changed in the workspace.
FALSE = Error, display not changed in the workspace.
Function:
This function determines which picture is displayed in the monitor
workspace. It gets the appropriate picture from the first lower node in the
hierarchy of the "Picture Tree Manager" and displays this new picture in the
workspace of Screen. The picture stack is updated automatically.
Parameters:
Screen
3-30

character string
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SSMChgWorkFieldLeft(char Screen)

Return Value:
Error code
Function:
This function determines which picture is displayed in the Screen workspace.
It gets the appropriate picture from the node to the left in the hierarchy of the
"Picture Tree Manager" and displays this picture in the workspace of Screen.
The picture stack is updated automatically.
Parameters:
Screen

character string
BOOL SSMCheckWorkFieldRight(char Screen)

Return Value:
Error code
Function:
It gets the appropriate picture from the node to the right in the hierarchy of
the "Picture Tree Manager" and displays this picture in the workspace of
Screen.
Parameters:
Screen
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01

character string
3-31
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SSMCheckWorkFieldUp(char Screen)

Return Value:
Error code
Function:
It gets the appropriate picture from the next higher node in the hierarchy of
the "Picture Tree Manager" and displays this picture in the workspace of
Screen.
Parameters:
Screen

character string
BOOL SSMDeleteUserSettings(LPCTSTR lpctUserName)

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = User-related settings deleted.
FALSE = Error
Function:
Use this function to delete all of the files of the "Split Screen Manager" that
were created by lpctUserName in the standard folder of lpctUserName. Files
that belong to other users or other editors are unaffected.
Files that belong to the current user in other folders are also not affected.
Parameters:
lpctUserName
3-32
= Pointer to the name of the user whose settings

are to be deleted.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SSMGetAreaFromPath(char* PicturePath, char* AreaName, int len)

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = User-related settings deleted.
FALSE = Error
Function:
This function gets the system assignment of the specified picture path. The
function does not use the "Picture Tree Manager." PicturePath must contain
the complete path of a picture displayed in the workspace or in one of the top
fields.
Parameters:
PicturePath = Pointer to the name of the picture, including the
path. You do not need to input the extension.
AreaName = Pointer to a buffer on which the area/system
name should be stored.
len
= maximum length of the AreaName buffer
BOOL SSMGetAreaFromWorkField(char Screen, char* AreaName, int
nAreaNameLen)
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = No errors
FALSE = An error occurred
Function:
This function gets the system assignment of the workspace in the monitor
specified.
Parameters:
Screen
AreaName
nAreaNamelen
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01

character string
= Pointer to a buffer on which the area/system
= maximum length of the AreaName buffer
3-33
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SSMGetAutoLoadSettings()
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Automatic load activated
FALSE = Error
Function:
This function determines whether the user -specific settings should be loaded
automatically in the run -time system after a user has logged on.
BOOL SSMGetContainerToPicture(char* PictureName, char*
ReturnContainer, int len)
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Got container
FALSE = Error
Function:
This function uses the Picture Tree Manager to get the container that is
appropriate for the picture specified.
Parameters:
PictureName
= Name of the picture
ReturnContainer = Pointer to a buffer on which the container name
should be stored
len
= maximum length of the ReturnContainer buffer
3-34
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SSMGetContPict(int area_no, int subarea_no, char*

ReturnPictureName)
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Got picture name
FALSE = Error
Function:
This function gets the picture name of the container specified by the system
number and the subsystem number. If the subsystem number is zero, the
function gets the picture name of the system container.
Parameters:
area_no
subarea_no
ReturnPictureName
= System number
= Subsystem number
= Pointer to a buffer on which the picture name
should be stored.
BOOL SSMGetContainer(int area_no, int subarea_no, char* ReturnName)

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Got container name
FALSE = Error
Function:
This function gets the container name of the container specified by the system
number and subsystem number. If the subsystem number is zero, the system
gets the container name of the system container.
Parameters:
area_no
subarea_no
ReturnName
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= System number
= Subsystem number
= Pointer to a buffer on which the container
3-35
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SSMGetRootToPicture(char* PictureName, char*

ReturnRootContainer)
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Got system container name
FALSE = Error
Function:
This function uses the picture name to get the system container name.
Parameters:
PictureName
ReturnRootContainer
= Picture name
= Pointer to a buffer on which the system
container name should be stored
char SSMGetScreen(char* lpszPictureName)

Function:
This function specifies the monitor on which the selected picture is displayed.
Parameters:
lpszPictureName = Pointer to the picture to be examined
BOOL SSMGetWorkFieldPicture(char Screen, char* ReturnPictureName,
int len)
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Got picture name
FALSE = Error
Function:
This function gets the name (including the extension) of the picture currently
displayed in the workspace of Screen.
Parameters:
Screen
ReturnPictureName
len
3-36
= Contains the number of the monitor as a

character string.
= Pointer to a buffer on which the name of the
picture should be stored
= Length of the ReturnPictureName buffer
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SSMGetWorkFieldCoordinates(TCHAR cMonitor, int* pLeft, int*

pTop, int* pWidth, int* pHeight)
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Got size and location of the workspace.
FALSE = Error
Function:
This function gets the location and position of the workspace for the cMonitor
monitor and loads it in the pLeft, pTop, pWidth and pHeight parameters.
Parameters:
cMonitor = Contains the number of the monitor as a
character string.
pLeft
= Pointer to a storage location on which the
X coordinates of the workspace should be loaded
pTop
= Pointer to a storage location on which the
Y coordinates of the workspace should be loaded
pWidth = Pointer to a storage location on which the width
of the workspace should be loaded
pHeight = Pointer to a storage location on which the height
of the workspace should be loaded.
void SSMGetWorkFieldPath(char Screen, char* ReturnBaseName, int
Length)
Function:
This function gets the complete path of the picture in the workspace from the
monitor specified.
Parameters:
Screen
ReturnBaseName
Length
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01

character string
= Pointer to a button on which the path
specification should be loaded
= Length of the ReturnBaseName buffer
3-37
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SSMLoadCurrentFields(LPCTSTR lpctSettingsName, LPCTSTR

lpctUserName)
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Got path settings
FALSE = Error
Function:
From the file specified in lpctSettingsName, this function loads the
user-specific information as long as the name specified in lpctUserName
corresponds to the user name stored in the file. The following information is
loaded for each monitor:
Name of the picture in the overview area
Name of the picture in the workspace
Name of the picture in the button area
Names and positions (PosX, PosY, Width, Height) of all of the pictures
displayed in process windows at this point
Picture stack
Picture store
Names and positions (PosX, PosY, Width, Height) of all of the areas visible at
this point
Parameters:
lpctSettingsName
lpctUserName
3-38
= Pointer to the name of the file in which the

user-specific information is stored.
If lpctSettingsName does not contain any name
extensions, the extension ".SSM" is attached. If
lpctSettingsName does not contain any path
specification, the function searches for it in the
SSM standard folder of the lpctUserName user.
If lpctSettingsName contains relative or absolute
path specifications, then that path is used without
any changes (not recommended).
are to be loaded. If there is no user name
entered in lpctUserName
(ZERO or empty character string),
the name of the user that is currently logged on is
used.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SSMLoadSettings(TCHAR cMonitor)

Return Value:
Error code
FALSE = Error
Function:
This function displays the user-specific settings in a dialog window. The
following information is displayed for the monitor specified:
Picture stack
Picture store
Names and positions (PosX, PosY, Width, Height) of all of the areas visible at
this point
Parameters:
cMonitor = Number of the monitor as a character string on
which the selection dialog is to be displayed.
BOOL SSMOpenSpecField(char Screen, char* FieldName)
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = No errors
Function:
This function opens a spec field on the monitor specified.
Parameters:
Screen
FieldName
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01

character string
= Pointer to the buffer on which the spec field
name is stored
3-39
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SSMOpenTopField(char Screen, char* PictureName)

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Opened process window
FALSE = Error or no top field available
Function:
This function opens a process window of variable size and uses it to display
the picture specified by PictureName.
Parameters:
Screen
PictureName

character string
= Pointer to the name of the picture to be displayed
in the process window
BOOL SSMOpenTopFieldFixedSize(char Screen, char* PictureName)

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Opened process window
FALSE = Error
Function:
This function opens a process window of a set size and uses it to display the
picture specified by PictureName.
Parameters:
Screen
PictureName
3-40

character strin g
= Pointer to the name of the picture to be displayed
in the process window
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SSMPictureStoreGet(char Screen, char* PictureName, int len)

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Edited picture store
FALSE = Error
Function:
This function loads a picture name from the picture store of the monitor
specified.
Parameters:
Screen
PictureName
len

character string
= Pointer to the name of the picture that is stored in
the picture store
= Length of the PictureName buffer
int SSMPictureStoreNum(char Screen)

Function:
This function specifies the picture number of the picture located in the picture
store.
Parameters:
Screen
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01

character string
3-41
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SSMPictureStoreSet(char Screen, char* PictureName)

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = Edited picture store
FALSE = Error
Function:
This function stores a picture name in the picture store of the monitor
specified.
Parameters:
Screen
PictureName

character string
the picture store.
unsigned int SSMProgramExecute(char Screen, char * szCommandLine)

Function:
This function starts an application on the monitor specified.
Parameters:
Screen
szCommandLine
3-42

character string
= Command line (program name including
parameters)
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SSMPictureMemoryInquire(char Screen, char* PictureName, int

len, int* ReturnCount)
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = No errors
Function:
This function gets the picture name of the top memory area in a picture stack.
Parameters:
Screen
PictureName
len
ReturnCount

character string
the picture stack
= Pointer to the number of pictures (elements) in
the picture store of the monitor Screen
int SSMPictureMemoryNum(char Screen)

Function:
This function specifies how many pictures are located in the picture stack of
the monitor specified. A maximum of 8 pictures can be stored in the picture
stack.
Parameters:
Screen
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01

character string
3-43
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SSMPictureMemoryStore(char Screen, char* PictureName, int*

ReturnCount)
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = No errors
Function:
This function saves a picture from the appropriate monitor to the picture
stack.
Parameters:
Screen
PictureName
ReturnCount

character string
the picture stack
the picture stack of the monitor
BOOL SSMPictureMemoryRestore(char Screen, char* PictureName, int

len, int* ReturnCount)
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = No errors
Function:
This function loads a picture to the appropriate monitor from the picture
stack. The memory is then available again.
Parameters:
Screen
PictureName
len
ReturnCount
3-44

character string
the picture stack
the picture stack of the monitor Screen
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SSMSetAreaNameToPicture(char* PicturePath, char* AreaName)

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = No errors
Function:
This function sets the area name for a picture path. The area name is not
tested by this function but is stored directly.
Parameters:
PicturePath = Pointer to the name of the picture, including the
path settings. The extension does not have to be
given.
AreaName = Pointer to the area name to be connected to the
picture path
BOOL SSMSetLanguage(DWORD dwLanguage)
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = No errors
Function:
This function sets the language to be used in RUNTIME mode.
Parameters:
dwLanguage
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= The language to be used in RUNTIME as a

number value
3-45
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SSMStoreCurrentFields(LPCTSTR lpctSettingsName, LPCTSTR

lpctUserName)
Return Value:
Error code
FALSE = Error
Function:
This function creates a file specified in lpctSettingsName and saves
user-specific information in it.
The following information is stored for each monitor:
Picture stack
Picture store
Names and positions (PosX, PosY, Width, Height) of all areas visible at this
time
Parameters:
lpctSettingsName
lpctUserName
3-46
= Pointer to the name of the file in which the

user-specific information is to be stored.
If a file already exists with the name specified in
lpctSettingsName, it is overwritten. There are no
limitations regarding the file name. If you provide
an extension, it must be ".SSM."
If lpctSettingsName does not contain any name
extensions, the ".SSM" extension is added.
If lpctSettingsName does not contain any path
specification, the file is set up in the
SSM standard folder of the lpctUserName user.
If lpctSettingsName contains relative or absolute
path specifications, that path is used without any
changes (not recommended).
are to be loaded. If there is no user name
entered in lpctUserName
(ZERO or empty character string),
the name of the user that is currently logged on is
used.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SSMStoreSettings(TCHAR cMonitor)

Return Value:
Error code
FALSE = Error
Function:
This function stores the user-specific settings in a file selected by means of a
selection dialog.
The following information is stored for the monitor specified:
Picture stack
Picture store
Names and positions (PosX, PosY, Width, Height) of all areas visible at this
time
Parameters:
cMonitor = Number of the monitor as a character string on
which to display the selection dialog.
BOOL SSMUnload()
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = No errors
Function:
This function unloads the Split Screen Manager.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
3-47
Global Scripts
3-48
08.97
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4 Internal Functions
Use internal functions to make graphic objects and archives dynamic. You
can also use them in project functions, standard functions, and Global Script
actions.
Internal functions are divided into the following categories:
alarm
contains functions for starting and stopping the reception of single
messages and for specifying filters.
allocate
Contains functions for reserving and enabling working memory.
c_bib
Contains functions from the C standard library .
graphics
Contains functions for reading and setting properties of graphic objects.
tag
Contains functions for writing and reading process tags.
winCC
contains functions for language switching, for deactivating runtime, and
for exiting WinCC.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-1
Global Scripts
08.97
4.1 alarm (Internal Functions)

BOOL MSRTSetMsgFilter (DWORD dwServiceID,
LPMSG_FILTER_STRUCT lpMsgFilter, LPCMN_ERROR lpError);
Function:
Set a new filter for the service displayed.
Parameters:
dwServiceID
lpMsgFilter
lpError
= Service, for which the filter is to be set

= Filter to be used
= Pointer that acquires the extended
error message
BOOL MSRTStartMsgService (LPDWORD lpdwServiceID,

MSG_SERVICE_NOTIFY_PROC lpfnNotifyProc,
LPMSG_FILTER_STRUCT lpMsgFilter, DWORD dwNotifyMask, LPVOID
lpvUser, LPCMN_ERROR lpError);
Function:
Start the service for receiving single messages. You can create your own
message window.
Parameters:
lpdwServiceID
lpfnNotifyProc
lpMsgFilter
dwNotifyMask
lpvUser
lpError
= Contains the service ID after the function

has been called up successfully.
= Notification function for transferring messages
to the service
= Pointer to the filter conditions:
(NULL = all messages)
= Specifies which messages are sent.
= User data are sent to callback.
error message
BOOL MSRTStopMsgService (DWORD dwServiceID, LPCMN_ERROR

lpError);
Function:
Stop the service for receiving single messages.
Parameters:
dwServiceID
lpError
4-2
= ID number of the service you want to stop

error message
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.2 allocate
The "allocate" function category contains functions for reserving and enabling
work memory.
void SysFree(void* lpFree);
Function:
Releases memory that was reserved with the "SysMalloc" function.
Parameters:
lpFree = Pointer
void* SysMalloc(unsigned long int size);

Function:
Reserves memory for an action. The memory range is allocated to the action.
When the action is completed and the result is sent, the system releases the
memory. Use the "SysFree" function to release the memory yourself.
Example:
Reserve memory for the return value of the action.
char* main(...);
{
char* returnwert;
char text[17];
returnwert=SysMalloc(17);
strcpy(returnwert,&text[0];
return returnwert;
}
Parameters:
size
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Size of the memory in bytes
4-3
Global Scripts
08.97
4.3 c_bib
The functions category c_bib contains C functions from the C library and is
divided into the following areas:
ctype
math
memory
stdio
stdlib
string
time
stdio itself is divided into the following areas:

char_io
directio
error
file
file_pos
output
You can find a description of this function in related technical literature.
4-4
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4 graphics
The Graphics function category is divided into the following functions:
get Functions
Functions for transmitting attribute values. The get functions themselves
are divided into the following function groups:
axes
color
fill
flash
focus
font
general
geometry
i_o
limits
link
miscs
ole_control
pictures
property
state
style
The get functions need the following two parameters:

lpszPictureName: Picture name (without name extension pdl)
lpszObjectName: Object name
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-5
Global Scripts
08.97
set Functions
Functions for setting attribute values. The set functions themselves are
divided into the following function groups:
axes
color
fill
flash
focus
font
geometry
i_o
limits
link
miscs
ole_control
pictures
property
state
style
The set functions need the following three parameters:

lpszPictureName: Picture name (without name extension pdl)
lpszObjectName: Object name
3. Parameter: Attribute value
The return value for the set functions is the following error code:
TRUE: The function was executed without errors.
FALSE: An error occurred.
4-6
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.1 graphics-get-axes Functions

BOOL GetAlignment (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Only with bar objects
Return Value:
TRUE: The text is to the right of the bar.
FALSE: The text is to the left of the bar.
double GetAxisSection (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Axis section: the value difference between two neighboring axis labels.
BOOL GetExponent (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the numbers on the axis are exponents.
FALSE means the numbers on the axis are in decimal format.
long int GetLeftComma (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number of digits to the left of the decimal point on the axis.
BOOL GetLongStrokesBold (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the long axis sections on the bar scale are displayed as bold.
FALSE means the long axis sections on the bar scale are displayed as normal.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-7
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL GetLongStrokesOnly (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that only the long axis sections are displayed in the bar scale.
FALSE means that both the long axis sections and the subsections are
displayed in the bar scale.
long int GetLongStrokesSize(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value that controls the length of the long axis sections
long int GetLongStrokesTextEach (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value that controls the text labels of the long axis sections
Example:
Return Value = 1 -> Each long axis section is labeled.
Return Value = 2 -> Every other long axis section is labeled.
long int GetRightComma (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number of digits to the right of the decimal point on the axis .
long int GetScaleTicks (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Scale marks as a percentage value of the entire height of the bar.
BOOL GetScaling (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means with an additional scale.
FALSE means without an additional scale.
4-8
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
long int GetScalingType(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value
Number value that determines the type of bar scaling
0: Linear (same weight)
1: Logarithmic (lower values emphasized)
2: Negative logarithmic (higher values emphasized)
3: Automatic (linear)
4: Tangent (high and low values emphasized)
5: Squared (high values emphasized)
6: Cubic (high values heavily emphasized)
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-9
Global Scripts
08.97
4.4.2 graphics-get-color Functions

long int GetBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the background color of the object
Note:
If the function call relates to the entire picture, set the parameter
lpszObjectName
= NULL.
long int GetBackColor2 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the bar color of bar objects
long int GetBackColor3 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the bar background color for bar objects
long int GetBackColorBottom(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value that sets the bottom right background color with slider objects.
long int GetBackColorTop(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value that sets the top left background color with slider objects.
long int GetBorderBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the line or border background color
long int GetBorderColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the line or border color
4-10
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
long int GetBorderColorBottom (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the color for the right and bottom part of the 3D border
(shadow)
long int GetBorderColorTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the color for the left and top part of the 3D border
long int GetButtonColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the button color in slider objects
long int GetColorBottom (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the color for the bottom/right slider position (low limit)
long int GetColorTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the color for the top/left slider position (high limit)
long int GetFillColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the color of the fill pattern
Note:
If the function call relates to the entire picture, set the parameter
lpszObjectName
= NULL.
long int GetForeColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the font color
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-11
Global Scripts
08.97
long int GetGridColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the grid color of the Graphics Designer workspace
long int GetItemBorderBackColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Display of the separate line background color in a "Text List" object.
long int GetItemBorderColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Display of the separate line color in a "Text List" object.
long int GetScaleColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the scale color in bar objects
long int GetSelBGColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Display of the background color for selected entry in the browser list in a
"Text List" object.
long int GetSelTextColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Display of the font color for selected entry in the browser list in a "Text List"
object.
long int GetTrendColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the trend color in bar objects
4-12
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
long int GetUnselBGColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Display of the background color for unselected entries in the browser list for a
"Text List" object.
long int GetUnselTextColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Display of the text color for unselected entries in the browser list for a "Text
List" object.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-13
Global Scripts
08.97
4.4.3 graphics-get-fill Functions

BOOL GetFilling (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the dynamic filling attribute with the background color is
active. An object with a solid border (rectangle, rounded rectangle, circle ,
ellipse, pie segment, ellipse segment, polygon, text, I/O field, and others) can
be filled.
FALSE means the dynamic filling attribute with the background color is not
active.
long int GetFillingIndex (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the current fill level (percentage)
4-14
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.4 graphics-get-flash Functions

long int GetBackFlashColorOff (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the background color when the flashing attribute is switched
off
long int GetBackFlashColorOn (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Background color when the flashing attribute is switched on as number value
long int GetBorderFlashColorOff (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the border color or line color when the flashing attribute is
switched off
long int GetBorderFlashColorOn (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the border color or line color when the flashing attribute is
switched on
BOOL GetFlashBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means background flashing is active.
FALSE means background flashing is not active.
BOOL GetFlashBorderColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means border or line flashing is active.
FALSE means border or line flashing is not active.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-15
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL GetFlashForeColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means text flashing is active.
FALSE means text flashing is not active.
long int GetFlashRateBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Background flash frequency.
long int GetFlashRateBorderColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Line or border flash frequency.
long int GetFlashRateForeColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Text flash frequency.
long int GetForeFlashColorOff (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the text color when the flashing attribute is switched off
long int GetForeFlashColorOn (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the text color when the flashing attribute is switched on
4-16
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.5 graphics-get-focus-Functions
char* Get_Focus();
Return Value:
Name of the object the focus is placed on or has been placed on last
4.4.6 graphics-get-font Functions

long int GetAlignmentLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the horizontal alignment (aligned left, centered, aligned
right) of the text
long int GetAlignmentTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the vertical alignment (aligned top, center, bottom) of the
text
BOOL GetFontBold (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the "Bold" text attribute is set.
FALSE means the "Bold" text attribute is not set.
BOOL GetFontItalic (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the "Italic" text attribute is set.
FALSE means the "Italic" text attribute is not set.
char* GetFontName (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Pointer to the name of the font that is currently set.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-17
Global Scripts
08.97
long int GetFontSize (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Current font size
lpszPictureName = Name of the picture
lpszObjectName = Name of the object
BOOL GetFontUnderline (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the "Underline" text attribute is set.
FALSE means the "Underline" text attribute is not set.
BOOL GetOrientation (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the text orientation is horizontal.
FALSE means the text orientation is vertical.
char* GetText (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName);

Return Value:
Pointer to static text. For radio- and check-boxes, as well as for polygons and
polylines, the element or point has to be set with the SetIndex function
before calling the GetText function.
4-18
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.7 graphics-get-general Functions

long int GetLayer (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Provides the picture layer on which the object is located.
4.4.8 graphics-get-geometry Functions

long int GetActualPointLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Current horizontal position (X axis ) of the corner point for polygon and
polyline object types in relation to the origin of the picture.
The SetIndex function sets the current point of the polygon.
long int GetActualPointTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Current vertical position (Y axis ) of the corner point for polygon and polyline
object types in relation to the origin of the picture.
The SetIndex function sets the current point of the polygon.
long int GetBoxCount (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number of selected check boxes in a check box area or option buttons in an
option group area.
long int GetDirection (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the bar direction (up, down, left, or right) in bar objects
long int GetEndAngle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
End angle of pie and ellipse segments as well as circular and ellipse arcs
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-19
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL GetGrid (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName);

Return Value:
TRUE means that the grid is turned on in the workspace of the Graphics
Designer.
FALSE means that the grid is turned off in the workspace of the Graphics
Designer.
long int GetGridHeight (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Height of the grid in the workspace of the Graphics Designer
long int GetGridWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Width of the grid in the workspace of the Graphics Designer
long int GetHeight (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Height of the rectangle surrounding an object
Note:
If the call of the function relates to the entire picture, the lpszObjectName
parameter must be = NULL.
long int GetLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName);

Return Value:
Current location on the X axis of the left upper corner of the rectangle
surrounding an object
long int GetPointCount (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number of corners for a polygon or polyline
long int GetRadius (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Radius of a circle, pie segment, or circular arc
4-20
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
long int GetRadiusHeight (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
The vertical radius of an ellipse, an ellipse segment, or an ellipse arc
long int GetRadiusWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Horizontal radius of an ellipse, an ellipse segment, or an ellipse arc
long int GetReferenceRotationLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Valid for line, polygon, and polyline
Return Value:
X value of the rotation reference (the reference point around which the object
is rotated)
long int GetReferenceRotationTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Valid for line, polygon, and polyline.
Return Value:
Y value of the rotation reference (the reference point around which the object
is rotated)
long int GetRotationAngle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Valid for line, polygon, and polyline.
Return Value:
Clockwise rotation angle (in degrees) of the object around the rotation point
long int GetRoundCornerHeight (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Vertical radius of the corner of a rounded rectangle
long int GetRoundCornerWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Horizontal radius of the corner of a rounded rectangle
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-21
Global Scripts
08.97
long int GetStartAngle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Beginning angle for pie and ellipse segments as well as circular and ellipse
arcs
long int GetTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName);

Return Value:
Current Y axis value of the left upper corner of the rectangle surrounding an
object
long int GetWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Width of the rectangle surrounding an object
Note:
long int GetZeroPoint (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Zero point in bar objects
4-22
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.9 graphics-get-i_o Functions

char* GetAssignments(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Assignment of text to value range depending on the type of list.
BOOL GetAssumeOnExit (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Only with I/O fields
Return Value:
TRUE means the system accepts the input value as soon as the field is exited.
FALSE means the system does not accept the input value as soon as the field
is exited.
BOOL GetAssumeOnFull (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the system exits the input field automatically (without Tab or
Enter key) and accepts the input as soon as the input has been completed (the
specified number of characters was entered).
FALSE means the system does not exit the input field automatically and
accept the input as soon as the input has been completed.
long int GetBitNumber(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Display of the relevant bit in the output value in the "Bit" list type.
BOOL GetClearOnError (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the input field is deleted automatically when there is an invalid
input.
FALSE means the input field is not deleted when there is an invalid input.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-23
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL GetClearOnNew (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the input field is deleted at startup.
FALSE means the input field is not deleted at startup.
long int GetDataFormat (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the data type (binary, decimal, hexadecimal, or string) of the
contents of the field
BOOL GetHiddenInput (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the input value is hidden during input. An asterisk (*) is
displayed for each character.
FALSE means the input value is not hidden during input.
char* GetInputValueChar (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Pointer to the input value
double GetInputValueDouble (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Input value
long int GetListType(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Displays the type of the text list.
The following list types are possible:
0: Decimal
1: Binary
2: Bit
4-24
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
long int GetNumberLines(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Display of how many visible lines a browser list in a "Text List" object
contains.
Note:
If the number of configured texts is larger than the number of visible lines,
the browser list receives a vertical scroll bar.
char* GetOutputFormat (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Pointer to the output format
char* GetOutputValueChar (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Pointer to the output value
double GetOutputValueDouble (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Output value
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-25
Global Scripts
08.97
4.4.10 graphics-get-limits Functions

double GetAlarmHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Alarm high limit in bar objects
double GetAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Alarm low limit in bar objects
BOOL GetCheckAlarmHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the limit value for "alarm high" is monitored in bar objects.
FALSE means that the limit value for "alarm high" is not monitored.
BOOL GetCheckAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the limit value for "alarm low" is monitored in bar objects.
FALSE means that the limit value for "alarm low" is not monitored in bar
objects.
BOOL GetCheckLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the high limit value for "reserve 4" is monitored in bar
objects.
FALSE means that the high limit value for "reserve 4" is not monitored in bar
objects.
BOOL GetCheckLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the high limit value for "reserve 5" is monitored in bar
objects.
FALSE means that the high limit value for "reserve 5" is not monitored in bar
objects.
4-26
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL GetCheckLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the low limit value for "reserve 4" is monitored in bar
objects.
FALSE means that the low limit value for "reserve 4" is not monitored in bar
objects.
BOOL GetCheckLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the low limit value for "reserve 5" is monitored in bar
objects.
FALSE means that the low limit value for "reserve 5" is not monitored in bar
objects.
BOOL GetCheckToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the limit value for "tolerance high" is monitored in bar
objects.
FALSE means that the limit value for "tolerance high" is not monitored in bar
objects.
BOOL GetCheckToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the limit value for "tolerance low" is monitored in bar
objects.
FALSE means that the limit value for "tolerance low" is not monitored in bar
objects.
BOOL GetCheckWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the limit value for "warning high" is monitored in bar
objects.
FALSE means that the limit value for "warning high" is not monitored in bar
objects.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-27
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL GetCheckWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the limit value for "warning low" is monitored in bar
objects.
FALSE means that the limit value for "warning low" is not monitored in bar
objects.
long int GetColorAlarmHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the bar color when the limit value of "alarm high" is reached
long int GetColorAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the bar color when the limit value of "alarm low" is reached
long int GetColorLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the bar color when the high limit value of "reserve 4" is
reached
long int GetColorLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the bar color when the high limit value of "reserve 5" is
reached
long int GetColorLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the bar color when the low limit value of "reserve 4" is
reached
4-28
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
long int GetColorLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the bar color when the low limit value of "reserve 5" is
reached
long int GetColorToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the bar color when the limit value of "tolerance high" is
reached
long int GetColorToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the bar color when the limit value of "tolerance low" is
reached
long int GetColorWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the bar color when the limit value of "warning high" is
reached
long int GetColorWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the bar color when the limit value of "warning low" is
reached
double GetLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
The high limit value for "reserve 4" in bar objects
double GetLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
The high limit value for "reserve 5" in bar objects
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-29
Global Scripts
08.97
double GetLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
The low limit value for "reserve 4" in bar objects
double GetLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
The low limit value for "reserve 5" in bar objects
double GetLimitMax (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
High limit value for I/O fields
double GetLimitMin (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Low limit value for I/O fields
BOOL GetMarker (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the limit value is displayed as a scale value in bar objects.
FALSE means the limit value is not displayed in bar objects.
double GetToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Limit value for "tolerance high" in bar objects
double GetToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Limit value for "tolerance low" in bar objects
4-30
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL GetTypeAlarmHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the limit value for "alarm high" is provided as a percentage in
bar objects.
FALSE means the limit value for "alarm high" is provided as an absolute in
bar objects.
BOOL GetTypeAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the limit value for "alarm low" is provided as a percentage in
bar objects.
FALSE means the limit value for "alarm low" is provided as an absolute in
bar objects.
BOOL GetTypeLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the high limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as a percentage
in bar objects.
FALSE means the high limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as an absolute
in bar objects.
BOOL GetTypeLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the high limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as a percentage
in bar objects.
FALSE means the high limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as an absolute
in bar objects.
BOOL GetTypeLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the low limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as a percentage in
bar objects.
FALSE means the low limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as an absolute in
bar objects.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-31
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL GetTypeLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the low limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as a percentage in
bar objects.
FALSE means the low limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as an absolute in
bar objects.
BOOL GetTypeToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the limit value for "tolerance high" is provided as a percentage
in bar objects.
FALSE means the limit value for "tolerance high" is provided as an absolute
in bar objects.
BOOL GetTypeToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the limit value for "tolerance low" is provided as a percentage
in bar objects.
FALSE means the limit value for "tolerance low" is provided as an absolute in
bar objects.
BOOL GetTypeWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the limit value for "warning high" is provided as a percentage
in bar objects.
FALSE means the limit value for "warning high" is provided as an absolute
in bar objects.
4-32
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL GetTypeWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the limit value for "warning low" is provided as a percentage in
bar objects.
FALSE means the limit value for "warning low" is provided as an absolute in
bar objects.
double GetWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Limit value for "warning high" in bar objects
double GetWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Limit value for "warning low" in bar objects
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-33
Global Scripts
08.97
4.4.11 graphics-get-link Functions

BOOL GetLink(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName,LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName, LPLINKINFO() pLink);
Return Value:
Inquiry to the current tag connection of object properties
Parameters:
Stucture:
The tag structure consists of the LinkTyp, dwCycle, and szLinkName
parameters.
LinkType:
0
1
2
3
4
Object property not dynamic

Direct tag connection
Indirect tag connection
C action
C action created by means of the dynamic wizard
dwCycle:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13-17
Picture cycle
Window cycle
Upon change
250 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
5s
10 s
1 min
5 min
10 min
1 hr
User cycle 1 to 5
szLinkName:
If there is of a direct or indirect tag connection, the tag name is transferred.
Example:
{
LINKINFO linkinfo;
GetLink( ......., &linkinfo);
printf(%d, %d, %s, linkinfo.LinkType, linkinfo.dwCycle,
linkinfo.szLinkName);
}
4-34
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.12 graphics-get-misc Functions

BOOL GetAdaptBorder (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Valid for static text, I/O field, button, check box, and option button.
Return Value:
TRUE means the border is dynamically fitted to the text size.
FALSE means the border is not dynamically fitted to the text size.
BOOL GetAdaptPicture (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Valid for picture windows. Adapts the picture to the size of the picture
window.
Return Value:
TRUE means the picture is adapted to fit the window size.
FALSE means the picture is not adapted to fit the window size.
BOOL GetAdaptSize (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Only for picture windows.
Return Value:
TRUE means the window size is adapted to fit the picture size.
FALSE means the window size is not adapted to fit the picture size.
BOOL GetAverage (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the last 15 values will be averaged.
FALSE means the last 15 values will not be averaged.
long int GetBoxType (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Field type of an I/O object (input field, output field, input/output field)
BOOL GetCaption (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the picture window has a title.
FALSE means that the picture window does not have a title.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-35
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL GetCloseButton (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the picture window can be closed.
FALSE means that the picture window cannot be closed.
BOOL GetColorChangeType (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the color change when a limit is reached is carried out in
the entire bar.
FALSE means that the color change when a limit is reached is carried out in
an individual bar segment .
BOOL GetCursorControl (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the cursor control is turned on in I/O field s (an alpha
cursor jumps to the next field in the tab sequence after exiting the current
field).
FALSE means that the cursor control is turned off in I/O fields.
BOOL GetCursorMode (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the cursor mode for the picture is an alpha cursor sequence.
FALSE means that the cursor mode for the picture is a tab order sequence.
BOOL GetEditAtOnce (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the immediate input attribute is set to "yes" for I/O field s
(you can make an input immediately upon accessing the I/O field with the
Tab key, without having to carry out any further action).
FALSE means that the immediate input attribute is set to "no" for I/O fields.
4-36
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL GetExtendedOperation (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the extended operation attribute is set to "yes" for sliders
(the slider is set to a new appropriate minimum/maximum limit value by
clicking on the area outside of the current slider setting)
FALSE means that the extended operation attribute is set to "no" for sliders.
long int GetHotkey (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Hot key or key combination for a button.
BOOL GetHysteresis (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the display occurs with hysteresis for bar objects.
FALSE means that the display occurs without hysteresis for bar objects.
double GetHysteresisRange (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Hysteresis in the bar object display (hysteresis as a percent of the display
value)
char* GetLanguageSwitch(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Shows if the text list object was configured in one or more languages.
TRUE multiple language text list
FALSE single language text list
char* GetLastChange (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Date the picture was last changed.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-37
Global Scripts
08.97
double GetMax (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName);

Return Value:
The absolute value for a full value view with bar and slider objects
BOOL GetMaximizeButton (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the picture or application window can be maximized.
FALSE means that the picture or application window cannot be maximized.
double GetMin (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName);

Return Value:
Absolute value for the smallest value view for bar and slider objects
BOOL GetMoveable (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the picture or application window can be moved.
FALSE means that the picture or application window cannot be moved.
long int GetOffsetLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Horizontal distance of the picture from the left edge of the window in picture
windows
long int GetOffsetTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Vertical distance of the picture from the top edge of the window in picture
windows
BOOL GetOnTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the picture or application window is always in the
foreground.
FALSE means that the picture or application window is not always in the
foreground.
4-38
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL GetOperation (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the object can be controlled.
FALSE means that the object cannot be controlled.
Note:
BOOL GetOperationMessage (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Valid for the I/O field, check box, option button, and slider objects
Return Value:
TRUE means that a message is output when an operation is successfully
carried out.
FALSE means that no message is output when an operation is successfully
carried out.
BOOL GetOperationReport (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Valid for all objects except application windows, picture windows, and OLE
control
Return Value:
TRUE means that the reason for operator activity is reported.
FALSE means that the reason for operator activity is not reported.
Note:
long int GetPasswordLevel (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
control
Return Value:
Authorization level for controlling the object
Note:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-39
Global Scripts
08.97
char* GetPictureName (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Valid for picture objects
Return Value:
Pointer to the name of a picture contained in a picture object
double GetProcess (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Valid for slider, bar, check box, and option group objects
Return Value:
For sliders and bars:
Value of the presetting for the process value to be displayed.
For check boxes and option groups:
The selected box(es)
BOOL GetScrollBars(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the picture window has a scroll bar.
FALSE means that the picture window does not have a scroll bar.
char* GetServerName(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Displays the name of the object (OLE Control and OLE object), under which
it is registered in Windows.
BOOL GetSizeable (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the application or picture window size can be changed.
FALSE means that the application or picture window size cannot be changed.
long int GetSmallChange (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number of steps the slider can be moved with a mouse click
4-40
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL GetTrend (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName);

Return Value:
TRUE means that the trend is displayed in a bar object.
FALSE means that the trend is not displayed in a bar object.
long int GetUpdateCycle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the update cycle for the entire picture
BOOL GetVisible (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the object is displayed.
FALSE means that the object is not displayed.
Note:
BOOL GetWindowBorder (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means that the application or picture window is displayed with a
border.
FALSE means that the application or picture window is displayed without a
border.
double GetZeroPointValue (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Absolute value for the zero point in a bar display
long int GetZoom (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Zoom factor for a picture window
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-41
Global Scripts
08.97
4.4.13 graphics-get-ole_control Functions

long int GetPosition(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Slider position of the OCX slider as a number value
long int GetRangeMax(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Maximum setting range of the OCX slider as a number value.
long int GetRangeMin(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Minimum setting range of the OCX slider as a number value.
4-42
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.14 graphics-get-pictures Functions

char* GetPictureDeactivated(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Picture name for "deactivated" status
Bitmap files (*.bmp, *.dib) as well as metafiles (*.emf, *.wmf) can be linked.
char* GetPictureDown(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Picture for the "on/pressed" status.
Bitmap files (*.bmp, *.dib) as well as metafiles (*.emf, *.wmf) can be linked
char* GetPictureUp(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Picture name for the "off/not pressed" status
BOOL GetPicDeactReferenced(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means a reference to the bit map file for the "deactivated" status.
FALSE means copy the contents of the bit map file to the graphic (for the
"deactivated" status).
long int GetPicDeactTransparent(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Transparent color for the "deactivated" status
Note:
This function only applies to bitmap graphics.
BOOL GetPicDeactUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means use the transparent color for the "deactivated" status.
FALSE means do not use the transparent color for the "deactivated" status.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-43
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL GetPicDownReferenced(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means a reference to the bitmap file for the "on/pressed" status.
FALSE meas copy the bitmap file to the graphic (for the status "on/pressed")
long int GetPicDownTransparent(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Transparent color for the "on/pressed" status
Note:
BOOL GetPicDownUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means use the transparent color for the "on/pressed" status.
FALSE means do not use the transparent color for the "on/pressed" status.
BOOL GetPicReferenced(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means a reference to the bitmap file.
FALSE means copy the contents of the bitmap file to the graphic object.
long int GetPicTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Transparent color for the background picture of a graphic object
Note:
BOOL GetPicUpReferenced(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means a reference to the bitmap file for the "off/not pressed" status.
FALSE means copy the contents of the bitmap file to the graphic (for the
"off/not pressed" status).
4-44
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
long int GetPicUpTransparent(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Transparent color for the "off/not pressed" status.
Note:
BOOL GetPicUpUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means use the transparent color for the "off/not pressed" status.
FALSE means do not use the transparent color for the "off/not pressed" status.
BOOL GetPicUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means use the transparent color for the background picture of a
graphic object.
FALSE means do not use the transparent color for the background picture of a
graphic object.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-45
Global Scripts
08.97
4.4.15 graphics-get-property-Funktionen
BOOL GetPropBOOL(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName, LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName)
Return Value:
Attribute value of the type BOOL.
Parameter:
lpszPropertyName
= OLE-Automation-Name of the attribute
char* GetPropChar(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

Return Value:
Pointer on the attribute value of the type char.
Parameter:
lpszPropertyName
double GetPropDouble(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

Return Value:
Attribute value of the type double.
Parameter:
lpszPropertyName
long GetPropWord(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

Return Value:
Attribute value of the type long.
Parameter:
lpszPropertyName
4-46
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.16 graphics-get-state Functions

long int GetBasePicTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Transparent color of the base picture
Note:
BOOL GetBasePicUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means use the transparent color for the base picture .
FALSE means do not use the transparent color for the base picture .
char* GetBasePicture(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Base picture name for the status display
BOOL GetBasePicReferenced(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means reference to the bitmap file.
FALSE means copy the contents of the bitmap file to the status display.
BOOL GetFlashFlashPicture(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means the flash picture is dynamically animated.
FALSE means the flash picture is statically animated.
char* GetFlashPicture(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Flash picture name (file name of the graphic)
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-47
Global Scripts
08.97
long int GetFlashPicTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Transparent color of the flash picture
Note:
BOOL GetFlashPicUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means use the transparent color for the flash picture .
FALSE means do not use the transparent color for the flash picture .
BOOL GetFlashPicReferenced(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
TRUE means reference to the bitmap file.
FALSE means copy the contents of the bitmap file to the status display.
long int GetFlashRateFlashPic (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value for the flash frequency of a flash picture
0:
1:
2:
3:
No flash frequency
Flash frequency slow (approximately 0.5 Hz)
Flash frequence medium (approximately 2 Hz)
Flash frequency fast (approximately 8 Hz)
Note:
Since flashing is a software implementation, the frequency depends on the
system and the hardware (number of objects, processor, memory, update time,
etc.).
long int GetIndex(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName);

Return Value:
Current index of a polygon or polyline.
4-48
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.17 graphics-get-style Functions

long int GetBackBorderWidth(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value for the weight of the border of 3D border and slider objects
long int GetBorderEndStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the type of line end style
long int GetBorderStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the line style or border style
long int GetBorderWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Line weight or weight of the border line as number value
long int GetBoxAlignment (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the assignment of the control elements in check boxes or
option buttons, align left or right
long int GetFillStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the type of fill pattern
Note:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-49
Global Scripts
08.97
long int GetFillStyle2 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Number value of the fill pattern of the bar in a bar display
long int GetItemBorderStyle(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Style for the separate line for the "text list" object
long int GetItemBorderWidth(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Return Value:
Weight for the separate line for the "text list" object
BOOL GetPressed(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
Only for round buttons
Return Value:
TRUE means a switch setting of on/pressed.
FALSE means a switch setting of off/not pressed.
BOOL GetToggle(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName);

Only for round buttons
Return Value:
TRUE means the switch setting is not latched.
FALSE means the switch setting is latched.
BOOL GetWindowsStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName);
You can only use this function on buttons.
Return Value:
TRUE corresponds to the "Windows style," meaning the button is displayed
according to Windows conventions.
FALSE corresponds to the "not Windows style," meaning you can determine
the way the button looks yourself.
4-50
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.18 graphics-set-axes Functions

BOOL SetAlignment (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName, BOOL bAlignment);
Function:
Set the location of the text (right/left) relative to the bar.
Parameters:
bAlignment
= Text located right or left of the bar.
TRUE: The text is to the right of the bar.

FALSE: The text is to the left of the bar.
BOOL SetAxisSection (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, double dAxisSection);
Function:
Set the units of measurement on the axis (the value difference between two
neighboring axis labels).
Parameters:
dAxisSection
= Axis section
BOOL SetExponent (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bExponent);
Function:
Determine whether the number display should be with exponents or decimals.
Parameters:
bExponent
= Axis numbering with exponents/decimals
TRUE means the number display on the axis is with exponents.

FALSE means the number display on the axis is with decimals.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-51
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetLeftComma (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lLeftComma);
Function:
Set the number of digits to the left of the decimal point.
Parameters:
lLeftComma
= Number of digits to the left of the decimal point
BOOL SetLongStrokesBold (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bLongStrokesBold);
Function:
Set whether the long axis sections in the scale representation should be
displayed as bold or normal.
Parameters:
bLongStrokesBold = Long axis sections bold/normal
TRUE means the long axis sections in the scale representation of the bar are
bold.
FALSE means the long axis sections in the scale representation of the bar are
normal.
BOOL SetLongStrokesOnly (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bLongStrokesOnly);
Function:
Determine whether only long axis sections or the sub-sections are also used
on the bar scale.
Parameters:
bLongStrokesOnly = Exclusively long axis sections yes/no.
TRUE means only long axis sections are used on the bar scale.
FALSE means long axis sections and sub-sections are used on the bar scale.
4-52
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetLongStrokesSize(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lLongStrokesSize);
Function:
Set the length of the long axis sections on the bar scale.
Parameters:
lLongStrokesSize
= Length of the long axis sections
BOOL SetRightComma (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lRightComma);
Function:
Set the number of digits to the right of the decimal point (0 to 20) in the axis
labeling.
Parameters:
lRightComma
= Number of digits to the right of the decimal point
BOOL SetScaleTicks (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lScaleTicks);
Function:
Set the scale marks within the bar as a percentage of the entire bar height.
Parameters:
lScaleTicks
= Scale marks as a percentage of the entire bar

height
BOOL SetScaling (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

BOOL bScaling);
Function:
Turn the scale on and off.
Parameters:
bScaling
= Scale on/off
TRUE means "with scale"

FALSE means "without scale"
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-53
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetScalingType(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lScalingType);
Function:
Set the type of bar scaling.
Parameters:
lScalingType
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
4-54
= Type of bar scaling
Linear (same weight)

Logarithmic (low values emphasized)
Negative logarithmic (high values emphasized)
Automatic (linear)
Tangent (high and low values emphasized)
Squared (high values emphasized)
Cubic (high values heavily emphasized)
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.19 graphics-set-color Functions

BOOL SetBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName, long int lBackColor);
Function:
Set the background color of the object.
Parameters:
lBackColor
= Number value of the background color of the object
Note:
BOOL SetBackColor2 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBackColor2);
Function:
Set the bar color for bar objects.
Parameters:
lBackColor2
= Number value of the bar color for bar objects
BOOL SetBackColor3 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBackColor3);
Function:
Set the color of the bar background for bar objects.
Parameters:
lBackColor3
= Number value of the bar background color for bar

objects
BOOL SetBackColorBottom(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBackColorBottom);
Function:
Set the bottom/right background color for slider objects.
Parameters:
lBackColorBottom = Number value of the bar background color
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-55
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetBackColorTop(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBackColorTop);
Function:
Set the top/left background color for slider objects.
Parameters:
lBackColorTop
= Number value of the bar background color
BOOL SetBorderBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBorderBackColor);
Function:
Set the line or border background color.
Parameters:
lBorderBackColor = Number value of the line or border
background color
BOOL SetBorderColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBorderColor);
Function:
Set the line or border color.
Parameters:
lBorderColor
= Number value of the line or border color
BOOL SetBorderColorBottom (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBorderColorBottom);
Function:
Set the color for the right and bottom part (shadow) of the 3D border .
Parameters:
lBorderColorBottom
4-56
= Number value of the 3D shadow color
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetBorderColorTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBorderColorTop);
Function:
Set the color for the left and top part of the 3D border.
Parameters:
lBorderColorTop = Number value of the left and top 3D border color
BOOL SetButtonColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lButtonColor);
Function:
Set the button color for slider objects.
Parameters:
lButtonColor
= Number value of the button color in slider objects
BOOL SetColorBottom (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lColorBottom);
Function:
Set the color for the bottom/right part of a slider .
Parameters:
lColorBottom
= Number value of the color of the bottom/right part

of a slider
BOOL SetColorTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lColorTop);
Function:
Set the color for the top/left slider position.
Parameters:
lColorTop
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Number value of the color for the top/left slider

position
4-57
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetFillColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lFillColor);
Function:
Set the fill pattern color.
Parameters:
lFillColor
= Number value of the fill pattern color
Note:
BOOL SetForeColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lForeColor);
Function:
Set the color of the text in the object.
Parameters:
lForeColor
= Number value of the text color
BOOL SetItemBorderBackColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lItemBorderBackColor);
Function:
Set the separate line background color for the "text list" object.
Parameters:
lItemBorderBackColor
= Number value of the background color
BOOL SetItemBorderColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lItemBorderColor);
Function:
Set the separate line color for the "text list" object.
Parameters:
lItemBorderColor = Number value of the separate line color
4-58
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetScaleColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lScaleColor);
Function:
Set the scale color for bar objects.
Parameters:
lScaleColor
= Number value of the scale color in bar objects
BOOL SetSelBGColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lSelBGColor);
Function:
Set the background color for the selected entry in the browser list for the "text
list" object.
Parameters:
lSelBGColor
= Background color for the selected entry
BOOL SetSelTextColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lSelTextColor);
Function:
Set the text color for the selected entry in the browser list for the "text list"
object.
Parameters:
lSelTextColor
= Text color for the selected entry
BOOL SetTrendColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lTrendColor);
Function:
Set the trend color in bar objects.
Parameters:
lTrendColor
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Number value of the trend color in bar objects
4-59
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetUnselBGColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lUnselBGColor);
Function:
Set the background color for unselected entries in the browser list for the "text
list" object.
Parameters:
lUnselBGColor
= Background color for unselected entries in the

browser list
BOOL SetUnselTextColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lUnselTextColor);
Function:
Set the text color for unselected entries in the browser list for the "text list"
object.
Parameters:
lUnselTextColor
4-60
= Number value for the text color
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.20 graphics-set-fill Functions

BOOL SetFilling (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,
BOOL bFilling);
Function:
Activate/deactivate dynamic filling with the background color.
Parameters:
bFilling
= Dynamic filling with the background color

active/inactive
TRUE means dynamic filling with the background color is active.

FALSE means dynamic filling with the background color is inactive.
BOOL SetFillingIndex (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lFillingIndex);
Function:
Set the filling index.
Parameters:
lFillingIndex
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Number value of the filling index
4-61
Global Scripts
08.97
4.4.21 graphics-set-flash Functions

BOOL SetBackFlashColorOff (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName, long int lBackFlashColorOff);
Function:
Set the background color when the flashing attribute is switched off.
Parameters:
lBackFlashColorOff = Number value of the background color when
flashing attribute is switched off
BOOL SetBackFlashColorOn (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBackFlashColorOn);
Function:
Set the background color when the flashing attribute is switched on.
Parameters:
lBackFlashColorOn
= Number value of the background color when

the flashing attribute is switched on
BOOL SetBorderFlashColorOff (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBorderFlashColorOff);
Function:
Set the border or line color when the flashing attribute is switched off.
Parameters:
lBorderFlashColorOff = Number value of the border or line color when
the flashing attribute is switched off
BOOL SetBorderFlashColorOn (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBorderFlashColorOn);
Function:
Set the border or line color when the flashing attribute is switched on.
Parameters:
lBorderFlashColorOn = Number value of the border or line color when
the flashing attribute is switched on
4-62
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetFlashBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bFlashBackColor);
Function:
Activate or deactivate background flashing.
Parameters:
bFlashBackColor
= Background flashing active/inactive
TRUE means background flashing is active.

FALSE means background flashing is inactive.
BOOL SetFlashBorderColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bFlashBorderColor);
Function:
Activate the flashing border or line.
Parameters:
bFlashBorderColor
= Flashing border or line active/inactive
TRUE means border or line flashing is active.

FALSE means border or line flashing is inactive.
BOOL SetFlashForeColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bFlashForeColor);
Function:
Activate the text flashing.
Parameters:
bFlashForeColor = Text flashing active/not active
TRUE means text flashing is active.
FALSE means text flashing is inactive.
BOOL SetFlashRateBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lFlashRateBackColor);
Function:
Set the background flash frequency.
Parameters:
lFlashRateBackColor
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Background flash frequency
4-63
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetFlashRateBorderColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lFlashRateBorderColor);
Function:
Set the line or border flash frequency.
Parameters:
lFlashRateBorderColor = Line or border flash frequency
BOOL SetFlashRateForeColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lFlashRateForeColor);
Function:
Set the text flash frequency.
Parameters:
lFlashRateForeColor
= Text flash frequency
BOOL SetForeFlashColorOff (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lForeFlashColorOff);
Function:
Set the text color when the flashing attribute is switched off.
Parameters:
lForeFlashColorOff
= Number value of the text color when the

flashing attribute is switched off
BOOL SetForeFlashColorOn (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lForeFlashColorOn);
Function:
Set the text color when the flashing attribute is switched on.
Parameters:
lForeFlashColorOn
4-64
= Number value of the text color when the

flashing attribute is switched on
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.22 graphics-set-focus-Functions
BOOL Set_Focus(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName);
Function:
Places the focus on the specified object
4.4.23 graphics-set-font Functions

BOOL SetAlignmentLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName, long int lAlignmentLeft);
Function:
Set the horizontal alignment (aligned left, centered, aligned right) of the text.
Parameters:
lAlignmentLeft
= Number value of the horizontal alignment

(aligned left, centered, aligned right) of the text
BOOL SetAlignmentTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lAlignmentTop);
Function:
Set the vertical alignment of the text (top, center, bottom).
Parameters:
lAlignmentTop
= Number value of the vertical alignment of the text

(top, center, bottom)
BOOL SetFontBold (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bFontBold);
Function:
Turns the "Bold" text attribute on and off.
Parameters:
bFontBold
= "Bold" on/off
TRUE means "Bold" is on.

FALSE means "Bold" is off.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-65
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetFontItalic (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bFontItalic);
Function:
Turn the "Italic" text attribute on and off.
Parameters:
bFontItalic
= "Italic" on/off
TRUE means "Italic" is on.

FALSE means "Italic" is off.
BOOL SetFontName (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, char* szFontName);
Function:
Set a font.
Parameters:
szFontName
= Pointer to the name of the font
BOOL SetFontSize (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lFontSize);
Function:
Set the font size.
Parameters:
lFontSize
= Font size
BOOL SetFontUnderline (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bFontUnderline);
Function:
Turns the "Underline" text attribute on and off.
Parameters:
bFontUnderline
= Text style "Underline" on/off
TRUE means "Underline" is on.

FALSE means "Underline" is off.
4-66
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetOrientation (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bOrientation);
Function:
Set the direction of the text (horizontal/vertical).
Parameters:
bOrientation
= Horizontal/vertical text direction
TRUE means horizontal text direction.

FALSE means vertical text direction.
BOOL SetText (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

char* szText);
Function:
Set a pointer to a static text. For radio- and check-boxes, as well as for
polygons and polylines, the element or point has to be set with the SetIndex
function before calling the SetText function.
Parameters:
szText
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Pointer to static text
4-67
Global Scripts
08.97
4.4.24 graphics-set-geometry Functions

BOOL SetActualPointLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName, long int lActualPointLeft);
Function:
Set the current horizontal position of the corner point for a polygon or
polyline in relation to the origin of the picture. Set the current point of the
polygon with the SetIndex function.
Parameters:
lActualPointLeft
= X value (horizontal position) of the corner point for

a polygon or polyline
BOOL SetActualPointTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lActualPointTop);
Function:
Set the current vertical position of the corner point for a polygon or a polyline
in relation to the origin of the picture. Set the current point of the polygon
with the SetIndex function.
Parameters:
lActualPointTop
= Y value (vertical position) of the corner point for a

polygon or polyline
BOOL SetBoxCount (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBoxCount);
Function:
Set the number of check boxes in a check box area or option buttons in an
option group.
Parameters:
lBoxCount
= Number of check boxes in a check box area or

option buttons in an option group.
BOOL SetDirection (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lDirection);
Function:
Set the bar direction (up, down, left, or right) in bar objects.
Parameters:
lDirection
4-68
= Number value of the bar direction

(up, down, left, or right) in bar objects
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetEndAngle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lEndAngle);
Function:
Set end angle of pie and ellipse segments as well as circular and ellipse arc s.
Parameters:
lEndAngle
= End angle of pie and ellipse segments as well as

circular and ellipse arc s
BOOL SetHeight (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

long int lHeight);
Function:
Set the height of the rectangle surrounding an object.
Parameters:
lHeight
= Height of the rectangle surrounding an object
Note:
BOOL SetLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

long int lLeft);
Function:
Set the location on the X axis of the left upper corner of the rectangle
surrounding an object.
Parameters:
lLeft
= X value (location on the X axis) of the left upper

corner of the rectangle surrounding an object
BOOL SetPointCount (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lPointCount);
Function:
Set the number of corners for a polygon or polyline.
Parameters:
lPointCount
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Number of corners
4-69
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetRadius (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

long int lRadius);
Function:
Set the radius of a circle, pie segment, or circular arc.
Parameters:
lRadius
= Radius
BOOL SetRadiusHeight (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lRadiusHeight);
Function:
Set the vertical radius of an ellipse, an ellipse segment, or an ellipse arc.
Parameters:
lRadiusHeight
= Vertical radius
BOOL SetRadiusWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lRadiusWidth);
Function:
Set the horizontal radius of an ellipse , an ellipse segment, or an ellipse arc.
Parameters:
lRadiusWidth
= Horizontal radius
BOOL SetReferenceRotationLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lReferenceRotationLeft );
Valid for line, polygon and polyline.
Function:
Set the X value of the rotation reference (the reference point around which the
object is rotated).
Parameters:
lReferenceRotationLeft
4-70
= X value of the rotation reference
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetReferenceRotationTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lReferenceRotationTop);
Function:
Set the Y value of the rotation reference (the reference point around which the
object is rotated).
Parameters:
lReferenceRotationTop
= Y value of the rotation reference
BOOL SetRotationAngle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lRotationAngle);
Function:
Set the clockwise rotation angle (in degrees) of the object around the rotation
point.
Parameters:
lRotationAngle
= Rotation angle
BOOL SetRoundCornerHeight (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lRoundCornerHeight);
Function:
Set the vertical radius of the corner of a rounded rectangle.
Parameters:
lRoundCornerHeight
= Vertical radius
BOOL SetRoundCornerWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lRoundCornerWidth);
Function:
Set the horizontal radius of the corner of a rounded rectangle.
Parameters:
lRoundCornerWidth = Horizontal radius
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-71
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetStartAngle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lStartAngle);
Function:
Set the beginning angle for pie and ellipse segments as well as circular and
ellipse arcs.
Parameters:
lStartAngle
= Beginning angle
BOOL SetTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

long int lTop);
Function:
Set the Y axis value of the left upper corner of the rectangle surrounding an
object.
Parameters:
lTop
= Y axis value of the left upper corner of the

rectangle surrounding an object
BOOL SetWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

long int lWidth);
Function:
Set the width of the rectangle surrounding an object.
Parameters:
lWidth
= Width of the rectangle surrounding an object
Note:
BOOL SetZeroPoint (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lZeroPoint);
Function:
Set the zero point in bar objects.
Parameters:
lZeroPoint
4-72
= Zero point in bar objects
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.25 graphics-set-i_o Functions

BOOL SetAssumeOnExit (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName, BOOL bAssumeOnExit);
Function:
Set the system to accept the input as soon as the field is exited (using the Tab
or Enter key).
Parameters:
bAssumeOnExit
= Accept the input as soon as the field is

exited: yes/no.
TRUE means the system accepts the input as soon as the field is exited.
FALSE means the system does not accept the input as soon as the field is
exited.
BOOL SetAssumeOnFull (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bAssumeOnFull);
Function:
Set the system to exit the input field automatically (without Tab or Enter key)
and accept the input as soon as the input has been completed (the specified
number of characters was entered).
Parameters:
bAssumeOnFull
= Value accepted as soon as the input has been

completed: yes/no
TRUE means the system automatically accepts the input as soon as the input
has been completed.
FALSE means the system does not automatically accept the input as soon as
the input has been completed.
BOOL SetBitNumber(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBitNumber);
Function:
Set the relevant bit in the output value for the "bit" list type.
Parameters:
lBitNumber
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Relevant bit in the output value
4-73
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetClearOnError (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bClearOnError);
Function:
Set the field entry in the input field to be deleted automatically when there is
an invalid input.
Parameters:
bClearOnError
= Automatically delete the field entry in the input field

when there is an invalid input: yes/no
TRUE means the field entry is deleted automatically when there is an invalid
input.
FALSE means the field entry is not deleted automatically when there is an
invalid input.
BOOL SetClearOnNew (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bClearOnNew);
Function:
Set the field entry in the input field to be deleted when there is a new entry.
Parameters:
bClearOnNew
= Delete the field entry in the input field when there is

a new entry: yes/no
TRUE means the system deletes the field entry when there is a new entry.
FALSE means the system does not delete the field entry when there is a new
entry.
BOOL SetHiddenInput (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bHiddenInput);
Function:
Hide the input value during input. An asterisk (*) is displayed for each
character.
Parameters:
bHiddenInput
= Hidden input: yes/no.
TRUE means the input is hidden.

FALSE means the input is not hidden.
4-74
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetNumberLines(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lNumberLines);
Function:
Set the number of visible rows in a browser list for the "text list" object.
Note:
If the number of configured text is larger than the number of visible rows, the
browser list receives a vertical scroll bar.
Parameters:
lNumberLines
= Number of visible rows
BOOL SetOutputValueChar (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, char* szOutputValueChar);
Function:
Set a pointer to the output value.
Parameters:
szOutputValueChar
= Pointer to the output value
BOOL SetOutputValueDouble (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, double dOutputValueDouble);
Function:
Set the output value.
Parameters:
dOutputValueDouble
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Output value
4-75
Global Scripts
08.97
4.4.26 graphics-set-limits Functions

BOOL SetAlarmHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName, double dAlarmHigh);
Function:
Set the alarm high limit in bar objects.
Parameters:
dAlarmHigh
= Alarm high limit
BOOL SetAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, double dAlarmLow);
Function:
Set the alarm low limit in bar objects.
Parameters:
dAlarmLow
= Alarm low limit
BOOL SetCheckAlarmHigh
(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName, BOOL
bCheckAlarmHigh);
Function:
Set the monitoring function for the limit value for "alarm high."
Parameters:
bCheckAlarmHigh = Monitor: yes/no
TRUE means the limit value for "alarm high" is monitored.
FALSE means the limit value for "alarm high" is not monitored.
BOOL SetCheckAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bCheckAlarmLow);
Function:
Set the monitoring function for the limit value for "alarm low."
Parameters:
bCheckAlarmLow
= Monitor: yes/no
TRUE means the limit value for "alarm low" is monitored.

FALSE means the limit value for "alarm low" is not monitored.
4-76
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetCheckLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bCheckLimitHigh4);
Function:
Set the monitoring function for the high limit value for "reserve 4" in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bCheckLimitHigh4 = Monitor: yes/no
TRUE means the high limit value for "reserve 4" is monitored.
FALSE means the high limit value for "reserve 4" is not monitored.
BOOL SetCheckLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bCheckLimitHigh5);
Function:
Set the monitoring function for the high limit value for "reserve 5" in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bCheckLimitHigh5 = Monitor: yes/no
TRUE means the high limit value for "reserve 5" is monitored.
FALSE means the high limit value for "reserve 5" is not monitored.
BOOL SetCheckLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bCheckLimitLow4);
Function:
Set the monitoring function for the low limit value for "reserve 4" in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bCheckLimitLow4
= Monitor: yes/no
TRUE means the low limit value for "reserve 4" is monitored.
FALSE means the low limit value for "reserve 4" is not monitored.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-77
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetCheckLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bCheckLimitLow5);
Function:
Set the monitoring function for the low limit value for "reserve 5" in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bCheckLimitLow5
= Monitor: yes/no
TRUE means the low limit value for "reserve 5" is monitored.
FALSE means the low limit value for "reserve 5" is not monitored.
BOOL SetCheckToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bCheckToleranceHigh);
Function:
Set the monitoring function for the limit value for "tolerance high" in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bCheckToleranceHigh
= Monitor: yes/no
TRUE means that the limit value for "tolerance high" is monitored.
FALSE means that the limit value for "tolerance high" is not monitored.
BOOL SetCheckToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bCheckToleranceLow);
Function:
Set the monitoring function for the limit value for "tolerance low" in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bCheckToleranceLow
= Monitor: yes/no
TRUE means that the limit value for "tolerance low" is monitored.
FALSE means that the limit value for "tolerance low" is not monitored.
4-78
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetCheckWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bCheckWarningHigh);
Function:
Set the monitoring function for the limit value for "warning high" in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bCheckWarningHigh
= Monitor: yes/no
TRUE means that the limit value for "warning high" is monitored.
FALSE means that the limit value for "warning high" is not monitored.
BOOL SetCheckWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bCheckWarningLow);
Function:
Set the monitoring function for the limit value for "warning low" in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bCheckWarningLow
= Monitor: yes/no
TRUE means that the limit value for "warning low" is monitored.
FALSE means that the limit value for "warning low" is not monitored.
BOOL SetColorAlarmHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lColorAlarmHigh);
Function:
Set the bar color when the limit value of "alarm high" is reached.
Parameters:
lColorAlarmHigh = Number value of the bar color
BOOL SetColorAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lColorAlarmLow);
Function:
Set the bar color when the limit value of "alarm low" is reached.
Parameters:
lColorAlarmLow = Number value of the bar color
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-79
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetColorLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lColorLimitHigh4);
Function:
Set the bar color when the high limit value of "reserve 4" is reached in bar
objects.
Parameters:
lColorLimitHigh4 = Number value of the bar color
BOOL SetColorLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lColorLimitHigh5);
Function:
Set the bar color when the high limit value of "reserve 5" is reached in bar
objects.
Parameters:
lColorLimitHigh5 = Number value of the bar color
BOOL SetColorLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lColorLimitLow4);
Function:
Set the bar color when the low limit value of "reserve 4" is reached in bar
objects.
Parameters:
lColorLimitLow4 = Number value of the bar color
BOOL SetColorLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lColorLimitLow5);
Function:
Set the bar color when the low limit value of "reserve 5" is reached in bar
objects.
Parameters:
lColorLimitLow5 = Number value of the bar color
4-80
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetColorToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lColorToleranceHigh);
Function:
Set the bar color when the limit value of "tolerance high" is reached in bar
objects.
Parameters:
lColorToleranceHigh
= Number value of the bar color
BOOL SetColorToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lColorToleranceLow);
Function:
Set the bar color when the limit value of "tolerance low" is reached in bar
objects.
Parameters:
lColorToleranceLow
BOOL SetColorWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lColorWarningHigh);
Function:
Set the bar color when the limit value of "warning high" is reached in bar
objects.
Parameters:
lColorWarningHigh
BOOL SetColorWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lColorWarningLow);
Function:
Set the bar color when the limit value of "warning low" is reached in bar
objects.
Parameters:
lColorWarningLow = Number value of the bar color
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-81
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, double dLimitHigh4);
Function:
Set the high limit value for "reserve 4" in bar objects.
Parameters:
dLimitHigh4
= High limit value for "reserve 4"
BOOL SetLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, double dLimitHigh5);
Function:
Set the high limit value for "reserve 5" in bar objects.
Parameters:
dLimitHigh5
= High limit value for "reserve 5"
BOOL SetLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, double dLimitLow4);
Function:
Set the low limit value for "reserve 4" in bar objects.
Parameters:
dLimitLow4
= Low limit value for "reserve 4"
BOOL SetLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, double dLimitLow5);
Function:
Set the low limit value for "reserve 5" in bar objects.
Parameters:
dLimitLow5
= Low limit value for "reserve 5"
BOOL SetLimitMax (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, double dLimitMax);
Function:
Set the high limit value for I/O field s.
Parameters:
dLimitMax
4-82
= High limit value

WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetLimitMin (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, double dLimitMin);
Function:
Set the low limit value for I/O fields.
Parameters:
dLimitMin
= Low limit value
BOOL SetMarker (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

BOOL bMarker);
Function:
Set the display of the limit value in bar objects.
Parameters:
bMarker
= Limit value display: on/off
TRUE means the limit value is displayed as a scale value in bar objects.
FALSE means the limit value is not displayed in bar objects.
BOOL SetToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, double dToleranceHigh);
Function:
Set the limit value for "tolerance high" in bar objects.
Parameters:
dToleranceHigh
= Limit value for "tolerance high"
BOOL SetToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, double dToleranceLow);
Function:
Set the limit value for "tolerance low" in bar objects.
Parameters:
dToleranceLow
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Limit value for "tolerance low"
4-83
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetTypeAlarmHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bTypeAlarmHigh);
Function:
Set the manner in which the limit value for "alarm high" is provided in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bTypeAlarmHigh = Limit value for "alarm high" as percentage or
absolute
TRUE means the limit value for "alarm high" is provided as a percentage.
FALSE means the limit value for "alarm high" is provided as an absolute.
BOOL SetTypeAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bTypeAlarmLow);
Function:
Set the manner in which the limit value for "alarm low" is provided in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bTypeAlarmLow
= Limit value for "alarm low" as percentage or

absolute
TRUE means the limit value for "alarm low" is provided as a percentage.
FALSE means the limit value for "alarm low" is provided as an absolute.
BOOL SetTypeLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bTypeLimitHigh4);
Function:
Set the manner in which the high limit value for "reserve 4" is provided in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bTypeLimitHigh4 = High limit value for "reserve 4" as percentage or
absolute
TRUE means the high limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as a percentage.
FALSE means the high limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as an absolute.
4-84
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetTypeLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bTypeLimitHigh5);
Function:
Set the manner in which the high limit value for "reserve 5" is provided in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bTypeLimitHigh5 = High limit value for "reserve 5" as percentage or
absolute
TRUE means the high limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as a percentage.
FALSE means the high limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as an absolute.
BOOL SetTypeLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bTypeLimitLow4);
Function:
Set the manner in which the low limit value for "reserve 4" is provided in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bTypeLimitLow4 = Low limit value for "reserve 4" as percentage or
absolute
TRUE means the low limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as a percentage.
FALSE means the low limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as an absolute.
BOOL SetTypeLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bTypeLimitLow5);
Function:
Set the manner in which the low limit value for "reserve 5" is provided in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bTypeLimitLow5 = Low limit value for "reserve 5" as percentage or
absolute
TRUE means the low limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as a percentage.
FALSE means the low limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as an absolute.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-85
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetTypeToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bTypeToleranceHigh);
Function:
Set the manner in which the limit value for "tolerance high" is provided in
bar objects.
Parameters:
bTypeToleranceHigh
= Limit value for "tolerance high" as percentage

or absolute
TRUE means the limit value for "tolerance high" is provided as a percentage.
FALSE means the limit value for "tolerance high" is provided as an absolute.
BOOL SetTypeToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bTypeToleranceLow);
Function:
Set the manner in which the limit value for "tolerance low" is provided in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bTypeToleranceLow
= Limit value for "tolerance low" as percentage

or absolute
TRUE means the limit value for "tolerance low" is provided as a percentage.
FALSE means the limit value for "tolerance low" is provided as an absolute.
BOOL SetTypeWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bTypeWarningHigh);
Function:
Set the manner in which the limit value for "warning high" is provided in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bTypeWarningHigh
= Limit value for "warning high" as percentage or

absolute
TRUE means the limit value for "warning high" is provided as a percentage.
FALSE means the limit value for "warning high" is provided as an absolute.
4-86
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetTypeWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bTypeWarningLow);
Function:
Set the manner in which the limit value for "warning low" is provided in bar
objects.
Parameters:
bTypeWarningLow
= Limit value for "warning low" as percentage or

absolute
TRUE means the limit value for "warning low" is provided as a percentage.
FALSE means the limit value for "warning low" is provided as an absolute.
BOOL SetWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, double dWarningHigh);
Function:
Set the limit value for "warning high" in bar objects.
Parameters:
dWarningHigh
= Limit value for "warning high"
BOOL SetWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, double dWarningLow);
Function:
Set the limit value for "warning low" in bar objects.
Parameters:
dWarningLow
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Limit value for "warning low"
4-87
Global Scripts
08.97
4.4.27 graphics-set-link Functions

BOOL SetLink(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName,LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName, LPLINKINFO() pLink);
Function:
Create a tag link of object properties.
Parameters:
lpszPropertyName = Object property
pLink
= Address entry of the tag link structure
Structure:
The tag structure consists of the LinkTyp, dwCycle, and szLinkName
parameters.
LinkTyp:
1
direct tag link
2
indirect tag link
dwCycle:
0
Upon change
1
250 ms
2
500 ms
3
1s
4
2s
5
5s
6
10 s
7
1 min
8
5 min
9
10 min
10
1 hr
11-15 User cycle 1 to 5
szLinkName:
The tag name
Example:
{
LINKINFO linkinfo;
linkinfo.lLinkType = 1;
linkinfo.cwCycle = 3;
strcpy(linkinfo.szLinkName, Tag1);
SetLink( ...., &linkinfo);
4-88
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.28 graphics-set-misc Functions

BOOL SetAverage (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName, BOOL bAverage);
Function:
Determine if the last 15 values in a bar object are averaged.
Parameters:
bAverage
= Average the values: yes/no
TRUE means the last 15 values will be averaged.

FALSE means the last 15 values will not be averaged.
BOOL SetBoxType (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBoxType);
Function:
Set the field type of an I/O object (input field, output field, input/output field).
Parameters:
lBoxType
= Field type of an I/O object (input field, output field,

input/output field)
BOOL SetColorChangeType(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bColorChangeType);
Function:
Set the type of color change for bars.
Parameters:
bColorChangeType
= Type of color change: total/segment
TRUE means a color change for the bar segment.

FALSE means a color change for the entire bar.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-89
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetCursorControl (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bCursorControl);
Function:
Set the cursor control for I/O fields.
Parameters:
bCursorControl
= Cursor control: on/off
TRUE means that the cursor control is turned on in I/O field s (an alpha
cursor jumps to the next field in the TAB sequence after exiting the current
field).
FALSE means that the cursor control is turned off in I/O fields.
BOOL SetCursorMode (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bCursorMode);
Function:
Set the cursor mode for the picture.
Parameters:
bCursorMode
= Cursor mode: tab order sequence/alpha cursor

sequence
TRUE means that the cursor mode for the picture is an alpha cursor sequence.
FALSE means that the cursor mode for the picture is a tab order sequence.
BOOL SetEditAtOnce (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bEditAtOnce);
Function:
Set the input for I/O fields.
Parameters:
bEditAtOnce
= Immediate input: yes/no
TRUE means that the immediate input attribute is set to "yes" for I/O field s
(you can make an input immediately upon accessing the I/O field with the
Tab key, without having to carry out any further action).
FALSE means that the immediate input attribute is set to "no" for I/O fields.
4-90
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetExtendedOperation (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bExtendedOperation);
Function:
Set the extended operation for sliders.
Parameters:
bExtendedOperation
= Extended operation: yes/no
TRUE means that the extended operation attribute is set to "yes" for sliders
(the slider is set to a new appropriate minimum/maximum limit value by
clicking on the area outside of the current slider setting)
FALSE means that the extended operation attribute is set to "no" for sliders.
BOOL SetHysteresis (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bHysteresis);
Function:
Set the display for bar objects (with or without hysteresis).
Parameters:
bHysteresis
= Display with or without hysteresis
TRUE means that the display occurs with hysteresis.

FALSE means that the display occurs without hysteresis.
BOOL SetHysteresisRange (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, double dHysteresisRange);
Function:
Set the hysteresis in the bar object display (hysteresis as a percent of the
display value).
Parameters:
dHysteresisRange = Hysteresis
BOOL SetMax (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

double dMax);
Function:
Set the absolute value for a full value view with bar and slider objects.
Parameters:
dMax
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Maximum value
4-91
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetMin (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

double dMin);
Function:
Set the absolute value for the smallest value view for bar and slider objects.
Parameters:
dMin
= Minium value
BOOL SetOffsetLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lOffsetLeft);
Function:
Set the horizontal distance of the picture from the left edge of the window in
picture windows.
Parameters:
lOffsetLeft
= Picture offset
BOOL SetOffsetTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lOffsetTop);
Function:
Set the vertical distance of the picture from the top edge of the window in
picture windows.
Parameters:
lOffsetTop
= Picture offset
BOOL SetOperation (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bOperation);
Function:
Determine whether objects can be controlled.
Parameters:
bOperation
= Object can be controlled: yes/no
TRUE means that the object can be controlled.

FALSE means that the object cannot be controlled.
Note:
4-92
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetOperationMessage (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bOperationMessage);
Valid for the I/O field, check box, option button, and slider objects
Function:
Determine whether a message is output when an operation is successfully
carried out.
Parameters:
bOperationMessage
= A message is output when an operation is

successfully carried out: yes/no
TRUE means that a message is output when an operation is successfully

carried out.
FALSE means that no message is output when an operation is successfully
carried out.
BOOL SetOperationReport (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bOperationReport);
control.
Function:
Determine whether the reason for operator activity in objects is reported.
Parameters:
bOperationReport
= The reason for operator activity is

reported: yes/no
TRUE means that the reason for operator activity is reported.

FALSE means that the reason for operator activity is not reported.
Note:
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-93
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetPasswordLevel (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lPasswordLevel);
control.
Function:
Set the authorization level for controlling the object.
Parameters:
lPasswordLevel
= Authorization level
Note:
BOOL SetPictureName (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName, char* szPictureName);
Function:
Set a pointer to the name of a picture contained in a picture object.
Parameters:
szPictureName
= Pointer to the name of the picture
BOOL SetProcess (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

double dProcess);
Valid for the slider, bar, check box, and option group objects.
Function:
For sliders and bars:
Set the value of the presetting for the process value to be displayed.
For check boxes and option groups:
Select the box(es).
Parameters:
dProcess
= Value of the default
BOOL SetSmallChange (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lSmallChange);
Function:
Set the number of steps the slider can be moved with a mouse click.
Parameters:
lSmallChange
4-94
= Number of steps set
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetTrend (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

BOOL bTrend);
Function:
Set the trend display in bar objects.
Parameters:
bTrend
= Display trend: yes/no
TRUE means that the trend is displayed in a bar object.

FALSE means that the trend is not displayed in a bar object.
BOOL SetVisible (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

BOOL bVisible);
Function:
Determine whether an object is displayed.
Parameters:
bVisible
= Object is displayed: yes/no
TRUE means that the object is displayed.

FALSE means that the object is not displayed.
Note:
BOOL SetZeroPointValue (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, double dZeroPointValue);
Function:
Set the absolute value for the zero point in a bar display.
Parameters:
dZeroPointValue = Absolute value for the zero point
BOOL SetZoom (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

long int lZoom);
Function:
Set the zoom factor for a picture window.
Parameters:
lZoom
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Zoom factor
4-95
Global Scripts
08.97
4.4.29 graphics-set-ole_control Functions

BOOL SetPosition(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,
long int lPosition);
Function:
Set the slider position for the OCX slider.
Parameters:
lPosition
= Slider position of the OCX slider
BOOL SetRangeMax(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lRangeMax);
Function:
Set the maximum setting range for the OCX slider.
Parameters:
lRangeMax
= Maximum setting range for the OCX slider
BOOL SetRangeMin(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lRangeMin);
Function:
Set the minimum setting range for the OCX slider.
Parameters:
lRangeMin
4-96
= Minimum setting range for the OCX slider
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.30 graphics-set-pictures Functions

BOOL SetPictureDeactivated(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName, char* szPictureDeactivated);
Function:
Set the picture name for the "deactivated" state of a round button.
Parameters:
szPictureDeactivated
= Picture name for the "deactivated" state
BOOL SetPictureDown(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, char* szPictureDown);
Function:
Set the picture name for the "on/pressed" status of a round button.
Parameters:
szPictureDown
= Picture name for the "on/pressed" status
BOOL SetPictureUp(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, char* szPictureUp);
Function:
Set the picture name for the "off/not pressed" status of a round button.
Parameters:
szPictureUp
= Picture name for the "off/not pressed" status
BOOL SetPicDeactTransparent(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lPicDeactTransparent);
Function:
Set the transparent color for the "deactivated" status of a round button.
Note:
Parameters:
lPicDeactTransparent = Transparent color for the "deactivated" status
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-97
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetPicDeactUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bPicDeactUseTransColor);
Function:
Control the transparent color for the "deactivated" status of a round button
Parameters:
bPicDeactUseTransColor
= Transparent color yes/no
TRUE Use transparent color for the "deactivated" status.

FALSE Do not use transparent color for the "deactivated" status.
BOOL SetPicDownTransparent(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lPicDownTransparent);
Function:
Set the transparent color for the "on/pressed" status of a round button.
Note:
Parameters:
lPicDownTransparent
= Transparent color for the "on/pressed" status
BOOL SetPicDownUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bPicDownUseTransColor);
Function:
Control the transparent color for the "on/pressed" status of a round button.
Parameters:
bPicDownUseTransColor
TRUE Use transparent color for the "on/pressed" status.

FALSE Do not use transparent color for the "on/pressed" sta tus.
4-98
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetPicTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lPicTransColor);
Function:
Set the transparent color of the background picture of a graphic object.
Note:
Parameters:
lPicTransColor
= Transparent color of the background picture
BOOL SetPicUpTransparent(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lPicUpTransparent);
Function:
Set the transparent color for the "off/not pressed" status of a round button.
Note:
Parameters:
lPicUpTransparent
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Transparent color "off/not pressed"
4-99
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetPicUpUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bPicUpUseTransColor);
Function:
Control the transparent color for the "off/not pressed" status of a round
button.
Parameters:
bPicUpUseTransColor
TRUE Use the transparent color for the "off/not pressed" status.
FALSE Do not use the transparent color for the "off/not pressed" status.
BOOL SetPicUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bPicUseTransColor);
Function:
Control the transparent color of the background picture of a graphic object.
Parameters:
bPicUseTransColor
TRUE Use transparent color for the background picture.

FALSE Do not use transparent color fro the background picture.
4-100
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.31 graphics-set-property-Funktionen
BOOL SetPropBOOL(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName, LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName, BOOL bValue)
Function:
Sets the attribute with the value bValue.
Parameters:
lpszPropertyName = OLE-Automation-Name of the attribute
bValue
= Value (TRUE, FALSE)
Example:
SetPropBOOL("Picture1","CustomizedObject1","Visible1",FALSE);
//ReturnType BOOL
The self-defined attribute of the OLE-Automation-Name Visible1 of the

customized object CustomizedObject1 in the picture Picture1 is set to
FALSE.
BOOL SetPropChar(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName, char* szValue)
Function:
Sets the attribute value to which the pointer szValue is pointing.
Parameters:
szValue
= Zeiger on the value
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-101
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetPropDouble(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName, double dValue)
Function:
Sets the attribute with the value dValue.
Parameters:
dValue
= Value
BOOL SetPropWord(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName, long lValue)
Function:
Sets the attribute with the value lValue.
Parameters:
lValue
= Value
4-102
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.4.32 graphics-set-state Functions

BOOL SetBasePicTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName, long int lBasePicTransColor);
Function:
Set the transparent color of the base picture of a status display.
Note:
Parameters:
lBasePicTransColor
= Transparent color of the base picture
BOOL SetBasePicUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bBasePicUseTransColor);
Function:
Control the transparent color of the base picture of a status display.
Parameters:
bBasePicUseTransColor
TRUE Use the transparent color in the base picture .

FALSE Do not use the transparent color in the base picture .
BOOL SetFlashFlashPicture(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bFlashFlashPicture);
Function:
Control the flashing of the flash picture in a status display.
Parameters:
bFlashFlashPicture
TRUE Flash picture dynamic

FALSE Flash picture static
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-103
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetFlashPicTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lFlashPicTransColor);
Function:
Set the transparent color of the flash picture for a status display.
Note:
Parameters:
lFlashPicTransColor = Transparent color in the flash picture
BOOL SetFlashPicUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bFlashPicUseTransColor);
Function:
Control the transparent color of the flash picture in a status display.
Parameters:
bFlashPicUseTransColor
TRUE Use transparent color in the flash picture .

FALSE Do not use transparent color in the flash picture.
4-104
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetFlashRateFlashPic(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lFlashRateFlashPic);
Function:
Set the flash frequency of the flash picture in a status display.
Parameters:
lFlashRateFlashPic
0:
1:
2:
3:
= Flash picture flash frequency
No flash frequency
Flash frequency slow (approximately 0.5 Hz)
Flash frequency medium (approximately 2 Hz)
Flash frequency fast (approximately 8 Hz)
Note:
Since flashing is a software implementation, the frequency depends on the
system and the hardware (number of objects, processor, memory, update time,
etc.).
BOOL SetIndex(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

long int lIndex);
Function:
Sets the index of a polygon or polyline, and therefore the current point of the
object.
Parameters:
lIndex
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Index value
4-105
Global Scripts
08.97
4.4.33 graphics-set-style Functions

BOOL SetBackBorderWidth(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR
lpszObjectName, long int lBackBorderWidth);
Function:
Set the weight of the border for 3D borders and slider objects.
Parameters:
lBackBorderWidth = Border weight
BOOL SetBorderEndStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBorderEndStyle);
Function:
Set the line end style.
Parameters:
lBorderEndStyle
= Number value of the line end style
BOOL SetBorderStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBorderStyle);
Function:
Set the line or border style.
Parameters:
lBorderStyle
= Number value of the line or border style
BOOL SetBorderWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBorderWidth);
Function:
Set the line or border weight.
Parameters:
lBorderWidth
4-106
= Number value of the weight of the line or border
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetBoxAlignment (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lBoxAlignment);
Function:
Align the control elements in check boxes or option buttons to the left or
right.
Parameters:
lBoxAlignment
= Number value of the alignment of the control

elements in check boxes or option buttons to the
left or right
BOOL SetFillStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lFillStyle);
Function:
Set the fill pattern.
Parameters:
lFillStyle
= Number value of the type of the fill pattern
Note:
BOOL SetFillStyle2 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long int lFillStyle2);
Function:
Set the fill pattern of a bar in a bar display.
Parameters:
lFillStyle2
= Number value of the fill pattern of a bar in a bar

display
BOOL SetItem BorderStyle(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long ind lItemBorderStyle);
Function:
Set the separate line type for the "text list" object.
Parameters:
lItemBorderStyle = Number value of the separate line
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-107
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetItem BorderWidth(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, long ind lItemBorderWidth);
Function:
Set the separate line weight for the "text list" object.
Parameters:
lItemBorderWidth
= Number value of the separate line weight
BOOL SetPressed(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

BOOL bPressed);
Valid only for round buttons
Function:
Control the switch setting of a round button.
Parameters:
bPressed
= Switch setting of a round button
TRUE Switch setting "on/pressed"

FALSE Switch setting "off/not pressed".
4-108
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetToggle(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,

BOOL bToggle);
Valid only for round buttons
Function:
Control the switch function latched or not latched.
Parameters:
bToggle
= Switch function latched or not latched
TRUE Switch function not latched

FALSE Switch function latched
BOOL SetWindowsStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR

lpszObjectName, BOOL bWindowStyle);
Valid only for buttons
Function:
Turn the "Windows Style" on or off.
Parameters:
bWindowStyle
= "Windows Style" on/off
TRUE corresponds to "Windows Style" which means that the button is

displayed as is standard for Windows (gray buttons without borders).
FALSE corresponds to "not Windows Style," which means you can set the
look of the button yourself.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-109
Global Scripts
08.97
4.5 Tag
The Tag function category is divided into the following functions:
get functions
General get functions
get state functions
get wait functions
get state wait functions
set Functions
General set functions
set state functions
set wait functions
set state wait functions
The wait functions differ from the other functions in that the tag values are
accessed directly at the process. The tags are not logged into the Control
Center.
You can reduce the communication network load significantly by
implementing the appropriate get-wait or get-state-wait functions instead of
the get or get-state functions because the tags are then no longer scanned
cyclically for changes in this case.
Since the system waits until the wait functions are eectured, the processes can
be better synchronized.
The return value of the set functions is the error code
TRUE: no errors
FALSE: an error occurred
4-110
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.5.1 tag-get-Functions
short int GetTagBit (Tag Tag_Name);
Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "short int" data type
Parameters:
Tag_Name
= Name of the process tag
BYTE GetTagByte (Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "BYTE" data type
Parameters:
Tag_Name
char* GetTagChar (Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Pointer to the value of the process tag in the "char" data type
Parameters:
Tag_Name
double GetTagDouble (Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "double" data type
Parameters:
Tag_Name
DWORD GetTagDWord (Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "DWORD" data type
Parameters:
Tag_Name
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-111
Global Scripts
08.97
float GetTagFloat (Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "float" data type
Parameters:
Tag_Name
BOOL GetTagRaw (Tag Tag_Name, BYTE* pValue, DWORD size);

Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = no errors
FALSE = an error occurred
Function:
Gets a value from the raw data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
pValue
size

= Byte pointer to a byte box that contains raw data
= Size of the box in bytes
signed char GetTagSByte(Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "signed char" data type
Parameters:
Tag_Name
long GetTagSDWord(Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "long" data type
Parameters:
Tag_Name
4-112
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
short GetTagSWord(Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "short" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
BOOL GetTagValue (LPDM_VARKEY lpdmVarKey,

LPDM_VAR_UPDATE_STRUCT lpdmresult, LPCMN_ERROR lpdmError);
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = no errors
Function:
Enables the transfer of a value in the form of a variant.
Gets a pointer to the result structure that contains the value.
Parameters:
lpdmVarKey
lpdmresult
lpdmError
= Pointer to the DM_VARKEY structure

= Pointer to the value of the "variant" data type
= Pointer to the structure that cont ains the error
description
WORD GetTagWord (Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "WORD" data type
Parameters:
Tag_Name
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-113
Global Scripts
08.97
4.5.2 tag-get-state Functions

short int GetTagBitState (Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);
Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "short int" data type
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate

= Status of the tag
BYTE GetTagByteState (Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate

= Status of the tag
char* GetTagCharState (Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate

= Status of the tag
double GetTagDoubleState (Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate
4-114

= Status of the tag
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
DWORD GetTagDWordState (Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate

= Status of the tag
float GetTagFloatState (Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate

= Status of the tag
BOOL GetTagRawState (Tag Tag_Name, BYTE* pValue, DWORD size,

PDWORD lp_dwstate);
Return Value:
Error code
TRUE = no errors
Function:
Value of the process tags in the raw data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
pValue
size
lp_dwstate

= Status of the tag
signed char GetTagSByteState(Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "signed char" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01

= Status of the tag
4-115
Global Scripts
08.97
long GetTagSDWordState(Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "long" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate

= Status of the tag
short GetTagSWordState(Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate

= Status of the tag
WORD GetTagWordState (Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate
4-116

= Status of the tag
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.5.3 tag-get-wait Functions

VARIANT_BOOL GetTagBitWait(Tag Tag_Name);
Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "VARIANT_BOOL" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
BYTE GetTagByteWait(Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
char* GetTagCharWait(Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
double GetTagDoubleWait(Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
DWORD GetTagDWordWait(Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-117
Global Scripts
08.97
float GetTagFloatWait(Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
BOOL GetTagMultiWait(const char* pFormat,...)

Return Value:
TRUE = no error occurred
Function:
The values of multiple tags are determined and stored at the corresponding
addresses in the indicated format.
Parameters:
pFormat = Format description like at the function printfs.
Followed by the tag name and the address
of the value.
Example:
DWORD dwTag1Value;
char* szTag2Value; //Storage for the tag value is created by
the function with SysMalloc
BOOL ok;
ok=GetTagMultiWait ("%d %s, "Tag1", &dwTag1Value, "Tag2",
&szTag2Value);
BOOL GetTagRawWait(Tag Tag_Name , BYTE pValue[], DWORD size);

Return Value:
TRUE = no errors
Function:
Get a value from the raw data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
pValue
size
4-118

WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
signed char GetTagSByteWait(Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
long GetTagSDWordWait(Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
short GetTagSWordWait(Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
BOOL GetTagValueWait(LPDM_VARKEY lpdmVarKey,

LPDM_VAR_UPDATE_STRUCT lpdmresult, LPCMN_ERROR lpdmError);
Return Value:
TRUE = no errors
Function:
Allow the transmission of a value in the form of a variant.
Get the pointer to the result structure that contains the value.
Parameters:
lpdmVarKey
lpdmresult
lpdmError
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01

= Pointer to the value of the "Variant" data type
= Pointer to the structure that contains the error
description
4-119
Global Scripts
08.97
WORD GetTagWordWait(Tag Tag_Name);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
4-120
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.5.4 tag-get-state-wait Functions

VARIANT_BOOL GetTagBitStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD
lp_dwstate);
Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "VARIANT_BOOL" data type
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate

= Status of the tag
BYTE GetTagByteStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate

= Status of the tag
char* GetTagCharStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Pointer to the value of the process tag in the "char" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate
= Name of process tag

= Status of the tag
double GetTagDoubleStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01

= Status of the tag
4-121
Global Scripts
08.97
DWORD GetTagDWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "DWORD" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate

= Status of the tag
float GetTagFloatStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "float" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate

= Status of the tag
BOOL GetTagMultiStateWait(DWORD* pdwState, const char* pFormat)

Return Value:
Function:
The values and states of multiple tags are determined and stored at the
corresponding addresses in the indicated format.
Parameters:
pdwState = Field, in which the tag states are stored
Followed by the tag name and the address
of the value.
Example:
DWORD dwSate[2];
DWORD dwTag1Value;
char* szTag2Value; //Storage for the tag value is created by
the function with SysMalloc
BOOL ok;
ok=GetTagMultiStateWait ("%d %s, &dwSate, "Tag1",
&dwTag1Value, "Tag2", &szTag2Value);
4-122
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL GetTagRawStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, BYTE pValue[], DWORD

size, PDWORD lp_dwstate);
Return Value:
TRUE = no errors
Function:
Determines a value of the raw data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
pValue
size
lp_dwstate

= Status of the tag
signed char GetTagSByteStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate

= Status of the tag
long GetTagSDWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01

= Status of the tag
4-123
Global Scripts
08.97
short GetTagSWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Value of the process tag in the "short" data type
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate

= Status of the tag
WORD GetTagWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, PDWORD lp_dwstate);

Return Value:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
lp_dwstate
4-124

= Status of the tag
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
4.5.5 Tag-set Functions

BOOL SetTagBit (Tag Tag_Name, short int value);
Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "short int" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagByte (Tag Tag_Name, BYTE value);

Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "BYTE" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagChar (Tag Tag_Name, LPSTR value);

Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "char" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
= Name of the tag

= Pointer to the value of the tag
BOOL SetTagDouble (Tag Tag_Name, double value);

Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "double" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
4-125
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetTagDWord (Tag Tag_Name, DWORD value);

Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "DWORD" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagFloat (Tag Tag_Name, float value);

Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "float" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagRaw (Tag Tag_Name, BYTE* pValue, DWORD size);

Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value that is addressed by the pointer
pValue and has a length of "size."
Parameters:
Tag_Name
pValue
size
= Name of the tag

= Pointer to a byte box that contains the value of the raw
data tag
= Size of the box
BOOL SetTagSByte(Tag Tag_Name, signed char value);

Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "signed char." data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
4-126
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetTagSDWord(Tag Tag_Name, long value);

Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "long" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagSWord(Tag Tag_Name, short value);

Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "short" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagValue (LPDM_VARKEY lpdmVarKey, LPVARIANT

lpdmValue, PDWORD dwState, LPCMN_ERROR lpdmError);
Function:
Enable the transfer of a value in the form of a variant.
Set the pointer to the value of the "variant" data type.
Parameters:
lpdmVarKey
lpdmValue
dwState
lpdmError
= Pointer to the "DM_VARKEY" structure

= Status of the tag. The status is returned after the
function is executed.
description
BOOL SetTagWord (Tag Tag_Name, WORD value);

Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "WORD" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
4-127
Global Scripts
08.97
4.5.6 tag-set-state Functions

BOOL SetTagBitState (Tag Tag_Name, short int value, PDWORD
lp_dwstate);
Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "short int" data type.
"lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
= Status of the tag after the function is executed
BOOL SetTagByteState (Tag Tag_Name, BYTE value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagCharState (Tag Tag_Name, LPSTR value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "char" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
4-128
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetTagDoubleState (Tag Tag_Name, double value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagDWordState (Tag Tag_Name, DWORD value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagFloatState (Tag Tag_Name, float value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
4-129
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetTagRawState (Tag Tag_Name, BYTE* pValue, DWORD size,

PDWORD lp_dwstate);
Function:
Set the value of the process tag to a value that is addressed by the "pValue"
pointer and has a length of "size."
Parameters:
Tag_Name
pValue
size
lp_dwstate
= Name of the tag

= Pointer to the value
= Length of the value
BOOL SetTagSByteState(Tag Tag_Name, signed char value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "signed char" data type.
"lp_dwstate" contains the tag status after the function is executed.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagSDWordState(Tag Tag_Name, long value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
4-130
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetTagSWordState(Tag Tag_Name, short value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagWordState (Tag Tag_Name, WORD value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
4-131
Global Scripts
08.97
4.5.7 tag-set-wait Functions

BOOL SetTagBitWait(Tag Tag_Name, short value);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagByteWait(Tag Tag_Name, BYTE value);

Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagCharWait(Tag Tag_Name, LPSTR value);

Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "LPSTR" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
= Name of the tag

= Pointer to the the tag value
BOOL SetTagDoubleWait(Tag Tag_Name, double value);

Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
4-132
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetTagDWordWait(Tag Tag_Name, DWORD value);

Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagFloatWait(Tag Tag_Name, float value);

Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagMultiWait(const char* pFormat,...)

Return Value:
Function:
The values of multiple tags will be set in the indicated format.
Parameters:
Followed by the tag name and the corresponding
value.
Example:
BOOL ok;
ok=SetTagMultiWait ("%d %s, "Tag1", 34,
"Tag2", "newValue");
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-133
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetTagRawWait(Tag Tag_Name, BYTE pValue[], DWORD size);

Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value that is addressed by the "pValue"
pointer and has the "size" length.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
pValue
size
= Name of the tag

= Pointer to a byte box that contains the value of the raw
data tag
= Size of the box
BOOL SetTagSByteWait(Tag Tag_Name, signed char value);

Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagSDWordWait(Tag Tag_Name, long value);

Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagSWordWait(Tag Tag_Name, short value);

Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
4-134
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetTagValueWait(LPDM_VARKEY lpdmVarKey, LPVARIANT

lpdmValue, PDWORD dwState, LPCMN_ERROR lpdmError);
Function:
Allows the transmission of a value in the form of a variant.
Sets the pointer to the value of the "Variant" data type.
Parameters:
lpdmVarKey
lpdmValue
dwState
lpdmError

= Status of the tag that is returned after the function is
executed
description
BOOL SetTagWordWait(Tag Tag_Name, WORD value);

Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
4-135
Global Scripts
08.97
4.5.8 tag-set-state-wait Functions

BOOL SetTagBitStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, short value, PDWORD
lp_dwstate);
Function:
"lp_dwstate" contains the tag status after the function is executed.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagByteStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, BYTE value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagCharStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, LPSTR value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "LPSTR" data type.
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
4-136
= Name of the tag

= Pointer to the tag value
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetTagDoubleStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, double value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagDWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, DWORD value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagFloatStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, float value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
4-137
Global Scripts
08.97
BOOL SetTagMultiStateWait(DWORD* pdwState, const char* pFormat,...)

Return Value:
Function:
The values and states of multiple tags will be stored in the indicated format.
Parameters:
pdwState = Field, in which the tag states are stored
Followed by the tag name and the value.
Example:
DWORD dwState[3];
BOOL ok;
ok=SetTagMultiStateWait ("%d %s %f, &dwState[0], "Tag1", 34,
"Tag2", "newValue",
"Tag3", 4.67);
BOOL SetTagRawStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, BYTE pValue[], DWORD

size, PDWORD lp_dwstate);
Function:
Set the value of the process tag with a value that is addressed by the "pValue"
pointer and has a length of "size."
Parameters:
Tag_Name
pValue
size
lp_dwstate
= Name of the tag

= Pointer to the value
= Length of the value
BOOL SetTagSByteStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, signed char value,

PDWORD lp_dwstate);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
4-138
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
BOOL SetTagSDWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, long value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagSWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, short value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
BOOL SetTagWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name, WORD value, PDWORD

lp_dwstate);
Function:
Parameters:
Tag_Name
value
lp_dwstate
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
= Name of the tag

= Value of the tag
4-139
Global Scripts
08.97
4.6 wincc
The "WinCC" function category is divided into the following functions:
system
The return value of the functions is one of the following error codes:
TRUE: The function was executed without errors.
FALSE: An error occurred.
4.6.1 wincc system

BOOL DeactivateRTProject ();
Function:
Deactivate the currently running project.
BOOL ExitWinCC ();

Function:
Exit WinCC.
DWORD GetLanguage();
Return Value:
Language identifier for the language set at run time.
Function:
Transmits the language that is set.
The following assignments apply (Language identifier hexadecimal):
German (Germany) = 0x407
English (USA) = 0x409
French (France) = 0x40C
For additional language identifier s see section 6.1.
4-140
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
DWORD* InquireLanguage(DWORD* dwCount);

Return Value:
Pointer to a box that contains the transmitted language identifier s.
Function:
Transmits all languages that are configured in the text library for run time.
Use dwCount to specify where the number of transmitted language identifiers
should be stored.
The following assignments apply (language identifier hexadecimal):
For additional language identifier s see section 6.1.
Parameters:
dwCount = Pointer to the number of transmitted language identifier s
BOOL SetLanguage(DWORD dwLocaleID);

Function:
Sets the language that is current for the run time by means of the language
identifier provided.
The following assignments apply (language identifier hexadecimal):
For additional language identifiers see section 6.1.
Parameters:
dwLocaleID = Language identifier
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
4-141
Global Scripts
4-142
08.97
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
5 Actions
Global Script actions are actions you can create and change yourself. They are
only valid in the actual project in which they were created.
Use Global Script actions at run time to control the process. They are
executed by means of a trigger.
Create a Global Script action with the Global Script editor. Start this editor in
the Control Center.
Use the following steps to create a Global Script action:
1. Formulate the function (see Section 2).

2. Expand the function information (see Section 2).
3. Set the trigger(s) as the starting events.
4. Compile the action (see Section 2).
5. Set the operator authorization.
6. Save the action and, if necessary, rename it (see Section 2).
Now you have created your Global Script action.
Global Script actions can be exported and imported. An imported action
completely replaces the action in the active window.
You can assign a level of authorization to your action.
If a new action is created, the header file apdefap.h is integrated automatically
by the project folder ...\<Projectname>\LIBRARY. If there is no project
function available, the header file from the folder ...\APLIB is integrated. This
makes the standard and project functions available in the actions.
In the case of multi-user system, there is a difference between global and local
actions.
Global actions are loaded in the project folder independently of the computer
(...\<Projectname>\PAS). These are active on any computer.
Local actions are loaded according to their computer in the project directory
(...\<Projectname>\<Computername>\PAS). This means that local actions are
only active on the corresponding computer.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
5-1
Global Scripts
08.97
How to Set the Trigger:

1. If you have more than one editing window open at the same time, select
the window in which the desired action is located. This selection makes
the window active.
2. Click on the
button to open the "Description" dialog box.
3. Switch to the "Trigger" tab.
You can select from the following trigger types:

Acyclic: The action is only triggered once at a defined point in time.
Cyclic: The action is continuously triggered in a set time frame.
Tag: The action is triggered when the value of a certain tag changes.
5-2
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
How to Select a Trigger Type:

1. Mark the desired trigger type in the "Description" dialog box and click the
"Add" button.
or
Click the right mouse button on the trigger type and select "Add" in the
pop-up menu).
If necessary, open the "Timer" folder.
The "Add Trigger" dialog box opens. It has a contents specific to the type
of trigger selected.
2. Make the following additional selections:
Acyclic:
Set the date and time for the trigger . Enter an optional trigger name.
The trigger name appears in the "Description" dialog box as the label
for the icon in the trigger browser. If you do not enter a trigger name,
the date and time you created the trigger appears with the icon.
Cyclic:
From the "Cycle" list box, select the desired cycle time, which is the
time that passes between two action triggers. Enter an optional trigger
name. The trigger name appears in the "Description" dialog box as the
label for the icon in the trigger browser. If you do not enter a trigger
name, the cycle time you set appears with the icon.
Tag:
a. In the "Tag Name" text line, enter the name of the tag you want
to use as a trigger when the value changes.
b. Click on the "Apply" button to transfer the tag to the tag list.
or
Click on the
button to open the "Select a Tag" dialog in
which you can select a tag.
Click on "OK" to close the "Add Trigger" dialog box.
3. Once you have set the trigger(s) click on the "OK" button to close the
"Description" dialog box.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
5-3
Global Scripts
08.97
All of the triggers entered in the trigger browser are effective. Each single
trigger event will start the action.
Examples:
In the "Tag" trigger type, you entered multiple tags as the trigger. The
action starts as soon as the value of one of these tags changes.
In the "Cyclic" trigger type, you entered multiple cyclic triggers. Each of
these triggers starts the action itself. If several trigger events are
concurrent, the action starts as many times as there are trigger events at
that point in time.
Note: Since you can assign multiple trigger events to an action, the
interaction of the individual triggers and the run time of the action can lead to
undesirable effects. You should take this into consideration when assigning
triggers.
Change one of your entered triggers by marking it in the trigger browser and
clicking the "Change" button (or use the "Change" menu item in the pop -up
menu).
Delete an entered trigger by marking it in the trigger browser and clicking
the "Delete" button (or use the "Delete" menu item in the pop-up menu).
Once you have set the trigger, close the "Description" box by clicking on the
"OK" button.
How to Set the Operator Authorization:

1. If you have more than one editing window open at the same time, select
the window that contains the action to which you want to assign the
authorization level. This selection makes the window active.
2. Click on the
button to open the "Authorization Levels" dialog box.
3. From the list of authorization levels, select the desired authorization level.
4. Click the "OK" button to close the dialog box.
You have now set the operator authorization for your action.
5-4
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
6 Value Definitions of the Attributes

Values are defined and symbolic names are assigned for the following
attributes:
Language identifiers
Colors
Line end styles
Line styles
Flash frequencies
Text orientation
Bar orientation
I/O-field, field type
I/O-field, data type of the field content
Element orientation in check- and radio-boxes
Use the symbolic names or the corresponding number values as parameters in

the C functions that you write yourself.
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
6-1
Global Scripts
08.97
6.1 Language Identifiers

WinCC only supports the SUBLANG_DEFAULT languages of Windows.
Symbolic description
LANG_ARABIC
LANG_AFRIKAANS
LANG_ALBANIAN
LANG_BASQUE
LANG_BULGARIAN
LANG_BYELORUSSIAN
LANG_CATALAN
LANG_CHINESE
LANG_CROATIAN
LANG_CZECH
LANG_DANISH
LANG_DUTCH
LANG_ENGLISH
LANG_ESTONIAN
LANG_FAEROESE
LANG_FARSI
LANG_FINNISH
LANG_FRENCH
LANG_GERMAN
LANG_GREEK
LANG_HEBREW
LANG_HUNGARIAN
LANG_ICELANDIC
LANG_INDONESIAN
LANG_ITALIAN
LANG_JAPANESE
LANG_KOREAN
LANG_LATVIAN
LANG_LITHUANIAN
LANG_NORWEGIAN
LANG_POLISH
LANG_PORTUGUESE
LANG_ROMANIAN
LANG_RUSSIAN
LANG_SLOVAK
LANG_SLOVENIAN
LANG_SORBIAN
LANG_SPANISH
LANG_SWEDISH
LANG_THAI
LANG_TURKISH
LANG_UKRAINIAN
6-2
Value (hexadecimal)
0x0401
0x0436
0x041C
0x042D
0x0402
0x0423
0x0403
0x0404
0x041A
0x0405
0x0406
0x0413
0x0409
0x0425
0x0438
0x0429
0x040B
0x040C
0x0407
0x0408
0x040D
0x040E
0x040F
0x0421
0x0410
0x0411
0x0412
0x0426
0x0427
0x0414
0x0415
0x0416
0x0418
0x0419
0x041B
0x0424
0x042E
0x040A
0x041D
0x041E
0x041F
0x0422
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
6.2 Colors
Color
black
white
red
dark red
green
dark green
blue
dark blue
yellow
dark yellow
cyan
dark cyan
magenta
dark magenta
light gray
dark gray
Symbolic Name
CO_BLACK
CO_WHITE
CO_RED
CO_DKRED
CO_GREEN
CO_DKGREEN
CO_BLUE
CO_DKBLUE
CO_YELLOW
CO_DKYELLOW
CO_CYAN
CO_DKCYAN
CO_MAGENTA
CO_DKMAGENTA
CO_LTGRAY
CO_DKGRAY
Value (hexadecimal)
00000000
00FFFFFF
000000FF
00000080
0000FF00
00008000
00FF0000
00800000
0000FFFF
00008080
00FFFF00
00808000
00FF00FF
00800080
00C0C0C0
00808080
6.3 Line End Styles

Line End
Symbolic Name
Value
rounded
LE_NO
LE_HOLLOW_ARROW
0
1
LE_FULL_ARROW
LE_CFULL_ARROW
LE_LINE
LE_HOLLOW_CIRCLE
LE_FULL_CIRCLE
2
3
4
5
6
Example:
long value;
value = LE_HOLLOW_ARROW;
value <<= 16;
value += LE_HOLLOW_CIRCLE;
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
//left end is an empty arrow

//right end is an empty circle
6-3
Global Scripts
08.97
6.4 Line Styles

Line Style
Symbolic Name
Value
hidden
LS_SOLID
LS_DASH
LS_DOT
LS_DASHDOT
LS_DASHDOTDOT
LS_INVISIBLE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6.5 Flash Frequencies

Number value
0
1
2
3
Flash frequency
Flashing off
0,5 Hz
2 Hz
8 Hz
Since flashing is realized software-technologically, the frequency is systemand hardware-dependent (number of objects, CPU, memory, update cycles,
etc.). The values in the above table are therefore only for reference.
6.6 Text Orientation

Orientation
left
centered
right
Number value
0
1
2
6.7 Bar Orientation

Bar orientation
top
bottom
left
right
Number value
0
1
2
3
6.8 I/O-Field, Field Type

Type
Output
Input
Output and input
6-4
Number value
0
1
2
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
6.9 I/O-Field, Data Type of the Field Content

Data type
binary
decimal
string
hexadecimal
Number value
0
1
2
3
6.10 Element Orientation in Check- and Radio Boxes

Orientation
left
right
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Number value
0
1
6-5
Global Scripts
6-6
08.97
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
Index
3
3D border 4-11; 4-49; 4-56; 4-57; 4-106
C standard library 4-1

c_bib 4-1; 4-4
circle 4-14; 4-20; 4-70
color 6-1; 6-3
current horizontal position 4-68
current messages 3-7
current project 2-1
current tag connection 4-34
current vertical position 4-68
Cursor 2-2; 4-90
cursor control 4-36; 4-90
cursor location 2-3
cursor mode 4-36; 4-90
CYAN 6-3
cycle 3-20; 5-3
cyclic 5-2; 5-3; 5-4
A
AcknowledgeAllPicture 3-25
Activate/deactivate 4-61
Acyclic 5-2; 5-3
Alarm 3-3; 3-5; 4-26; 4-76
Align 4-107
authorization level 3-23; 4-94; 5-4
AXC_OnBtnArcLong 3-3
AXC_OnBtnArcShort 3-3
AXC_OnBtnHornAckn 3-4
AXC_OnBtnLoop 3-5
AXC_OnBtnMsgFirst 3-5
AXC_OnBtnMsgNext 3-6
AXC_OnBtnMsgPrev 3-6
AXC_OnBtnMsgWin 3-7
AXC_OnBtnPrint 3-7
AXC_OnBtnScroll 3-7
AXC_OnBtnVisibleAckn 3-8
axis 4-7; 4-8; 4-19; 4-20; 4-22; 4-51; 4-52;
4-53; 4-69; 4-72
B
Background 4-15; 4-16; 4-59; 4-60; 4-63
bar direction 4-19; 4-68
bar scale 4-7; 4-8; 4-52; 4-53
bar segment 4-36; 4-89
Base 4-47
base picture 4-47; 4-103
BLACK 6-3
BLUE 6-3
border 4-10; 4-11; 4-14; 4-15; 4-16; 4-35;
4-41; 4-49; 4-56; 4-57; 4-62; 4-63; 4-64; 4-106
border color 4-10; 4-15; 4-56; 4-57
BorderStyle 4-107
BorderWidth 4-108
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
D
DASH 6-4
DASHDOT 6-4
DASHDOTDOT 6-4
DeactivateRTProject 4-140
DKBLUE 6-3
DKCYAN 6-3
DKGRAY 6-3
DKGREEN 6-3
DKMAGENTA 6-3
DKRED 6-3
DKYELLOW 6-3
DLLs 1-1
DM_VARKEY structure 4-113; 4-119; 4-135
DOT 6-4
Index-1
Global Scripts
E
ellipse 4-14; 4-19; 4-21; 4-22; 4-69; 4-70; 4-72
ellipse arc 4-21; 4-22; 4-69; 4-70; 4-72
ellipse segment 4-14; 4-19; 4-21; 4-22; 4-69;
4-70; 4-72
empty arrow 6-3
error 3-20; 3-21; 3-22; 3-23; 3-25; 3-26; 3-27;
3-28; 3-29; 3-30; 3-31; 3-32; 3-33; 3-34; 3-35;
3-36; 3-37; 3-38; 3-39; 3-40; 3-41; 3-42; 3-43;
3-44; 3-45; 3-46; 3-47; 4-2; 4-112; 4-113;
4-115; 4-119; 4-127; 4-135
error message 4-2
ExitWinCC 4-140
extended 4-91
F
FieldName 3-39
fill pattern 4-11; 4-49; 4-50; 4-58; 4-107
fill pattern color 4-58
filling index 4-61
FILTER 4-2
flash frequency 4-16; 4-48; 4-63; 4-64; 4-105
flash picture 4-47; 4-48; 4-103; 4-104; 4-105
flashing 4-15; 4-16; 4-48; 4-62; 4-63; 4-64;
4-103; 4-105; 6-4
font 4-5; 4-6; 4-12; 4-17; 4-18; 4-65; 4-66
font color 4-12
font size 4-18; 4-66
foreground 4-38
FULL 6-3
G
Get 3-25; 4-17; 4-40; 4-42; 4-43; 4-118; 4-119
GetActualPointLeft 4-19
GetActualPointTop 4-19
GetAdaptBorder 4-35
GetAdaptPicture 4-35
GetAdaptSize 4-35
GetAlarmHigh 4-26
GetAlarmLow 4-26
GetAlignment 4-7
GetAlignmentLeft 4-17
GetAlignmentTop 4-17
GetAssignments 4-23
GetAssumeOnExit 4-23
GetAssumeOnFull 4-23
GetASVarIndex 3-25
GetAverage 4-35
GetAxisSection 4-7
Index-2
08.97
GetBackBorderWidth 4-49
GetBackColor 4-10
GetBackColor2 4-10
GetBackColor3 4-10
GetBackColorBottom 4-10
GetBackColorTop 4-10
GetBackFlashColorOff 4-15
GetBackFlashColorOn 4-15
GetBasePicReferenced 4-47
GetBasePicTransColor 4-47
GetBasePicture 4-47
GetBasePicUseTransColor 4-47
GetBitNumber 4-23
GetBorderBackColor 4-10
GetBorderColor 4-10
GetBorderColorBottom 4-11
GetBorderColorTop 4-11
GetBorderEndStyle 4-49
GetBorderFlashColorOff 4-15
GetBorderFlashColorOn 4-15
GetBorderStyle 4-49
GetBorderWidth 4-49
GetBoxAlignment 4-49
GetBoxCount 4-19
GetBoxType 4-35
GetButtonColor 4-11
GetCaption 4-35
GetCheckAlarmHigh 4-26
GetCheckAlarmLow 4-26
GetCheckLimitHigh4 4-26
GetCheckLimitHigh5 4-26
GetCheckLimitLow4 4-27
GetCheckLimitLow5 4-27
GetCheckToleranceHigh 4-27
GetCheckToleranceLow 4-27
GetCheckWarningHigh 4-27
GetCheckWarningLow 4-28
GetClearOnError 4-23
GetClearOnNew 4-24
GetCloseButton 4-36
GetColorAlarmHigh 4-28
GetColorAlarmLow 4-28
GetColorBottom 4-11
GetColorChangeType 4-36
GetColorLimitHigh4 4-28
GetColorLimitHigh5 4-28
GetColorLimitLow4 4-28
GetColorLimitLow5 4-29
GetColorToleranceHigh 4-29
GetColorToleranceLow 4-29
GetColorTop 4-11
GetColorWarningHigh 4-29
GetColorWarningLow 4-29
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
GetCountPicture 3-25
GetCSigPicture 3-22
GetCursorControl 4-36
GetCursorMode 4-36
GetDataFormat 4-24
GetDirection 4-19
GetEditAtOnce 4-36
GetEndAngle 4-19
GetExponent 4-7
GetExtendedOperation 4-37
GetFillColor 4-11
GetFilling 4-14
GetFillingIndex 4-14
GetFillStyle 4-49
GetFillStyle2 4-50
GetFlashBackColor 4-15
GetFlashBorderColor 4-15
GetFlashFlashPicture 4-47
GetFlashForeColor 4-16
GetFlashPicReferenced 4-48
GetFlashPicTransColor 4-48
GetFlashPicture 4-47
GetFlashPicUseTransColor 4-48
GetFlashRateBackColor 4-16
GetFlashRateBorderColor 4-16
GetFlashRateFlashPic 4-48
GetFlashRateForeColor 4-16
GetFontBold 4-17
GetFontItalic 4-17
GetFontName 4-17
GetFontSize 4-18
GetFontUnderline 4-18
GetForeColor 4-11
GetForeFlashColorOff 4-16
GetForeFlashColorOn 4-16
GetGrid 4-20
GetGridColor 4-12
GetGridHeight 4-20
GetGridWidth 4-20
GetHeight 4-20
GetHiddenInput 4-24
GetHotkey 4-37
GetHysteresis 4-37
GetHysteresisRange 4-37
GetIndexFromMask 3-25
GetInputValueChar 4-24
GetInputValueDouble 4-24
GetItemBorderBackColor 4-12
GetItemBorderColor 4-12
GetItemBorderStyle 4-50
GetItemBorderWidth 4-50
GetLanguage 4-140
GetLanguageSwitch 4-37
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Global Scripts
GetLastChange 4-37
GetLayer 4-19
GetLeft 4-20
GetLeftComma 4-7
GetLimitHigh4 4-29
GetLimitHigh5 4-29
GetLimitLow4 4-30
GetLimitLow5 4-30
GetLimitMax 4-30
GetLimitMin 4-30
GetLink 4-34
GetListType 4-24
GetLongStrokesBold 4-7
GetLongStrokesOnly 4-8
GetLongStrokesSize 4-8
GetLongStrokesTextEach 4-8
GetMarker 4-30
GetMax 4-38
GetMaximizeButton 4-38
GetMessageClassFromVar 3-25
GetMin 4-38
GetMoveable 4-38
GetNumberLines 4-25
GetOffsetLeft 4-38
GetOffsetTop 4-38
GetOnTop 4-38
GetOperation 4-39
GetOperationMessage 4-39
GetOperationReport 4-39
GetOrientation 4-18
GetOutputFormat 4-25
GetOutputValueChar 4-25
GetOutputValueDouble 4-25
GetPasswordLevel 4-39
GetPicDeactReferenced 4-43
GetPicDeactTransparent 4-43
GetPicDeactUseTransColor 4-43
GetPicDownReferenced 4-44
GetPicDownTransparent 4-44
GetPicDownUseTransColor 4-44
GetPicReferenced 4-44
GetPicTransColor 4-44
GetPictureDeactivated 4-43
GetPictureDown 4-43
GetPictureName 4-40
GetPictureUp 4-43
GetPicUpReferenced 4-44
GetPicUpTransparent 4-45
GetPicUpUseTransColor 4-45
GetPicUseTransColor 4-45
GetPointCount 4-20
GetPosition 4-42
GetPressed 4-50
Index-3
Global Scripts
GetProcess 4-40
GetPropBOOL 4-46
GetPropChar 4-46
GetPropDouble 4-46
GetPropWord 4-46
GetRadius 4-20
GetRadiusHeight 4-21
GetRadiusWidth 4-21
GetRangeMax 4-42
GetRangeMin 4-42
GetReferenceRotationLeft 4-21
GetReferenceRotationTop 4-21
GetRightComma 4-8
GetRotationAngle 4-21
GetRoundCornerHeight 4-21
GetScaleColor 4-12
GetScaleTicks 4-8
GetScaling 4-8
GetScalingType 4-9
GetScrollBars 4-40
GetSelBGColor 4-12
GetSelTextColor 4-12
GetServerName 4-40
GetSignificantMask 3-22
GetSizeable 4-40
GetSmallChange 4-40
GetStartAngle 4-22
GetTagBit 4-111
GetTagBitState 4-114
GetTagBitStateWait 4-121
GetTagBitWait 4-117
GetTagByte 4-111
GetTagByteState 4-114
GetTagByteStateWait 4-121
GetTagByteWait 4-117
GetTagChar 4-111
GetTagCharState 4-114
GetTagCharStateWait 4-121
GetTagCharWait 4-117
GetTagDouble 4-111
GetTagDoubleState 4-114
GetTagDoubleStateWait 4-121
GetTagDoubleWait 4-117
GetTagDWord 4-111
GetTagDWordState 4-115
GetTagDWordStateWait 4-122
GetTagDWordWait 4-117
GetTagFloat 4-112
GetTagFloatState 4-115
GetTagFloatStateWait 4-122
GetTagFloatWait 4-118
GetTagMultiStateWait 4-122
GetTagMultiWait 4-118
Index-4
08.97
GetTagRaw 4-112
GetTagRawState 4-115
GetTagRawStateWait 4-123
GetTagRawWait 4-118
GetTagSByte 4-112
GetTagSByteState 4-115
GetTagSByteStateWait 4-123
GetTagSByteWait 4-119
GetTagSDWord 4-112
GetTagSDWordState 4-116
GetTagSDWordStateWait 4-123
GetTagSDWordWait 4-119
GetTagSWord 4-113
GetTagSWordState 4-116
GetTagSWordStateWait 4-124
GetTagSWordWait 4-119
GetTagValue 4-113
GetTagValueWait 4-119
GetTagWord 4-113
GetTagWordState 4-116
GetTagWordStateWait 4-124
GetTagWordWait 4-120
GetText 4-18
GetToggle 4-50
GetToleranceHigh 4-30
GetToleranceLow 4-30
GetTop 4-22
GetTrend 4-41
GetTrendColor 4-12
GetTypeAlarmHigh 4-31
GetTypeAlarmLow 4-31
GetTypeLimitHigh4 4-31
GetTypeLimitHigh5 4-31
GetTypeLimitLow4 4-31
GetTypeLimitLow5 4-32
GetTypeToleranceHigh 4-32
GetTypeToleranceLow 4-32
GetTypeWarningHigh 4-32
GetTypeWarningLow 4-33
GetUnselBGColor 4-13
GetUnselTextColor 4-13
GetUpdateCycle 4-41
GetVisible 4-41
GetWarningHigh 4-33
GetWarningLow 4-33
GetWidth 4-22
GetWindowBorder 4-41
GetWindowsStyle 4-50
GetZeroPoint 4-22
GetZeroPointValue 4-41
GetZoom 4-41
GMsgFunction 3-3
GREEN 6-3
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
Global Scripts
header 2-6
header file ap_glob 2-1
header file ap_plib 2-1
header file apdefap 2-1
height 3-38; 3-39; 3-46; 3-47; 4-20; 4-69
hidden 4-74
hide 4-74
HOLLOW 6-3
horizontal alignment 4-17; 4-65
hysteresis 4-37; 4-91
OCX 4-42; 4-96

OLE 3-3; 3-4; 3-5; 3-6; 3-7; 3-8; 4-39; 4-40;
4-46; 4-93; 4-94; 4-101; 4-102
OnBtnArcLong 3-3
OnBtnArcShort 3-3
OnBtnComment 3-4
OnBtnEmergAckn 3-4
OnBtnHornAckn 3-4
OnBtnInfo 3-4
OnBtnLanguage 3-5
OnBtnLock 3-5
OnBtnLoop 3-5
OnBtnMsgFirst 3-5
OnBtnMsgLast 3-6
OnBtnMsgNext 3-6
OnBtnMsgPrev 3-6
OnBtnMsgWin 3-7
OnBtnPrint 3-7
OnBtnScroll 3-7
OnBtnSelect 3-8
OnBtnSinglAckn 3-8
OnBtnVisibleAckn 3-8
OnErrorExecute 3-20
OpenPicture 3-9
operator authorization 5-1; 5-4
Orientation 6-4; 6-5
I
I/O field 4-14; 4-23; 4-24; 4-25; 4-30; 4-35;
4-36; 4-39; 4-73; 4-74; 4-75; 4-82; 4-83; 4-90;
4-93
InquireLanguage 4-141
INVISIBLE 6-4
L
language identifier 4-140; 4-141
Length 3-36; 3-37; 3-41; 3-43; 3-44; 4-53;
4-130; 4-138
Library 1-1; 2-5; 5-1
line 4-16; 4-49; 4-64; 6-1; 6-3; 6-4
line end style 4-49; 4-106
line style 4-49; 6-4
Link 1-1
LINKINFO 4-34; 4-88
LinkTyp 4-34; 4-88
LoopInAlarm 3-25
LTGRAY 6-3
M
MAGENTA 6-3
MSRTSetMsgFilter 4-2
MSRTStartMsgService 4-2
MSRTStopMsgService 4-2
P
PASSCheckAreaLevelPermission 3-23
PASSCheckAreaPermission 3-22
PASSLoginDialog 3-23
password 2-4
Process 1-1; 3-2
process control 1-1
process message window 3-7
ProgramExecute 3-22
project function 1-1; 1-2; 2-1; 2-2; 2-3; 2-5;
3-1
PTMUnload 3-26
N
new header files 2-6
new standard function 1-1
notification 4-2
NOTIFY 4-2
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Index-5
Global Scripts
R
Radius 4-20; 4-70
raw data type 4-112; 4-115; 4-118; 4-123
RED 6-3
Report 3-2; 3-7; 3-24
ReportJob 3-24
return value 3-3; 3-9; 4-3; 4-6; 4-110; 4-140
ReturnBaseName 3-37
ReturnContainer 3-34
ReturnName 3-35
ReturnPictureName 3-35; 3-36
ReturnRootContainer 3-36
RPTJobPreview 3-24
RPTJobPrint 3-24
S
SetActualPointLeft 4-68
SetActualPointTop 4-68
SetAlarmHigh 4-76
SetAlarmLow 4-76
SetAlignment 4-51
SetAlignmentLeft 4-65
SetAlignmentTop 4-65
SetAssumeOnExit 4-73
SetAssumeOnFull 4-73
SetASVarIndex 3-26
SetAverage 4-89
SetAxisSection 4-51
SetBackBorderWidth 4-106
SetBackColor 4-55
SetBackColor2 4-55
SetBackColor3 4-55
SetBackColorBottom 4-55
SetBackColorTop 4-56
SetBackFlashColorOff 4-62
SetBackFlashColorOn 4-62
SetBasePicTransColor 4-103
SetBasePicUseTransColor 4-103
SetBitNumber 4-73
SetBorderBackColor 4-56
SetBorderColor 4-56
SetBorderColorBottom 4-56
SetBorderColorTop 4-57
SetBorderEndStyle 4-106
SetBorderFlashColorOff 4-62
SetBorderFlashColorOn 4-62
SetBorderStyle 4-106
SetBorderWidth 4-106
SetBoxAlignment 4-107
SetBoxCount 4-68
SetBoxType 4-89
Index-6
08.97
SetButtonColor 4-57
SetCheckAlarmHigh 4-76
SetCheckAlarmLow 4-76
SetCheckLimitHigh4 4-77
SetCheckLimitHigh5 4-77
SetCheckLimitLow4 4-77
SetCheckLimitLow5 4-78
SetCheckToleranceHigh 4-78
SetCheckToleranceLow 4-78
SetCheckWarningHigh 4-79
SetCheckWarningLow 4-79
SetClearOnError 4-74
SetClearOnNew 4-74
SetColorAlarmHigh 4-79
SetColorAlarmLow 4-79
SetColorBottom 4-57
SetColorChangeType 4-89
SetColorLimitHigh4 4-80
SetColorLimitHigh5 4-80
SetColorLimitLow4 4-80
SetColorLimitLow5 4-80
SetColorToleranceHigh 4-81
SetColorToleranceLow 4-81
SetColorTop 4-57
SetColorWarningHigh 4-81
SetColorWarningLow 4-81
SetCursorControl 4-90
SetCursorMode 4-90
SetDirection 4-68
SetEditAtOnce 4-90
SetEndAngle 4-69
SetExponent 4-51
SetExtendedOperation 4-91
SetFillColor 4-58
SetFilling 4-61
SetFillingIndex 4-61
SetFillStyle 4-107
SetFillStyle2 4-107
SetFlashBackColor 4-63
SetFlashBorderColor 4-63
SetFlashFlashPicture 4-103
SetFlashForeColor 4-63
SetFlashPicTransColor 4-104
SetFlashPicUseTransColor 4-104
SetFlashRateBackColor 4-63
SetFlashRateBorderColor 4-64
SetFlashRateFlashPic 4-105
SetFlashRateForeColor 4-64
SetFontBold 4-65
SetFontItalic 4-66
SetFontName 4-66
SetFontSize 4-66
SetFontUnderline 4-66
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
SetForeColor 4-58
SetForeFlashColorOff 4-64
SetForeFlashColorOn 4-64
SetHeight 4-69
SetHiddenInput 4-74
SetHysteresis 4-91
SetHysteresisRange 4-91
SetIndex 4-18; 4-19; 4-67; 4-68; 4-105
SetItem 4-107; 4-108
SetItemBorderBackColor 4-58
SetItemBorderColor 4-58
SetLanguage 4-141
SetLeft 4-69
SetLeftComma 4-52
SetLimitHigh4 4-82
SetLimitHigh5 4-82
SetLimitLow4 4-82
SetLimitLow5 4-82
SetLimitMax 4-82
SetLimitMin 4-83
SetLink 4-88
SetLongStrokesBold 4-52
SetLongStrokesOnly 4-52
SetLongStrokesSize 4-53
SetMarker 4-83
SetMax 4-91
SetMessageClassToVar 3-26
SetMin 4-92
SetNumberLines 4-75
SetOffsetLeft 4-92
SetOffsetTop 4-92
SetOperation 4-92
SetOperationMessage 4-93
SetOperationReport 4-93
SetOrientation 4-67
SetOutputValueChar 4-75
SetOutputValueDouble 4-75
SetPasswordLevel 4-94
SetPicDeactTransparent 4-97
SetPicDeactUseTransColor 4-98
SetPicDownTransparent 4-98
SetPicDownUseTransColor 4-98
SetPicTransColor 4-99
SetPictureDeactivated 4-97
SetPictureDown 4-97
SetPictureName 4-94
SetPictureUp 4-97
SetPicUpTransparent 4-99
SetPicUpUseTransColor 4-100
SetPicUseTransColor 4-100
SetPointCount 4-69
SetPosition 4-96
SetPressed 4-108
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Global Scripts
SetProcess 4-94
SetPropBOOL 4-101
SetPropChar 4-101
SetPropDouble 4-102
SetPropWord 4-102
SetRadius 4-70
SetRadiusHeight 4-70
SetRadiusWidth 4-70
SetRangeMax 4-96
SetRangeMin 4-96
SetReferenceRotationLeft 4-70
SetReferenceRotationTop 4-71
SetRightComma 4-53
SetRotationAngle 4-71
SetRoundCornerHeight 4-71
SetRoundCornerWidth 4-71
SetScaleColor 4-59
SetScaleTicks 4-53
SetScaling 4-53
SetScalingType 4-54
SetSelBGColor 4-59
SetSelTextColor 4-59
SetSmallChange 4-94
SetStartAngle 4-72
SetTagBit 4-125
SetTagBitState 4-128
SetTagBitStateWait 4-136
SetTagBitWait 4-132
SetTagByte 4-125
SetTagByteState 4-128
SetTagByteStateWait 4-136
SetTagByteWait 4-132
SetTagChar 4-125
SetTagCharState 4-128
SetTagCharStateWait 4-136
SetTagCharWait 4-132
SetTagDouble 4-125
SetTagDoubleState 4-129
SetTagDoubleStateWait 4-137
SetTagDoubleWait 4-132
SetTagDWord 4-126
SetTagDWordState 4-129
SetTagDWordStateWait 4-137
SetTagDWordWait 4-133
SetTagFloat 4-126
SetTagFloatState 4-129
SetTagFloatStateWait 4-137
SetTagFloatWait 4-133
SetTagMultiStateWait 4-138
SetTagMultiWait 4-133
SetTagRaw 4-126
SetTagRawState 4-130
SetTagRawStateWait 4-138
Index-7
Global Scripts
SetTagRawWait 4-134
SetTagSByte 4-126
SetTagSByteState 4-130
SetTagSByteStateWait 4-138
SetTagSByteWait 4-134
SetTagSDWord 4-127
SetTagSDWordState 4-130
SetTagSDWordStateWait 4-139
SetTagSDWordWait 4-134
SetTagSWord 4-127
SetTagSWordState 4-131
SetTagSWordStateWait 4-139
SetTagSWordWait 4-134
SetTagValue 4-127
SetTagValueWait 4-135
SetTagWord 4-127
SetTagWordState 4-131
SetTagWordStateWait 4-139
SetTagWordWait 4-135
SetText 4-67
SetToggle 4-109
SetToleranceHigh 4-83
SetToleranceLow 4-83
SetTop 4-72
SetTrend 4-95
SetTrendColor 4-59
SetTypeAlarmHigh 4-84
SetTypeAlarmLow 4-84
SetTypeLimitHigh4 4-84
SetTypeLimitHigh5 4-85
SetTypeLimitLow4 4-85
SetTypeLimitLow5 4-85
SetTypeToleranceHigh 4-86
SetTypeToleranceLow 4-86
SetTypeWarningHigh 4-86
SetTypeWarningLow 4-87
SetUnselBGColor 4-60
SetUnselTextColor 4-60
SetVisible 4-95
SetWarningHigh 4-87
SetWarningLow 4-87
SetWidth 4-72
SetWindowsStyle 4-109
SetZeroPoint 4-72
SetZeroPointValue 4-95
SetZoom 4-95
SFCLoopInAlarm 3-26
slider 4-10; 4-11; 4-37; 4-38; 4-39; 4-40; 4-42;
4-49; 4-55; 4-56; 4-57; 4-91; 4-92; 4-93; 4-94;
4-96; 4-106
SOLID 6-4
SSMChangeButtonField 3-27
SSMChangeOverviewField 3-27
Index-8
08.97
SSMChangeWorkField 3-28
SSMCheckWorkFieldDown 3-28
SSMCheckWorkFieldLeft 3-29
SSMCheckWorkFieldRight 3-29; 3-31
SSMCheckWorkFieldUp 3-30; 3-32
SSMChgWorkFieldDown 3-30
SSMChgWorkFieldLeft 3-31
SSMDeleteUserSettings 3-32
SSMGetAreaFromPath 3-33
SSMGetAreaFromPicturePath 3-28
SSMGetAreaFromWorkField 3-33
SSMGetAutoLoadSettings 3-34
SSMGetContainer 3-35
SSMGetContainerToPicture 3-34
SSMGetContPict 3-35
SSMGetRootToPicture 3-36
SSMGetScreen 3-36
SSMGetWorkFieldCoordinates 3-37
SSMGetWorkFieldPath 3-37
SSMGetWorkFieldPicture 3-36
SSMLoadCurrentFields 3-38
SSMLoadSettings 3-39
SSMOpenSpecField 3-39
SSMOpenTopField 3-40
SSMOpenTopFieldFixedSize 3-40
SSMPictureMemoryInquire 3-43
SSMPictureMemoryNum 3-43
SSMPictureMemoryRestore 3-44
SSMPictureMemoryStore 3-44
SSMPictureStoreGet 3-41
SSMPictureStoreNum 3-41
SSMPictureStoreSet 3-42
SSMProgramExecute 3-42
SSMRTSetAreaToPicturePath 3-28
SSMSetAreaNameToPicture 3-45
SSMSetLanguage 3-45
SSMStoreCurrentFields 3-46
SSMStoreSettings 3-47
SSMUnload 3-47
style 4-50; 4-109; 6-3; 6-4
SysFree 4-3
SysMalloc 4-3; 4-118; 4-122
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
08.97
T
Tag function category 4-110
TagInfo 3-26
TAGLOG 3-9
TagName 3-25
TEMPLATE 3-9
Timer 5-3
TlgGetColumnPosition 3-9
TlgGetNumberOfColumns 3-10
TlgGetNumberOfRows 3-10
TlgGetNumberOfTrends 3-10
TlgGetRowPosition 3-11
TlgGetRulerArchivNameTrend 3-11
TlgGetRulerTimeTrend 3-11
TlgGetRulerValueTrend 3-12
TlgGetRulerVariableNameTrend 3-12
TlgGetTextAtPos 3-12
TlgTableWindowPressEditRecordButton 3-13
TlgTableWindowPressFirstButton 3-13
TlgTableWindowPressHelpButton 3-13
TlgTableWindowPressInsertRecordButton
3-13
TlgTableWindowPressLastButton 3-13
TlgTableWindowPressNextButton 3-14
TlgTableWindowPressNextItemButton 3-14
TlgTableWindowPressOpenArchiveVariable
SelectionDlgButton 3-14
TlgTableWindowPressOpenDlgButton 3-14
TlgTableWindowPressOpenItemSelectDlg
Button 3-15
TlgTableWindowPressOpenTimeSelectDlg
Button 3-15
TlgTableWindowPressPrevButton 3-15
TlgTableWindowPressPrevItemButton 3-15
TlgTableWindowPressRemoveRecordButton
3-16
TlgTableWindowPressStartStopButton 3-16
TlgTrendWindowPressFirstButton 3-16
TlgTrendWindowPressHelpButton 3-16
TlgTrendWindowPressLastButton 3-16
TlgTrendWindowPressLinealButton 3-17
TlgTrendWindowPressNextButton 3-17
TlgTrendWindowPressNextItemButton 3-17
TlgTrendWindowPressOneToOneButton 3-17
TlgTrendWindowPressOpenDlgButton 3-18
TlgTrendWindowPressOpenItemSelectDlg
Button 3-18
TlgTrendWindowPressOpenTimeSelectDlg
Button 3-18
TlgTrendWindowPressPrevButton 3-19
TlgTrendWindowPressPrevItemButton 3-19
TlgTrendWindowPressStartStopButton 3-19
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01
Global Scripts
TlgTrendWindowPressZoomInButton 3-17;
3-19
trigger 3-3; 5-1; 5-2; 5-3; 5-4
U
update cycle 4-41; 6-4
V
vertical alignment 4-17; 4-65
vertical distance 4-92
vertical radius 4-21; 4-70; 4-71
W
weight 4-50
WHITE 6-3
width 3-38; 3-39; 3-46; 3-47; 4-20; 4-22; 4-72
X
X axis 4-19; 4-20; 4-69
X value of 4-21; 4-70
Y
Y axis 4-19; 4-22; 4-72
Y value 4-21; 4-68; 4-71
YELLOW 6-3
Z
zero point 4-41; 4-72; 4-95
Index-9
Global Scripts
Index-10
08.97
WinCC Manual
C79000-G8276-C107-01

WinCC Graphics Designer

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

WinCC Graphics Designer

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WinCC

Edition August 1997

WinCC, SIMATIC, SINEC, STEP are Siemens registered trademarks.

(The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its

(We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement

Siemens AG 1994 - 1997 All rights reserved

Technical data subject to change

Color Palette ...............................................................................

Object Properties ........................................................................

Configuring Actions ..................................................................

Object types and their properties.................................................

OLE Control Properties ...............................................................

Total Overview and

Up to date information about SIMATIC products can be obtained:

Easy to use, simple interface with tool and graphic palettes

Configurable dynamic behavior of picture objects with support from an

Links to additional functions by means of powerful script configuration

Palettes for creating and editing graphic objects:

Palettes and bars for operating the Graphics Designer:

A dialog window for setting and changing object properties:

Tips & Tricks

Click on the "Help" button to see notes about configuration.

How to Get Information About the Palettes, Menu Commands, and

A question mark appears on the mouse pointer.

How to Change the Size of the Palettes:

2.1 Color Palette

The fill color for area objects (for example, rectangles)

2.1.1 Assigning a Standard Color

2.1.2 Assigning a User-Defined Color

icon in the color palette.

2.2 Object Palette

Standard Objects which include polygon, ellipse, and rectangle

2.2.1 Drawing an Object

How to Draw an Object:

How to Draw a Polygon or a Polyline:

After an object is drawn, the object palette automatically changes to the

2.2.2 Selecting an Object

How to Select Multiple Objects (Multiple Selection):

2.2.3 Changing Object Properties

How to Set the Defaults for Object Properties:

2.2.4 Moving an Object with the Mouse

2.2.5 Sizing an Object with the Mouse

2.2.6 Changing the Start Angle/End Angle with the Mouse

How to Change the Start/End Angle of an Object with the Mouse:

2.3 Style Palette

2.3.1 Changing the Line Style

How to Change the Line/Border Style Using the Style Palette:

in the Style Palette.

in front of your selection to open it.

2.3.2 Changing the Line Weight

How to Change the Line/Border Weight Using the Style Palette:

icon in the style palette.

in front of your selection to open it.

2.3.3 Changing the Line End Styles

icon in the style palette.

in front of your selection to open it.

2.3.4 Changing the Fill Pattern

How to Change the Fill Pattern Using the Style Palette:

icon in the style palette.

in front of your selection to open it.

2.4 Alignment Palette

Change the absolute location of one or more objects.

2.4.1 Aligning Objects

How to Unify the Width/Height of Objects: